DE102005052519B4 - Procedure with arrangement for the reproduction of media data - Google Patents

Abstract

Method with an arrangement for reproducing media data with a control function controlled by the reproduced file for accessing the reproduction via a reproduction device withA) codes of reference addresses contained in the reproduced file, which designate sections of the file and their length information from which locations in the file can be selected for access for reproduction,B) an access control for the reproduction device corresponding to the codes of the file,C) a blocking function which enables the reproduction of the file by the said codes only in excerpts or parts of the file influenced by the codes; characterized in thati. a non-volatile data memory is provided in the playback device which, for each part of the file which is played back from a section which is played back for the first time, stores a file entry belonging to the played back section which refers to the coding of reference addresses to the sections of the file and their length information referred to in paragraph A) in the played back file, which is no longer immediately available to the user in an autonomous manner without further aids and which can be deleted permanently (i.e. even when the device is switched off), ii. and that by summing up the lengths of the file as they correspond to the file entries stored in the non-volatile data memory for the reference addresses and their length information, the playback of the file beyond a total length limited by a predetermined limit is prevented in accordance with the sum formed by this summation.

Description

The invention relates to a method with a device (apparatus) for reproducing files from a data storage device or a data carrier in extracts monitored by a control function according to the device, e.g. visually (e.g. video, etc.) or acoustically (e.g. audio CD, MP3, etc.) or as a text file, hereinafter referred to as a method for reproducing media data (acoustically, visually or text) with a control function for access.

The present invention is based on the object of providing an improved method and an improved playback device which can, for example, play back files as audio or video signals (or also text or images), wherein from the set of a complete file (e.g. the spoken text of a book read aloud, etc.) a part selected for access via a control function is played back.

The general state of the art is described, for example, in DE19717149A1 , EP1465040A2 , WO2004/075088A1 , EP1274000A1 , DE69834218T2 and DE69535388T2 described,

The above-mentioned object is achieved by the methods and playback devices defined in the claims.

In addition to the further general applicability of the method, an MP3 player, a CD player, etc., is intended as a playback device.

In further development, for example, a generally applicable format is provided which, regardless of the data format used (e.g. any standard), can accommodate the parameters and addresses required to carry out the procedure in the file directly in an audio file.

The term "device" is understood very broadly here. For example, a so-called data-loadable electronic newspaper (or book), which already exists in the lab, can be used as a text display device. Graphic elements such as musical notation can also be displayed. For example, a dual footswitch (with two pedals) for page forward and page backward allows the music on the display to be paged forward or backward, etc.

The technical task concerns the control function, which controls access for playback in such a way that, on the one hand, the user can freely access the content in specific sections, but can only play back a portion of the file's overall volume. This overall volume is not a fixed, predefined section, but rather results from the sum of the samples freely selected by the user during playback, which can be played back as often as desired. However, the total volume of the sections freely selected from a file in this way represents only a fraction of the entire file.

In principle, an endless number of data carriers (or loaded data packages such as MP3, etc.) should be playable with such a device. Furthermore, when the user repeatedly plays the files, they should always find exactly the previous status (regarding this file and the recording of the permissible playback volume) and should not be able to play back any further excerpts beyond the volume limited by the file being played, while in principle the excerpts should be freely selected.

Given the worldwide availability of playback devices for various data storage media that has existed for decades and their constant further development, including the use of multimedia computers for this purpose, especially in connection with use via the Internet (for downloading and playing back files), the task of the invention alone can be considered particularly inventive, because it gives both the multimedia sector and the distribution of classic print media, such as books, newspapers, magazines, etc., an enormous boost through the new technical aid relating to the invention.

Preview:

• In this case, in addition to the embodiment according to claim 1, generally valid protection is also sought independently of claim 1 solely for a further development of the invention, using device addresses whose correspondence with the data carrier being played back must be present as a check address contained in the data carrier in order to enable its playback, and in particular in detail such that the data carrier is initially stored on a server (from which a file is to be delivered via the Internet) without a defined device address being present, but the device address is added accordingly by the server to the device connected to the client computer when the file is downloaded, and above all that the server can assign a device address to the device, i.e. can configure it, without this type of copy protection being able to be circumvented.
• This means that a new player can be sold as standard and play any number of non-copy-protected files (as before), as well as any number of copy-protected files. While the manufacturer must adhere to a certain standard, all devices are identical upon delivery; no individual fixed address is required. The device addresses are only assigned during configuration by the server or when a file is downloaded by the server, and are used for a consistency check (possibly with intermediate calculations for decryption using various algorithms) between the file and the device.
• ☺ Preferred option: Since different labels (brand names of file suppliers, or music publishers, publishing houses, etc.) can freely assign different device addresses, for a special further development the file name (or its encoding) is used as the address for addressing the device address associated with the conformity check and the procedure is as follows.

When downloading the file from the server,

1. a) the file name used to identify a specific file (regardless of the device or user) or its identifier is written into a non-volatile memory of the playback device;
2. b) the device address assigned when downloading the file is saved under the addressing (link) of the file name (and/or label).

1. a) Ist der betreffende Dateiname überhaupt gespeichert ? Wenn ja, dann zur nächsten Prüfung, wenn nein, dann Verweigern der Wiedergabe und Abbrechen. Als Option kann der Dateiname auch in den nichtflüchtigen Speicher des Wiedergabegerätes eingeschrieben werden.
2. b) Stimmt die unter der Adresse (Referenz) dieses Dateinamens abgespeicherte Geräteadresse mit der in der Datei gespeicherten Prüfadresse überein (unmittelbar oder nach Entschlüsselung, etc.) ? Wenn ja, dann erfolgt die Wiedergabe, wenn nein, dann Verweigern der Wiedergabe und Abbrechen;

When playing a file, a coincidence check of the file name and device address is performed in the playback device, for example:

1. a) Is the file name in question even saved? If so, then proceed to the next check. If not, then refuse playback and abort. Optionally, the file name can also be written to the playback device's non-volatile memory.
2. b) Does the device address stored under the address (reference) of this file name match the verification address stored in the file (immediately or after decryption, etc.)? If yes, playback is performed; if no, playback is denied and the process is aborted.

The file name can also consist of a higher-level address (LABEL, or name of the file supplier) and the name of the piece = actual file name, or the address of the file name can be structured in such a way that, depending on the coding (e.g. differentiated by a control bit in the file), the device address is only addressed with the higher-level file name (i.e. only addressed with the label), or can be addressed with the entire file name (if the control bit indicates this).

At first glance, this measure appears to be very simple from a technical perspective, but it is by no means trivial, as the state of the art in the marketing of such data storage devices demonstrates. For example, there are currently two opposing views regarding copyright law alone: that of publishers, especially music publishers, and that of copier manufacturers for copying data storage devices. The proposal, which is made here solely for the (to be regarded as independent) further development of the invention, is precisely the opposite: the music industry, and ditto the publishers, should become the driving force for copier manufacturers, and conversely, the copier manufacturers should increase publishers' sales. Instead of copiers, a data storage device for compressed files (such as MP3s) is used, into which the data can be written and transported via the data storage device (as a mini device, plug-in card, etc.) to another location and reloaded onto a corresponding playback device.

This method also allows different storage media suppliers to block access to the storage media they supply, if necessary or if they detect that tampered media are being played on a device. The supplier can block access to only the storage media they supply by using an address that differs from the other suppliers' labels as part of the compared code for the assigned device address. The only address that must be reserved by agreement (like a trademark) is the supplier's label, as the parent address. This allows different labels to use identical filename addresses to optimally utilize the storage space in the playback device's non-volatile memory.

The present method, both according to claim 1 and the one discussed in the preview just given, goes far beyond a general program for data processing and can, in addition to the usual implementation with a microprocessor or a computer program, also be implemented in hardware logic, e.g. by a state machine sequencer, etc., or by a DSP program of a digital signal processor.

For deleting the non-volatile memory, which relates to the information of a file both for the method specified in claim 1 (or 2) and for the general copy protection method of a file, the same measures as in the further development claims can be used.

Inventive problem in the context of the prior art:

• In addition to the already huge advantage of this advanced version, a major incentive to purchase such a device is that while the user can access demonstration files in their entirety (e.g., free of charge), despite unlimited selection from the entire file size, the file can only be played back to a limited extent (in terms of volume!). This means it's like television commercials: just when things get at their most interesting, the show ends. However, the difference is that the user can freely select the interesting parts from the entire volume.
• ☺ Since the user can test a wide variety of music, videos, radio plays, read books, etc., using this completely new method for free, such a device will, on the one hand, spread rapidly, and, on the other, publishers and the music industry will finally be able to provide their data storage devices with usable, device-specific copy protection. Of course, a variant is also feasible in which, for example, the portable device is connected to a computer (PC, notebook, etc.), enabling playback of the downloaded data storage devices directly on the PC if the user, for example, does not have a CD burner to burn a CD.
• Thus, taking into account the great advantage that can be achieved with the invention for industrial exploitation and the state of the art, the technical problem itself can already be regarded as particularly inventive.

During the technical implementation, particular attention was paid to ensuring that the file size limit cannot be circumvented by repeatedly downloading or obtaining files. This process also takes special cases, such as a device defect, loss of the device, or a new purchase of the device, into account to prevent misuse as much as possible.

The main application of the invention is to play back sample excerpts from a file (sample file) freely selected by the user, thereby encouraging the user to purchase the file or full access to it (full file). Once authorized access to the file has been obtained, the user can only play the file on their device.

For the first variant (limited playback of a sample file), even with a smaller playback device, a device address is generally not required for a few hundred files (as long as the non-volatile memory is not erased, see later). This means that the user can load and play the same file from another user and still not exceed the volume played on their device, even if the user from whom they obtained the file played completely different sections (they still cannot play these sections). For a larger number of files (practically infinite), it is necessary to delete the non-volatile memory, whose contents prevent playback beyond the specified limit, or even to delete it only partially (because it is full). In this case, a device address is also used for files from which only test excerpts are to be played. This is done by the server reconfiguring the playback device accordingly via the Internet.

Since each playback device is coded with a different device address, the server can allow the deletion of the non-volatile memory (of the device) whose contents prevent playback beyond the specified limit, e.g., only every few months, etc.

The second variant (unlimited playback of a full file) concerns the possibility of unrestricted playback of a file. For this purpose, it is advisable to encrypt a device address in the file, which is checked when the device is loaded for a match with the one configured in the device. Only if this match is met is unrestricted playback possible. As will be explained in more detail later, the device address in the playback device is configured via the Internet by a server using a key procedure. A device can also store several device addresses for different purposes. For example, one device address that is used for files that can be played back to their full extent and one device address that is only used for files that can be played back to a limited extent, if necessary (if the aforementioned non-volatile The device's memory must be cleared so that the file entries for new files can be managed. Or, associated device addresses (including recurring ones) can be configured for several different LABELS (via which the files are obtained).

The state of the art and common practice is the reproduction of excerpts from works, e.g., readings from books, broadcast on radio, and distribution via various data storage media. A preselected excerpt (or several excerpts) is made available to an interested party in the hope that they will then purchase the work. This practice is common both in print media and using electronic media (the internet, etc.).

Another very common method according to the state of the art (for a more distant comparison) is to provide data processing software with fixed, restricted use to the customer for a demonstration, e.g. preventing the saving of edited files, or counting certain processing steps, e.g. setting eyes (solder pads, vias, etc.) on programs for the creation of layout patterns for the production of printed circuit boards, etc.

The application of the method specified in claim 1 of the present invention is primarily aimed at the playback of files (acoustically or visually). However, it also includes measures for processing the files using the preferred encoding/decoding of parameters and addresses, e.g., for generating the division of sections and their length assignments, etc.

The technical task of the invention is therefore to fundamentally improve the usual static limitation of a file for the usual reproduction to fixed excerpts (e.g. of a work, book, CD, etc.) in such a way that a dynamic limitation of the file to excerpts freely selected by the user becomes possible without the system being able to be circumvented.

• das Abspielgerät;
• das Laden von Dateien in das Abspielgerät (z.B. über das Internet);
• die Zugangskontrolle zu Auszügen, bzw. Abschnitten einer wiederzugebenden Datei,
• wobei die Datei unmittelbar autark am Abspielgerät wiedergegeben wird, oder über einen Computer, bei dem das Abspielgerät nur die Dateieinträge (zur Begrenzung) verwaltet;
• die Unterbringung von Paramterwerten und Adressen direkt in einem Audiosignal ohne daß das Format, in welchem das Audiosignal gespeichert ist, zu beeinflußen bzw. zu ändern;
• die nachträgliche Erweiterung des Umfanges für den Zugang, oder das Abschalten der Zugangskontrolle für eine wiederzugebende Datei; und als Erweiterungsoption:
  • die Bindung des Abspielgerätes an eine bestimmte Person, in technischer Hinsicht an ein persönlich genutztes Netz (z.B. Telefon, Handy, etc.) oder auch an die Stimme des Benutzers, insbesondere für die Konfiguration der Geräteadressen, sowie für das Löschen des genannten nicht flüchtigen Speichers, dessen Inhalt die Wiedergabe einer Datei über das vorgegebene Limit hinaus verhindert und das Freischalten einer Datei zur uneingeschränkten Nutzung ermöglicht.
  • ➯ Dabei ermöglicht dieses neue Verfahren, daß aus einer jeweils geladenen vollständigen Datei unter Benutzung einer strukturierten Adressierung (z.B. Seitenadressen eines Buches, etc.) jeweils beliebig frei zu wählende Teile, bzw. Abschnitte (als Auszüge aus der vollständigen Datei) dem Benutzer zugänglich gemacht werden, wobei das gesamte Volumen (als Summe) dieser frei wählbaren Auszüge gegenüber dem Volumen der vollständig geladenen Datei in vordefinierter Weise begrenzt ist; z.B. im einfachsten Fall als bestimmter Prozentsatz der gesamten Datei.

The invention includes:

• the playback device;
• loading files into the playback device (e.g. via the Internet);
• access control to extracts or sections of a file to be played,
• where the file is played directly and independently on the playback device, or via a computer where the playback device only manages the file entries (for limitation);
• the placement of parameter values and addresses directly in an audio signal without influencing or changing the format in which the audio signal is stored;
• the subsequent extension of the scope of access, or the disabling of access control for a file to be played; and as an extension option:
  • the binding of the playback device to a specific person, in technical terms to a personally used network (e.g. telephone, mobile phone, etc.) or even to the voice of the user, in particular for the configuration of the device addresses, as well as for the deletion of the aforementioned non-volatile memory, the content of which prevents the playback of a file beyond the specified limit and enables the release of a file for unrestricted use.
  • ➯ This new procedure allows for freely selectable parts or sections (as extracts from the complete file) to be made available to the user from a loaded complete file using a structured addressing (e.g. page addresses of a book, etc.), whereby the total volume (as a sum) of these freely selectable extracts is limited in a predefined way compared to the volume of the fully loaded file; e.g. in the simplest case as a certain percentage of the entire file.

Such as, for example, a certain percentage of a text present as an audio signal from a read-aloud book, a newspaper, etc., with a special feature that differs from the state of the art, namely that the part (excerpt) to be selected is not predetermined when the file (or a data carrier in question) is created, and that an optimized process or system is provided that ensures that this special feature cannot be circumvented by multiple users using a playback device.

The percentage with which the individual sections of the file marked by addresses (ADD, code) add up can be classified differently, e.g., for titles or headlines, 0%, meaning the titles or headlines are not added up at all, or do not affect the total volume. After the title, for example, the first few sentences are added up with 10%, meaning the length is The first section of the text is rated at only 10%, and the remaining text passages at 100% of their length, whereby, for example, a total of 20% of the total length of the text (e.g., spoken as an audio signal) should be freely available. This means that the text of the section marked with ADD is limited to 20% of its maximum playback length.

This means that a length limit can be selectively defined for each individual section to prevent the entire section from being played back. Alternatively, this length limit can also be defined as a volume limit within a section, meaning that a specific percentage of the section can be freely selected and played back by the user. As always, global parameter presets can also be made in a file (e.g., maximum playback length of a section = 20%, etc.).

• - die maximale absolute Länge des Abschnittes, von START an gemessen,
• - der maximale Prozentsatz der Länge des Abschnittes, frei wählbar innerhalb des Abschnittes,
• - der Wert der Länge in % des Abschnittes, wie er für die Aufsummierung des Volumens gewertet wird,
• - und weiters noch eine optionale Angabe, ob nach Erreichen der Begrenzung eines Abschnittes (z.B. der maximalen Länge) die Wiedergabe beim nächsten Abschnitt, bzw. bei der nächsten START Adresse fortgesetzt werden soll, oder einfach angehalten werden soll.

This means that for each section address, hereinafter referred to as the START address (with which a section is called up), the following parameters for limiting playback can be added:

• - the maximum absolute length of the section, measured from START,
• - the maximum percentage of the length of the section, freely selectable within the section,
• - the value of the length in % of the section as it is used for the summation of the volume,
• - and furthermore an optional indication as to whether, after reaching the limit of a section (e.g. the maximum length), playback should continue at the next section or at the next START address, or simply be stopped.

Depending on the complexity, you can also define subaddresses with corresponding parameter assignments, etc. These subaddresses cannot be accessed directly, but are used only as labels for assigning different parameters. The length (of a section) is measured depending on the medium being played (e.g., acoustic or moving images) as a measure of time, or in the case of text, in the number of words, or in the case of music, e.g., in the number of bars, etc., or even as a percentage of the entire section.

➯ In particular, the same device allows multiple use to play back freely selectable parts or sections of the loaded complete file, if necessary even among multiple users, provided the predefined volume limit is observed, regardless of how many users are using the device. However, and above all after separate activation (taking into account the key provided for this activation), it also allows exclusive single use to play back the entire file for only one authorized user, and without the need for a password. This has the advantage that this protective measure cannot be circumvented by the unauthorized disclosure of a password for access, which would infringe copyright. There are even measures in place to ensure that if the device is passed on along with the loaded file(s), another user can only use the device with severe restrictions.

A particularly preferred playback device is a portable MP3 player that also has an Internet radio. Using a buffer memory (FIFO), several programs can be recorded simultaneously for hours and the user can also permanently save and copy selected music from it. However, upon repeated playback, only excerpts can be played back, with the option to purchase the entire file.

➯ Or the device is also very suitable for a car radio with integrated radio telephone/mobile phone connection, with the option that, for example, book texts, newspapers, etc. can be played back via data storage devices or downloaded via the Internet, e.g. to listen to excerpts and then buy a title (music, a book being read aloud, etc.) as a file that can be played back indefinitely from the home PC, whereby the file is loaded into the car radio as an MP3 from a server via the radio telephone/mobile phone connection of the car radio, while the user is connected to the server via the Internet on their home PC. For example, to first listen to excerpts from a book, then purchase the entire file and the book, then alternate between listening to the book on the car radio or continuing to read at home, etc. The user can then use their PC's browser, or its internet connection to the server, to directly enter the point where they left off reading the book. The server then sends an SMS to the car radio's mobile phone connection containing the exact jump address to the point where the user left off reading. If the car radio user switches to MP3 recorder, they can listen to the book being read aloud from the selected point.

Or the user can, for example, independently of the application according to claim 1, have a subscribed newspaper read to him while driving, which he has downloaded via the radio telephone/mobile phone connection of his car radio using his home PC (by entering the telephone number of the mobile phone in the car radio).

For this variant, it is also practical to install the radio/cell phone module outside the car radio and conceal it within the vehicle. The car radio only has a corresponding interface to the radio/cell phone/MP3 player, making it very inexpensive to implement. The radio/cell phone/MP3 player module, which is housed independently of the car radio, is also equipped with a GPS receiver so that the location can be transmitted via the radio/cell phone in the event of the vehicle being stolen. It is also practical to integrate a microphone into the car radio, which can be used to record conversations via the MP3 memory and also retrieve them via the radio/cell phone connection.

The solution to this technical problem relates to the method according to claim 1 as the essential idea of the invention with the specified developments in the subclaims and the measures for implementing the control functions for controlling access for playback, in particular when a portable device is used for playback, which can, for example, also be reduced to only part of the control functions and can be plugged into a conventional standard device (e.g. also in a car radio, etc.) as a plug-in module (if the previously described preferred option is not used).

Or the device has a modulator/transmitter to feed in via the antenna of a car radio (also via its switching with an RF relay), etc. Or these control functions can be built into an otherwise conventional portable CD player or MP3 player.

In particular, extensions are made to the file to be played, e.g., an MP3 file, an audio file stored on a CD, or a video file, etc., which involve the addition of addresses and parameters, with the associated address recognition, address checks, and parameter evaluation provided by the playback device in order to implement the access control functions. In addition to the usual storage of the file to be played, the addresses contained in the file, as well as their associated check functions, are permanently stored in a non-volatile memory. This also includes the implementation of the deletion conditions and reinitialization when the non-volatile semiconductor read/write memory, in which the addresses controlling access to the information are permanently stored (and therefore retained when the device is switched off), is full and must therefore be deleted.

It is further provided that if a file that has already been played (heard or seen) is played repeatedly, the sections already heard or seen will still be accessible, but new sections can only be accessed as long as the amount of data limited to the intended share (e.g. corresponding to a predetermined percentage) is not exceeded.

➯ In further development, the specification of this share (or percentage) can be influenced by a procedure that allows unlimited access (100% access) to the file during playback, which, however, can only be performed depending on the identification of the user (or the playback device). And the file in question is updated (e.g., via the Internet) using appropriate access control.

Let me briefly explain why a customer should buy such a device? For example, to be able to play freely selectable excerpts from a printed work, or listen to freely selectable music tracks, etc., completely legally and without infringing copyright, using the option to obtain a file from the Internet. And, if necessary, to be able to listen to the file collection loaded into the device using the MP3 format, for example, after paying a fee or after purchasing a specific book, etc., either continuously or just once (for a smaller fee). It is precisely the enormous possibilities that arise from the seamless hierarchy of access to a copyrighted work, acquired in several steps, that make the new process so economically attractive.

The inventive concept is represented by claim 1. This is followed by subclaims characterizing further developments and options for implementation.

Even if the preferred method should be implemented exclusively by software on a computer, which is in principle possible if only a computer is used as the playback device (which can also be connected to the Internet), this is not a program that is used exclusively for data processing, but a new type of software that is implemented using a special process controlled memory organization of an address generation and address verification carried out to implement the preferential access control (which is controlled by this new method in a special manner corresponding to the invention). As a further example, it is preferred that the aforementioned "playback device" with the non-volatile memory, for example, only manages (stores) the file entries, but the file is played back on a computer (PC) using appropriate software. According to patent law and current case law, such a method is protected by intellectual property law even if it is implemented exclusively by software, i.e., by a data processing program, if it is also used accordingly in accordance with the inventive features.

Preferred application: A preferred application of the invention is to provide a complete (e.g. spoken) book text, or an audio file spoken in the book text (as a read-aloud text), which is encrypted ( 1 ) is loaded into the memory of a CD player or MP3 player modified for implementation of the method (e.g., via an internet connection or a data storage device), using an access control method corresponding to the technical task of the invention. For this application, the played audio file (with the spoken text) is divided into sections corresponding to the book pages, with the relevant page numbers being displayed on the device and being able to be accessed or listened to according to the user's selection.

The user can start playback of the file from any designated start address (which here, for example, corresponds to the page number of the book being read aloud and is continuously shown or can be selected by pressing a standard forward/backward step button on the display, see access/operation in 1 ).

In the hierarchy, the following addresses and parameters, classified according to priority, are provided as a protection code to control access and, in a further development of the invention, are directly included in the digital code of the audio signal. It is obvious that this example can be modified as desired using other known methods.

• - Geräteadresse:
  • Die Geräteadresse ist in der geladenen (wiederzugebenden) Datei enthalten und wird bereits beim Laden mit der im Wiedergabegerät dauerhaft abgespeicherten geprüft. Stimmt sie nicht überein, dann wird die Wiedergabe grundsätzlich verweigert (oder die Datei gleich gar nicht geladen). Die Konfiguration der Geräteadresse im Wiedergabegerät bei der Initialisierung erfolgt bevorzugt über eine zentrale Datenbank eines oder mehrerer Server im Internet und es sind entsprechende Weiterbildungsoptionen vorgesehen um zu verhindern, daß unterschiedliche Benutzer jeweils das gleiche Gerät verwenden und nachfolgend noch im Detail beschrieben.

Explanation of terms: The term "initialization" of the playback device refers to the deletion or reorganization of the stored security addresses and parameters that control the device's access. This is only possible if special security measures are observed, which are explained in more detail later. When initializing the device (e.g., using the Internet), the device address is primarily assigned. This device address has nothing to do with the data network protocol; rather, it is an identification address for the server. It is assigned not to the Internet connection, but to the playback device as an absolute and permanently stored address. It can only be changed by reinitializing the playback device.

• - Device address:
  • The device address is contained in the loaded (playable) file and is checked against the address permanently stored in the playback device during loading. If it doesn't match, playback is generally refused (or the file isn't loaded at all). The device address in the playback device is configured during initialization, preferably via a central database on one or more servers on the Internet. Corresponding configuration options are provided to prevent different users from using the same device. These options are described in more detail below.

• - Dateiname:
  • Der Dateiname ist im Kopf der geladenen (wiederzugebenden) Datei enthalten und wird bei der erstmaligen Wiedergabe der Datei in ein nichtflüchtiges Speicherregister (z.B. FLASH RAM) des Wiedergabegerätes als Bezeichner (Adresse) einer Liste, nachfolgend Dateinamenliste genannt, eingetragen und bleibt zusammen mit dieser einschließlich ihres Inhaltes bis zu einer erneuten Initialisierung (siehe erläuterter Begriff oben) des Gerätes dauerhaft gespeichert, auch wenn die Datei deren Dateiname diese Liste betrifft, aus dem Wiedergabegerät bereits wieder gelöscht (MP3) ist bzw. ein betreffender Datenträger, von dem die Wiedergabe der Datei erfolgte (z.B. eines CD-Players) zwischenzeitlich wieder entfernt worden ist. Gleichfalls dauerhaft mitgespeichert werden die in die Dateinamenliste zu einem Dateinamen jeweils zugehörig eingetragenen Parameter und Adressen, die für die Zugangssicherung der einzelnen Abschnitte bei der Wiedergabe der Datei verwendet sind, und deshalb innerhalb der Dateinamenliste als Schlüsseldaten einer betreffenden Datei bezeichnet werden.

The use of device addresses allows the server program to better control the use of files downloaded from the server's database to a user.

• - File name:
  • The file name is contained in the header of the loaded (to be played back) file and is entered into a non-volatile memory register (e.g. FLASH RAM) of the playback device when the file is played back for the first time as the identifier (address) of a list, hereinafter referred to as the file name list. This list remains permanently stored together with the list, including its contents, until the device is reinitialized (see the term explained above), even if the file whose file name relates to this list has already been deleted from the playback device (MP3) or a data medium from which the file was played back (e.g. a CD player) has been removed in the meantime. Also permanently stored are the parameters and addresses entered in the file name list belonging to a file name; these are used to secure access to the individual sections when the file is played back and are therefore referred to as key data for a particular file within the file name list.

For the application of playing back texts read aloud from books, it is still useful if the file name corresponds directly to the title of a book, etc.

A file name is created as an identifier (address) of the corresponding file name list, along with the corresponding section addresses as key data for the file, only when the file is first played back. The relevant excerpt(s) being played back are permanently stored as key data in the file name list of this file via their corresponding section addresses. For example, "File name" (page 1 to page 5 / page 10 to page 12, etc.). Of course, not the actual file is permanently stored, but only its section addresses with the corresponding current length coding (incremental as a step number, or as a time value, etc.).

It may be useful to provide an option for the file prepared with the section addresses, allowing, for example, a brief playback (in seconds) of a section without the section in question being entered as a key value in the file name list. This parameter, associated with a section address of a file (see later for the [START + ADD] format), then corresponds to a delay in seconds over which a section must be played in order for it to be entered into the file name list (e.g., in a hash or array) as a key file for access control during playback.

Page address (or section address):

The page address in this example is the start address of a section of the played file, or in this case the associated audio signal, that can be accessed via this start address and corresponds to 1 ) directly follows the page number of the printed text (a book, newspaper, etc.). These sections, with their starting addresses (at the beginning of each section), are immediately adjacent. Since there is no special pause between sections, it is advisable, when a sentence is interrupted by a page break, to place the page address of the (next page) as the starting address at the beginning of the sentence, i.e., at the end of the previous page.

It is evident that the division into sections, or in this case page addresses, can be carried out according to any specifications. For example, subdivisions into paragraphs (page number/paragraph, e.g. 4/2 corresponding to page 4 paragraph 2) can be made, or the division into sections can be carried out according to any specifications, which is why the address referred to here as the page address is generally also referred to as the section address.

Note: When accessing or playing the file, the section addresses (here page addresses) are incremented accordingly (INCRvol) to determine the volume of the access.

For this example, the division into equal sections is proportional to the number of pages in a book (or the reproduced audio signal of a read text), i.e., the accessed volume can be directly determined from the number of pages. However, this is undesirable for many applications. For each start address of a section, the corresponding classified volume, regardless of the actual volume of the section, is added as a calculation parameter and taken into account during playback or when summing the volume. It is advisable to provide a smallest counting unit, the integer multiple of which is specified for the start address of a section. The INCRvol command (see above) then multiplies the smallest counting unit by the specified multiple and adds it to the current volume. Before each access to a new section, the access volume is checked to ensure that it has not been exceeded during this access (in order to block access to new sections). The start addresses of the sections are then also consecutively numbered so that they can be saved under a file name in a non-volatile memory.

As a second parameter, which can also be optionally added to a start address, the maximum playback length of the relevant section can also be coded.

For example, in a music CD application, the start address of interesting tracks can be assigned this additional parameter to prevent the track from being played in its entirety. Conversely, a lesser-known piece of music can be allowed in its entirety (no specification) or at a longer length, etc. The same is also useful for newspapers, for example, where certain short articles should be prevented from being played in their entirety.

As a third parameter, which can optionally be added to a start address, a delay time Delay can be coded, after which only the reproduced section belonging to the respective start address is entered into the file name list for the key data.

Thus, for a section (here a page) the following characters placed at the beginning of the section, starting with the control character [START], are encoded in the following form:

Format:

• [START]; [Option=Z]; [ADD]; [Parameter 1]; [Parameter 2]; [Parameter 3];....Audio, Audio, Audio, etc.
• [Option]; ....to a specified number of parameters optional format: specifies the number of parameters following the address [ADD].
• [ADD]........Address, consecutive number associated with the control character [START], to designate a section with this number. Associated with this address is the section length, which refers to this absolute address and indicates the end of the section. This section length can coincide with the next value of the subsequent address (seamless transitions) or end the section earlier.
• [START].....control character used uniformly for all sections marked as start address to mark the beginning of a section;
• ADD...........The consecutively numbered section address, e.g. corresponding to a corresponding page number of the text;
• [Parameter 1]......Value of the volume percentage (relative to the total file volume; see the following explanation of percentage) of the portion of the section permitted for playback. If parameter 1 is not specified, the value added to the file name as a parameter in the file header is interpreted as the default value for parameter 1.
• [Parameter 2]......Length specification, e.g., in a unit appropriate for playback (number of characters for text, time unit in s for audio or video, etc.). Once this length is reached (e.g., also as a time specification in seconds), playback of this section is stopped and, for example, the user is informed how to obtain the entire file, etc. If parameter 2 is not specified to prematurely terminate a section, then it is interpreted as a length specification coinciding with the subsequent address of a section and there is no premature selective length limitation of the section; instead, the limitation is only based on the percentage specified as a parameter to the file name (see next point) of the total volume.
• [Parameter 3]......Time delay as explained above. If the listened-to section is to be immediately entered into the file name list for the key data, then a zero is defined as the parameter.

In addition to the device address, a default value (as a preset) of this parameter can also be defined at the head of the file, which is inserted into the parameters whenever only a character defined as a placeholder is used instead of a parameter value.

• neue Datei..... [BEGIN]; [DATEINAME beliebiger Länge]; [START]; [Parameter 1 default]; [Parameter 2 default]; [Parameter 3 default]; START + ADD]; [Parameter 1]; [Paramter2]; ....Audio, Audio, Audio, usw.

Example of a file header:

• new file..... [BEGIN]; [FILENAME of any length]; [START]; [Parameter 1 default]; [Parameter 2 default]; [Parameter 3 default]; START + ADD]; [Parameter 1]; [Parameter 2]; ....Audio, Audio, Audio, etc.

The bold italicized part corresponds to the file header. The [BEGIN] control character at the beginning of a file indicates the file name.

• Um die Steuerzeichen innerhalb eines in einem beliebigen Format gepackten, bzw. gespeicherten digitalen Audiosignals zu kodieren, kann beispielsweise ein Verfahren eines reduzierten Codes benutzt werden, bei dem z.B. der sich aus der verwendeten Bitzahl ergebende Maximalwert des Aussteuerungsbereiches um den Wert von 1 oder einige weiteren Schritte (je nach Bedarf) reduziert wird (d.h. bei der Aufbereitung des Digitalsignals als maximal mögliche Aussteuerung begrenzt wird).

Example of encoding the format in any digitized audio signal (also compressed, such as MP3):

• In order to encode the control characters within a digital audio signal packed or stored in any format, a reduced code method can be used, for example, in which the maximum value of the control range resulting from the number of bits used is reduced by the value of 1 or a few further steps (as required) (ie is limited as the maximum possible control level when processing the digital signal).

Whereby, if the key values of the analog signal correspond to a value range of e.g. +max.=01111...1110 to -max.=1000.....00001 of the two's complement representation and the actual maximum values positive=01111...1111 or negative= max= 1000.....00000 are used (reserved) as a control signal, where e.g. the control character [START] which always precedes a code sequence is to be interpreted as an equivalent positive or negative number, depending on which half-wave range, positive or negative, the reproduced audio signal is currently in.

If a digitally processed audio signal is already present, it is scanned for the maximum occurring value and if the maximum values are positive=01111...1111 or negative= max= 1000.....00000 should occur, then the entire signal is multiplied by a corresponding correction factor less than 1 to ensure that these values no longer occur in the audio signal.

Thus the start character is defined as [START] = (01111...1111) + (1000.....00000), where +... means an OR symbol.

Decoding a start signal [START]:

If a digital value corresponding to the digital start signal [START] is decoded, the transfer pulse for the transfer of the amplitude value corresponding to this coding is suppressed and the value is interpreted as the start signal [START].

For the register in which the respective (suppressed) amplitude value corresponding to the time frame would be written (stored), a value is set instead of the amplitude value (not present in the file). This value is derived from the previous amplitude value and the amplitude value stored after the control character as an interpolation value corresponding to the previous signal increase, even across multiple values, taking the curvature into account. This interpolation is further filtered by the reconstruction filter used during playback. The exact process will be explained later. 2 and 3 explained.

The following further definition is used:

After the recognition (decoding) of a [START] character, a certain number of parameters or addresses should be transferred (coded) according to the counting sequence (counted parameters), whereby as an option, in addition to a fixed number of such characters, e.g. the first parameter [Option=Z] before the address [ADD] can also encode or define the number of subsequent characters.

• Auf diese Weise lassen sich Parameter und Adressen an beliebiger Stelle eines mit einem linearen Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Audiosignals (CD Format, oder auch MP3, etc.) unterbringen, ohne daß man sich um das Format, in dem das Audiosignal bei der A/D-Umsetzung kodiert, bzw. bei der D/A Umsetzung wieder dekodiert wird, kümmern muß. Was große Vorteile hat, da jedes nach ISO Standart genormte Format benutzt werden kann und es ausreichend ist, unmittelbar nach der A/D Wandlung die Parameter und Adressen anstelle der dem Analogsignal entsprechenden Werte einzufügen, dito bei der Dekodierung vor der D/A Wandlung wieder abzutrennen. Es ist evident, daß sich das Verfahren für jede Art analoger Signale eignet, daher im Prinizip auch für Videosignale.
• Dabei ist es im Prinzip ausreichend, mit einem dem [START] Zeichen nachfolgenden Kontrollzeichen einen Sprunglabel zu kodieren (z.B. wenn das Datenformat als MP3 in einem RAM abgespeichert ist, und das Audiosignal sowie die Daten in getrennten Sektionen gespeichert sind) und unter diesem Sprunglabel den String mit den Steuerzeichen (Kontrollzeichen) zu speichern, oder es kann auch innerhalb des Audiosignals der komplette String von Steuerzeichen oder Kontrollzeichen untergebracht werden (z.B. wenn als Datenträger eine CD oder DVD verwendet wird, usw.).
• Um beispielsweise in einer Audiodatei die Marken mit den [START] Zeichen zu setzen, ist es ausreichend, eine Audiodatei mit einer entsprechenden Software, die um diese Funktion erweitert ist, abzuhören und an den entsprechenden Stellen z.B. über eine Tasteneingabe eine Marke zu setzen (die automatisch inkrementiert wird, z.B. Seitenzahlen erhöht) und weiters über eine Menüeingabe eine lineare oder individuelle Volumenseinheit, wie sie der Bewertung in Bezug auf die gesamte Datei zur Zugangsbegrenzung entsprechen soll, zugeordnet werden soll, weiters auch noch eine Längenbegrenzung, die gleichfalls empirisch durch Setzen betreffender Marken an den Stellen der Audiodatei vorgenommen werden kann, bzw. gegebenenfalls auch noch den gleichfalls bereits erläuterten Delay Parameter. Da die Steuerzeichen, Parameter und Adressen direkt anstelle eines Wertes des Audiosignals in das Audiosignal hineingeschrieben werden, kann eine fertige Bearbeitungssoftware zu diesem Zweck mit minimalem Aufwand modifiziert werden, um die Audiodateien mit den betreffenden Adressen zu konfigurieren. Weiters können auch nur Platzhalter vergeben werden, um abhängig vom einem laufenden Programm die Parameter und Adressen durch Zuweisungen aus Variablen zu setzen.

In the preferred coding (or preferred format), a mandatory sequence also specifies that for each parameter value P (or address, etc.) associated with the string of the [START] character, which is not to be interpreted as an amplitude value an* of the digitally coded analog signal, an analog value (IPL) corresponding to the signal rise and determined by interpolation is set at the respective time grid position (or stored for playback). An example of this will be given later. 2 and 3 explained in more detail.

• In this way, parameters and addresses can be placed anywhere in an audio signal reproduced with a linear time raster (CD format, or MP3, etc.), without having to worry about the format in which the audio signal is encoded during A/D conversion or decoded again during D/A conversion. This has significant advantages, as any ISO-standardized format can be used, and it is sufficient to insert the parameters and addresses immediately after A/D conversion in place of the values corresponding to the analog signal, and then remove them again during decoding before D/A conversion. It is evident that the method is suitable for any type of analog signal, and therefore, in principle, also for video signals.
• In principle, it is sufficient to encode a jump label with a control character following the [START] character (e.g. if the data format is stored as MP3 in a RAM, and the audio signal and the data are stored in separate sections) and to store the string with the control characters (control characters) under this jump label, or the complete string of control characters or control characters can also be accommodated within the audio signal (e.g. if a CD or DVD is used as the data carrier, etc.).
• For example, to set markers in an audio file with the [START] character, it is sufficient to listen to an audio file using appropriate software that has been expanded to include this function and to set a marker at the appropriate point, e.g. via a keystroke (which is automatically incremented, e.g. page numbers are increased). Furthermore, via a menu entry, a linear or individual volume unit is to be assigned, which should correspond to the rating in relation to the entire file for access restriction. Furthermore, a length limit, which can also be set empirically by setting the relevant markers at the relevant points in the audio file, or if necessary also the delay parameter already explained. Since the control characters, parameters and addresses are written directly into the audio signal instead of a value of the audio signal, ready-made editing software can be modified for this purpose with minimal effort in order to configure the audio files with the relevant addresses. Furthermore, only placeholders can be assigned in order to set the parameters and addresses by assigning variables, depending on the program being run.

For playback, it is sufficient if the start character [START] is decoded as the first character of a control character string to start a multiplexer process according to a forced sequence, in which the next but one and all subsequent values arriving at an odd-numbered position (relative to the decoding of [START]) of the time grid are interpreted as belonging to the control character [*], and all values arriving in between at an even-numbered position of the time grid are interpreted as belonging to the analog signal [an*], as the following scheme illustrates: an540; [START]; an541; [Option=*Z]; an542; [*0]; an543;[*1]; an544; an545; an546....

The [START] character decoded as an amplitude value (01111...1111) or (1000.....00000) during processing (A/D conversion) of the analog signal switches to the interpretation as a parameter to be interpreted for the time clock after the next but one (with which the values of the digitized analog signal are transported), i.e. after the amplitude value an541, and the value of [*Z] is read, in which the value Z=1 is located, which means that two more parameters ([*0] and [*1] follow), whereby the values in between are each interpreted as amplitude values an542 and an543 (switched with a toggle function corresponding to a clocked flip-flop, whose clock activation or reset or output value is set by the decoded [START] character, and clock deactivation is determined by the Z parameter or the number of coded parameters). It is evident that the number of defined parameters can also be much larger (e.g. Z=10, etc.)

The interpretation for the assignment of the values obtained via the parameter list [* ;] to the assigned variables or addresses is carried out by a list that is passed from the file to the playback device independently of the audio signal of the file (at the beginning) after the file name and the device address and can also be modified within the file by using further code sequences each introduced with [START], etc.

The control character [START], which can be directly coded in any digital audio signal, can be compared with the control character ESCAPE commonly used in data technology in order to code any code sequence for any purpose.

After the last parameter character P (in this example P=[*1]) has been recognized (and counted accordingly) by definition using [*Z], all subsequent characters are again interpreted as amplitude values an544; an545; an546....; etc.

• - Prozentangabe:
  • Die Prozentangabe ist in der geladenen (wiederzugebenden) Datei als Parameter angegeben (z.B. nach dem Dateinamen) und betrifft die Angabe des zulässigen Anteils (z.B. in Prozent der gesamt vorhandenen Seitenzahl, etc.), der in freier Auswahl des Benutzers dem Benutzer zugänglich gemacht werden soll.
• - Prüfung der Prozentangabe: Bei jeder Wiedergabe eines neuen Abschnittes einer Datei wird als erster Schritt unter der Adresse des Dateinamens im nicht flüchtigen Speicher (falls noch nicht angelegt, wird diese Adresse in die betreffende Liste der Datei nach Ablauf der im Delay Parameter definierten Zeit aufgenommen) geprüft, ob die Abschnittsadresse ADD des aktuell wiederzugebenden Abschnittes (hier Seite) unter der Adresse des betreffenden Dateinamens bereits abgelegt ist ?:
  • Wenn ja, dann wird der Befehl INCRvol zur Incrementierung des Zählers zur ständigen Feststellung des zugegriffenen Volumens, bzw. (bei ungleichen Abschnitten) zum laufenden Addieren des Volumens beim Zugriff auf den Abschnitt dieser (bereits gespeicherten Abschnittsadresse, bzw. Seitenadresse) nicht ausgeführt und der betreffende Abschnitt (z.B. einer bestimmten Seitenadresse) wiedergegeben (z.B. als Audio Datei eines gesprochenen Textes einer betreffenden Buchseite). D.h. genauer, der Befehl INCRvol wird solange nicht ausgeführt als der bereits wiedergegebene Teil eines Abschnittes bei der Wiedergabe nocht nicht erreicht ist.

Non-volatile memory: A FLASH semiconductor memory can be used as a non-volatile read-write memory, for example, or an electromechanical memory (hard disk), from which a volatile memory RAM is usually loaded when the device is switched on.

• - Percentage:
  • The percentage is specified as a parameter in the loaded (to be played) file (e.g. after the file name) and concerns the specification of the permissible proportion (e.g. in percent of the total number of pages available, etc.) that is to be made accessible to the user in a freely selectable manner.
• - Checking the percentage: Each time a new section of a file is played, the first step is to check whether the section address ADD of the section currently being played (here page) is already stored at the address of the file name in the non-volatile memory (if not already created, this address will be added to the relevant list of the file after the time defined in the delay parameter has elapsed):
  • If so, the INCRvol command, which increments the counter to continuously determine the accessed volume, or (in the case of unequal sections) to continuously add the volume when accessing the section of this (already stored section address or page address), is not executed, and the section in question (e.g., a specific page address) is played back (e.g., as an audio file of a spoken text from a specific book page). In other words, the INCRvol command is not executed until the already played portion of a section has been reached during playback.

If not, the INCRvol command is executed on the section of this (already saved section address or page address), i.e. the counter is incremented, or (if the volume fractions of the sections are unequal) the volume specified at the start address of the section is added during the ongoing addition of the volume. The result is then checked by comparing it with the percentage (as a data value) to see whether the currently added volume exceeds the specification (percentage) from the file. If so, the list containing the already executed sections under the file name (as an identifier or address) in the non-volatile memory is locked, and the start address of the section is no longer included in this list. If the currently added volume However, if the limit has not yet been exceeded, the start address is included in the file name list and the relevant section is played.

The status no also corresponds to this query if a section that has already been marked as played (by the preferred storage) is exceeded during playback, ie the exceeded part of the section is continuously checked for the specified maximum permissible volume and is permanently saved when the section is finished (see the following detailed explanation of 4 ).

This means that specific locations on the storage medium itself do not have to be directly assigned to which the user can or cannot access, as has been the case up to now. Instead, the selection of sections to be divided into arbitrary sections is left to the user. For example, after reading a section, they can listen to the next section or a newly selected section, etc. Only the total number of sections is monitored for access restriction. However, additional individual section restrictions can also be used (e.g., via the length parameter).

Preference list option: Another option is to define a parameter at the top of the file to be played as a preference list. This parameter contains a series of preferred start addresses (ADD) that the file creator considers to be of particular interest. By pressing a special key, these start addresses of preferred sections (e.g., pages) are displayed to the user in sequence (e.g., as page numbers) (with a forward/backward function), with a higher-level switching option for personal selection by the user. It is advisable to include a text file in the source file, which contains an overview of the individual chapters (corresponding to the start addresses to be jumped to), etc. By using the device in conjunction with a PC connected to the Internet, this selection can be further improved through appropriate menu navigation.

1 concerns the example in which the sections of an audio signal, each indicated by start addresses and otherwise arranged one after the other without additional pauses, are divided according to the pages of a (read aloud) book (or radio play, etc.). Thus, the summation of the current volume can be achieved without taking any further volume information into account using a simple counter Z in the program of the relevant processor, which is incremented each time the above-mentioned (and thus named) INCRvol command is executed. The counter counts in a counting unit defined by a parameter (e.g., one unit every 20 seconds of playback time, etc.). In the non-volatile memory, the total counter reading for each file is also stored in the list of sections already played (here page numbers) at a specific position (e.g., position 0), so that it can be loaded into the RAM of the processor (e.g., DSP) when the playback device is switched on.

In a further development of the process, it is optionally possible to dynamically control the extent of the limited data volume (i.e., the predefined percentage) to which the user has access. This is done so that, for example, upon purchase and payment for a book, the customer (or user) has free access to the entire spoken text of the book. This is achieved by appropriately marking the file corresponding to the book (via the percentage indication) when the customer downloads the file in question as an upgrade via the Internet (which can also be done in a bookstore, etc.). In addition to the option of attaching a one-time password to a device address as a scratch-off note or in a sealed envelope, the bookstore can also activate the access (via the Internet) to the device address of the playback device.

This allows the user to have the book "read to" them via audio playback, then continue reading the book themselves, and then have the continuation read to them again, alternating as often as they wish. To better protect copyright, this extended function, which allows the user to access the full contents of the file, should only be available to the person authorized as a user upon purchase of the book, and the use of technical means should make it less attractive to share the playback device. This corresponds to the additional task specified below.

Additional technical tasks.

The additional technical challenge concerns the connection of the device (which is identified by the permanently stored device address) to the user. Two variants are proposed here.

For both variants, for example, using a device connected to the Internet switched on computer an initialization procedure using the pre-registration DE 10 2004 046 413.8 specified procedure.

In the pre-registration DE 10 2004 046 413.8 A procedure was specified with which the location of a computer, e.g. an Internet connection, can be linked to any telephone connection that is independent of the computer's Internet connection in a tamper-proof manner, while excluding the possibility of manipulating the detection procedure for this connection if, for example, another telephone connection were used for this purpose.

In this procedure, the method specified here is used for optional further training. DE 10 2004 046 413.8 used in such a way that when a file is downloaded over the Internet, the playback of the downloaded files is only possible, or these files can only be used in the device, if the device address stored in the device corresponds to an identifier that the server downloading the file checks and also checks whether the device or the device address belongs to the user whose password is used when logging into the relevant web page (to download the file) for the telephone connection to which the web page is linked using the procedure with 10 2004 046 413.8.

Practical example with reference to Fig.1 with extension option according to DE 10 2004 046 413.8 for initialization:

The playback device is an MP3 player equipped with a special chip (e.g., DSP) for implementing the process. It also features audio playback and a standard file storage function, along with a keypad with additional keys in addition to the standard keys for jumping to the points encoded in the audio signal. For example, every page of a spoken text from a book can be continuously encoded, including the marking of paragraphs. It is advisable to provide an interface between the device and a computer (PC, notebook) so that the device's starting position can be found even on a computer with its far better menu structuring capabilities. Otherwise, it is advisable to design text input (if desired) to be compatible with SMS input on a mobile phone.

Furthermore, the device contains a display on which the names of the files contained in the MP3 file (in this case book titles) can be shown directly, as well as the page numbers to identify sections into which an audio file is divided and which relate, for example, to the reading text of a book, a drama, or a radio play, etc.

For the MP3 player configuration, the system is structured so that loading the data storage is only possible with the involvement of the web server from which the tracks are downloaded. The initial loading requires a one-time initialization of the playback device, during which the encrypted device address is permanently written into the device and stored non-volatilely (e.g., in a flash memory, etc.). For the CD or DVD player configuration, the file must also be obtained from a web server, in which case the user must then burn the CD or DVD themselves.

In both cases, the device's address can be assigned, for example, via a web page linked to the telephone number of a telephone or cell phone. During subsequent downloads (via a computer connected to the Internet), it is always checked whether the user of the web page via which files are (to be) loaded onto the device has access to the corresponding telephone number during the download process. This procedure is not available, for example, in bookstores, where the customer can present their playback device so that, upon purchase of a book, the corresponding file is either loaded directly onto the device (e.g., as an MP3) or a CD is burned with a file downloaded from the Internet. Before burning, this CD is further processed using a corresponding computer, into which the device address of the playback device is read directly via the device connection, so that the correct device address is included in the file. Or, if necessary, a new (additionally valid) device address can be assigned, which the user can then later adapt to his device using the Internet and his web page access linked to him via a personal telephone number, using the server, etc.

Is the option of additional use of the procedure after the DE 10 2004 046 413.8 If the server is used, each time a file is loaded by the user over the Internet, it checks whether the device address stored in the player's non-volatile memory corresponds to the telephone number that was sent from the server to the player when the device was first initialized or, if necessary, when a correction was made (in order to link the initialization to a changed telephone number). User of the device has been assigned a file loaded into the recording device in connection with this initialization process by saving it in the non-volatile memory.

In further development, the procedure is as follows: If the user wants to download a file from the Internet for use (regardless of whether directly, e.g. as an MP3 file, or via a subsequently created data carrier, such as a CD, etc.), they connect their playback device via a corresponding port on the computer (USB, etc.) via which they have access to their hard disk (this can also be the connection of a network card, etc.), whereby the device address of the playback device is first copied to the hard disk via this port, or if access to the disk via the Internet is to be blocked, it is saved in the area for cookies, or can also be copied to the clipboard, from where the user can copy it into a corresponding window of the relevant web page by simply using the copy function. If the device address is visible to everyone, this usually does not play a special role, since firstly the playback device can only be configured via an encrypted file with the device address, and secondly a file can only be played on the device if it contains the correct device address, and furthermore the device address with a currently loaded file can still be encrypted in any way (so that if the device address remains the same, the visibly displayed address changes from file to file, etc.).

1. a) Der Benutzer ruft von seinem Telefon (oder Handy, etc.) eine automatisierte Servicenummer, welche den Server der betreffenden WEB-Seite (oder einen weiteren Verbindungsserver, etc.) betrifft an, wobei gegebenenfalls eine geringe Gebühr zusätzlich noch abgebucht wird, um die Kosten des nachfolgenden Rückrufes (voice over IP) des Servers zu decken. Wobei bei diesem Anruf des Benutzers der Benutzer das Mikrofon seines Telefons an den Lautsprecher seines über das Internet mit dem betreffenden Server verbundenen (Client) Rechners hält, um (z.B. nach Drücken eines Buttons der betreffenden WEB-Seite) das aus dem Lautsprecher seines Rechners wiedergegebene, vom Server ausgesendete Kennsignal über die Telefonverbindung an den Server zurück zu senden. Dieses Kennsignal betrifft einerseits eine verschlüsselte Adresse und bestätigt dem Server, welcher aktuellen Sitzung er die den Telefonanruf entsprechenden Gebühren (als Kostenersatz für den Rückruf) zuordnen soll, andererseits enthält dieses Kennsignal, die aus Sicherheitsgründen dem Server zweifach übermittelte Geräeteadresse, einmal über die Internetverbindung und einmal über die akustische Kopplung (über Lautsprecher des Client- Rechners und Mikrofon des Telefons). Die aktuelle Sitzung kann dabei als Absender des Benutzers auch nur eine einmalig für die Sitzung verwendete, vom Server des Providers vergebene IP- Adresse betreffen.
2. b) Über die erhaltene Geräteadresse identifiziert der Server die Telefonnummer, die er zurückrufen soll. Die Telefonnummer, die den Server angerufen hatte, kann dabei auch eine andere, beliebige sein (Festnetz, etc.), da die über diesen Telefonanruf gut geschriebenen Gebühren, zunächst jener Sitzung (WEB-Seite) gut geschrieben werden, über welche der Server durch die akustische Kopplung die Geräteadresse erhalten hat. Über diese aktuelle Sitzung (WEB-Seite) prüft der Server, ob das bei seinem initialisierten Rückruf (nach einer Sprachansage und nach Auslösung durch einen Start Button der WEB-Seite) an die WEB-Seite (über den Lautsprecher des Client-Rechners und Mikrofon des Telefons) gesendete und über die Telefonverbindung zurück erhaltene Kennsignal (verschlüsseltes Signal mit jeweils einmaliger Verwendung) auch übereinstimmt (betreffend der zuvor beim erhaltenen Anruf festgestellten aktuellen Sitzung mit der zugehörigen Geräteadresse).

Procedure for checking the connection of the telephone number to the client computer via which a file is to be downloaded for use on the playback device relating to the method according to the invention:

1. a) The user calls an automated service number from their telephone (or cell phone, etc.) that refers to the server of the respective website (or another connecting server, etc.). A small fee may be charged additionally to cover the costs of the subsequent callback (voice over IP) from the server. During this call, the user holds their telephone microphone to the speaker of their (client) computer connected to the respective server via the Internet in order to send the identification signal emitted by the server, played through their computer's speaker (e.g., after pressing a button on the respective website), back to the server via the telephone connection. This identification signal contains an encrypted address and confirms to the server which current session the server should allocate the corresponding charges for the telephone call (as reimbursement for the callback). This identification signal also contains the device address, which is transmitted to the server twice for security reasons: once via the Internet connection and once via the acoustic connection (via the client computer's speaker and the telephone's microphone). The current session can also refer to an IP address assigned by the provider's server, which is used once for the session, as the user's sender.
2. b) Using the received device address, the server identifies the telephone number it should call back. The telephone number that called the server can also be any other telephone number (landline, etc.), since the charges credited for this telephone call are initially credited to the session (website) through which the server received the device address via the acoustic coupling. Using this current session (website), the server checks whether the identification signal (an encrypted signal with a one-time use) sent to the web site (via the client computer's loudspeaker and the telephone's microphone) during its initial callback (after a voice announcement and after being triggered by a start button on the web site) and received back via the telephone connection matches (regarding the current session previously determined during the received call with the corresponding device address).

If the proximity of the telephone line (or mobile device) to the computer in use is detected via the acoustic connection established with the user of the client computer, the telephone number called, or the data transmitted to the client computer (sent and received by the server), then the user is considered authorized. Of course, depending on the application, a password and an additional access number may also be used.

If necessary, the DE 10 2004 046 413.8 The already proposed verification of the telephone connection by monitoring the available bandwidth by servers has been used to prevent the possibility of manipulation using an additional telephone line. DE 10 2004 046 413.8 As already stated, the server uses a filter implemented in the software to tune the signal according to a running time frame in order to achieve a bandwidth limitation corresponding to the time frame. For the signal transmitted via the acoustic coupling (loudspeaker For the signal transmitted back to the server (e.g., the microphone of the client computer/the telephone or cell phone's microphone, or the microphone of the client computer/the telephone or cell phone's loudspeaker), a further filter is implemented in the server's software, which is also tuned according to this time function (or this time grid). This filter reverses the process when the audio signal transmitted as a file is sent out, so that the original signal is obtained again in terms of frequency dependence, taking into account the permitted bandwidth of the telephone channel used. An alternative to this method is to examine the received signal with an FFT (Fast Fourier Transformation for frequency influences).

It is also possible to provide the Internet connection directly in the playback device.

Explanation of the figures:

1 already explained.

2 relates to a pulse scheme for implementing the already explained preferred coding of the control characters (X) nested in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters P, addresses, etc., which are not associated with the analog signal an*, wherein a linear output time pattern (corresponding to output clock AST) is used and the resulting time offset is compensated by a phase jump of the input clock EST at the time positions X at which the control characters are positioned. 6c This phase jump (phi) of EST is illustrated: During the phase initiated by the START character of a certain number of control characters, which is determined by the value of the character Z = value following the START character, the output Q=log.1 of a flip-flop FF2 ( 6b) , whereby the time for generating the (here) positive clock edge EST is extended to such an extent that EST no longer occurs in the current time frame X, but at the beginning of the subsequent time frame of a value an* of the analog signal, whereby the actual clock edge EST of the analog signal value an*, which is still present in the time frame, is retained and after this first clock edge generated by the phase jump phi of the clock, occurs as the second clock edge EST within the time frame of an*. This means that the number of read-in clock pulses EST generated by the single-stage FIFO register ( 3 ) does not change and therefore corresponds to the number of FIFO readout cycles generated according to a linear (i.e., regular) time pattern. Since in this variant each control character (X) is followed by an analog signal value an*, a single-stage FIFO delay is sufficient (although with a different sequence, the FIFO can then be adapted accordingly, configured with multiple stages, etc.).

The clock pulse omitted in the time interval X of a control character is therefore made up for in the following time interval of the following analog value an*. 2 As can be seen, the readout clock AST of the FIFO is leading the source clock of the readout clock EST (see also preEST, EST in 3b) , i.e. first read from the FIFO (with linear time grid) and then subsequently written, after a time interval X of a control character (in which no value is written into the FIFO), in the following time interval (from an*) the calculated interpolation value an-1 (IPL) is first written and also read out by the output clock AST (as belonging to the time grid of the previous value) and then the analog value an(ES) occurring in this time grid is written into the FIFO, which, however, is only read out again in the next time grid (e.g. X) by the output clock AST; where this time grid (instead of X) can also relate to a value an* of a series of values of the audio signal that continues after a control character string inserted into the audio values, etc.

In the 2 diagram drawn along the time axis.

SPW....the series of symbols corresponding to the values of the data carrier or data source (plotted over the time axis t), where an11....an25 are the amplitude values corresponding to the amplitude, START refers to the decoded start character (01111...1111 or 1000.....00000), Z refers to the value for the counter specification for counting the subsequent control characters, consisting of parameters and addresses P. Only three of these control characters P are shown here, but any number of them can be used.

IPW....correspond to the amplitude values obtained by interpolation, as they are at the time positions at which the control characters are coded, for the ASL output (cf. 3 ) be used.

ES......refers to the values corresponding to the data source, where X indicates the decoded control characters. The control characters are not written to the FIFO ( 3 ), which is intended exclusively for the temporally correct (with a linear time grid) playback of the audio signal. Instead, it is stored in a separate latch or memory area (DEC), ditto decoded (see outputs Latch as current memory address for control characters, and output START for decoded start signal of the character string).

The 3 / 3b The clock signal preEST, which is shown in advance of the clock signal EST to be generated, corresponds to a linear time grid (with regular time intervals) and saves the control characters (or the start character START to be decoded) in good time.

With START a flip flop (see to 6c and 6a) which is clocked with the clock of the characters on the data carrier and whose output indicates whether the code read from the data carrier is a directly coded analog value or a control character. Since in this example in 2 , Z=3, after the third control character P, the flip-flop is set again so that its output corresponds to the constant interpretation of the characters as analog values (an24, an25, etc.). A detailed implementation example is given for 6a until 6c explained in more detail.

ASL....concerns in 2 the values output to the D/A converter or to the reconstruction of the digitized analog signal with a linear time raster (AST), where AST is the readout clock (the positive clock edge) of the 3 shown FIFO memory register (which is realized, for example, within a DSP by a RAM register).

The read-in clock EST (also a positive clock edge) is initially generated as a source clock preEST from the common preparation clock for the read-out clock AST. An EST clock that lags preEST sufficiently by the setup time (and delay time) corresponds to the read-in clock of the FIFO. However, with the difference from preEST that preEST, like AST, has a regular linear time pattern, while the read-in clock EST has a corresponding phase jump phi, depending on whether a control character or check character is currently being coded. Furthermore, preEST (ditto EST) is offset from the read-out clock AST such that the character (data) previously read into the FIFO with EST is read out with the subsequent read-out clock AST if the character sequence has a continuous analog value series of*...

• Fall 1: Es wurde seit Beendigung einer gelesenen Kontrollzeichenkette (String von X Zeichen mit jeweils dazwischen eingeschobenen Werten an*....) kein START Zeichen und somit keine Kontrollzeichenkette dekodiert, d.h. das genannte toggle Flip-Flop zur Umschaltung zwischen Kontrollzeichen und Analog Datenwert weist einen statisch ruhenden Ausgang auf. Das entspricht QF1=0 und Q=0 der Flip-Flop Schaltung in 6b.
• Fall 2: Es wurde ein START Zeichen dekodiert, d.h. das genannte toggle Flip-Flop (FF2, 6b) zur Umschaltung zwischen Kontrollzeichen und Analog Datenwert ist aktiviert und schaltet mit einem dem Zeichentakt entsprechenden Takt den Ausgang Q jeweils alternierend hin und her.

For the control of the reading clock EST, two cases are distinguished:

• Case 1: Since the completion of a read control string (string of X characters with values inserted between *....), no START character and therefore no control string has been decoded, i.e., the toggle flip-flop used to switch between control characters and analog data values has a statically idle output. This corresponds to QF1=0 and Q=0 of the flip-flop circuit in 6b .
• Case 2: A START character was decoded, ie the mentioned toggle flip-flop (FF2, 6b) for switching between control character and analog data value is activated and switches the output Q alternately back and forth with a clock corresponding to the character clock.

The output Q (FF2) of this flip-flop is used to prepare the read-in clock EST, which, like the read-out clock AST, is derived from a clock with a higher clock frequency (e.g. generated with a synchronously clocked state machine logic, which also contains the toggle flip-flop mentioned, or possibly also generated in the DSP, etc.), for each detected control character for the read-in clock EST, the 2 to generate a phase jump to be taken; (where START is recognized directly via the code of the file, or the following characters Z, P, P, P, are each recognized by the output Q=1 of the flip-flop, which switches alternately to a defined state for each character after an amplitude value (an* value).

This phase jump phi is achieved, for example, by changing the charging values (see LDZ and LDZphi of switch UMS, 6c ), the counter used for processing the read-in clock EST (from a higher clock frequency) is used, in such a way that it is not the frequency, ie the number of clock pulses across the entire time frame, that changes, but only the phase phi, which is corrected again for the following clock edge, which after a control character corresponds to an amplitude value (an* value) of the signal to be reproduced.

This results in a clock edge of the read-in clock EST in each time frame for the immediately successive amplitude values (an* values an11...an13 and an24,an25....), for which no control characters are inserted and thus no phase jumps of the read-in clock are initialized, with which the current amplitude value an relevant to this time frame is written into the FIFO register and (here immediately before) the amplitude value an-1 written in the previous time frame is read out, read-in clock edge EST and read-out clock edge AST are offset accordingly.

Example ( 2 , 3 ): an11 is read in the time interval SPW=an11 (EST) and read out again in the time interval SPW=an12 (with AST), where in SPW=an12 the value of an12 (read in with EST), etc.

However, if control characters (START; Z; P; P; P) are inserted between (/) the amplitude values (here an15/an17;an17/an19; an21/an23) and are each recognized according to the described method (detection of START and via toggle flip flop), then for each recognized control character (Q=1) a phase jump control of the clock edge of the read-in clock EST is initialized for the relevant time grid. As a result, the clock edge of EST is shifted in such a way that for the FIFO memory, which exclusively concerns the reproduction of the audio signal or the analog signal (and not the basic reading of the data supplied from a data carrier or a data source where the decoding of the control characters takes place), no (positive) clock edge of the write clock EST occurs within the time grid X relating to a control character, and due to the temporal extension of the log.0 only occurs within the time grid following the relevant control character for the relevant amplitude value (cf. an17, an19, an21, an23).

This is achieved by a phase shift of EST triggered by the status of the flip-flop output, whereby two (positive) clock edges of the write clock EST occur within this time frame. The first clock edge does not take over the value read from the data carrier or data source within the respective time frame, but rather the interpolation value retroactively corresponding to the previous control character, which is not directly taken over but calculated (see value series IPW). This value is formed from the value preceding the control character (e.g. START) (e.g. an-2(ASL) = an13) and the subsequent value corresponding to the current time frame (e.g. an(ES) = an15) (where the value an14 is obtained here as the interpolation value IPL). 2 , 3 ).

Example ( 2 , 3 ): an13 is read in the time interval SPW=an13 (EST) and read out again in the time interval SPW=START (with AST), whereby in SPW=START (due to the clock edge of EST being shifted to SPW=an15) no analog value is read into the FIFO. Instead, at the beginning of SPW=an15, which is still at the output of the FIFO, or in the symbolic representation after 3 The value an-2(ASL) = an13 present at the SPA register together with the current value an(ES) = an15 is used to calculate the interpolation value an14, which is written into the FIFO register at the beginning of SPW=an15 with the first write clock pulse EST (as value an-1(IPL), see MUX in 3 ) and is read out again with the read-out clock AST, ditto subsequently with the second write-in clock EST the current value an15 (as value an(ES), cf. MUX in 3 ) is rewritten into the FIFO (after reading an14).

At the character an* following a control character (or the corresponding time grid), the toggle flip-flop switches back to Q=1, so that no more phase jump occurs for EST.

The 3 The multiplexer MUX shown further at the input of the FIFO memory is controlled accordingly via the control character recognition (recognition of START and via toggle flip flop) and within the relevant time frame in order to write the current amplitude value read from the data carrier to (ES) or to write an interpolation value to-1 (IPL) as required.

In case the interpolation value an-1(IPL) is written instead of the current amplitude value an(ES), it will be output again immediately within the same time frame.

Realization: The model of a circuit according to 3 and 6b is very useful for the explanation, but in implementation it is much more advantageous to use a standard DSP (signal processor) and/or a digital programmable logic circuit (as ASIC) which is configured as a synchronous state machine sequencer and, for example, receives the decoded message signal of the decoded START character from the DSP, and if necessary can also be implemented directly by the DSP using an internal timer for clock processing. Conversely, the state machine sequencer supplies the DSP with the two interrupt signals est and ast, where ast is an interrupt that leads the output clock AST of the output latch. This means that the entire timing can also be generated externally (as an option to internal generation in the DSP via the DSP's internal timer) and the FIFO register in the DSP's RAM is implemented accordingly. Ditto the multiplexer MUX, shown here only for explanation, is implemented using corresponding access variables, the contents of which are assigned accordingly to the RAM write process. The same applies to the 3 The explicitly represented register SPA stores an already read value an-1(ASL) with a further time delay (as value an-2(ASL)) so that this value can be used for interpolation after receiving a control character. SPA is thus merely a variable that occupies a corresponding memory location in the DSP's RAM.

Furthermore, in 3 : DEC....Decoding of the start character (START) and saving (Latch output) of the control characters Z, P, etc. inserted between the values of the audio signal. This storage and decoding is performed with a leading clock preEST to the FIFO write clock EST, so that the measures related to the write clock EST can be activated in a timely manner before the arrival of the clock edge of EST. This concerns the suppression of EST within the respective time frame (of the control character) and the shifting of EST (by phase shift) to the beginning of the subsequent time frame (which again concerns an amplitude value an*). See 6a until 6d . 6d shows a circuit suggestion, 6c the corresponding pulse scheme.

To 6b : With a D-Flip Flop (Latch) FF1, the control character that introduces the character string (see above) START (DEK= START) is initially stored as the status “recognize character string” (QF1=1) and remains in this status until either a character counter Z ( 6b) the end of the character string is detected, or in case of a time-out error, a monostable time (MONO), which is started by decoding START, is reset; in both cases, FF1 is reset. The character counter Z ( 6b) is loaded by the control character Z following the START character, or its value (cf. 2 ). The character clock pulses received from the decoding of Start (or QF1=1) are counted and the control characters following the START character are interpreted according to their position.

In the status “Recognize character string” (QF1=1) the toggle flip flop FF2 is enabled (via R input).

This diagram is only to be understood symbolically: the function is expediently implemented as a synchronous state machine clocked at a sufficiently high clock frequency, thus eliminating the need for the clock delays specified here, as they can then simply be implemented by "empty" switching transfer conditions (also known as NOPs, no operation) of the status machine. Likewise, if only D flip-flops are used and toggle flip-flops are avoided, the reset problem in the event of a time-out error is eliminated, as the state machine then always switches itself to a defined state when an undefined status occurs. Instead of implementing the status machine in hardware, this can just as easily be done in the DSP using the DSP's software.

To follow the simple explanation scheme 66 In order to remain stable, the leading clock pulse preEST is split into two further clock pulses pre1EST and pre2EST, where pre2EST is delayed compared to pre1EST to such an extent that the switching edge of pre2EST at the toggle FF of FF2 only occurs when FF1 has already been switched on via the decoding of the control character START. REG/DEC here symbolises the acceptance of the characters from the data carrier and their interpretation as control characters when Q=1 (of FF2). UMS symbolises the switching of the time period until the edge EST becomes positive (e.g. generated by a down counter Z2dwn), where the subsequent time for the next positive pulse is likewise corrected so that this occurs after the shift of the first pulse (from the time interval X to an*, cf. 6c ) again (as the second impulse within the time frame) into the regular time frame (cf. an* 6c ) of EST (see also 2 ).

6a illustrates the distinction between control character (X) and analog value an* by the toggle flip flop (signal Q) switched with the source clock of EST (here referred to as pre2EST).

As already explained, the symbols indicated in the circuits, such as clocks, EST, AST, multiplexers MUX, latches SPA, REG/DEC, counters, etc., are to be understood as access times (concerning the clocks) or access variables (concerning the components) of a corresponding program (a DSP, etc.).

4 This diagram shows a scheme for the preferred volume monitoring of a playing file. When a file is initialized (started) for playback, the device program first branches to a search procedure to locate the file entries for this file in the non-volatile memory (FLASH Sp) (ADD=new?). If none are present, a corresponding entry is stored for this file. ADD here symbolizes a played section of a file, whereby the file name is always queried first in order to manage the file entries in the non-volatile memory (FLASH Sp) under the file name.

During file playback, the length of a section (associated with ADD) being played back is continuously determined (continuous determination of L), which is then recorded in the file entries of the non-volatile memory s(FLASH Sp). Any resolution for determining the length can be provided for a section address ADD, where ADD then quantifies an absolute value and the subsequent codings, for example, only add incremental lengths, which are additionally encoded in the absolute value. In the non-volatile memory s(FLASH Sp), only the last (current) value for an address is stored or constantly updated. Furthermore, it is possible that for a The section address ADD also stores the absolute maximum permissible length for playback of this section. This length is also constantly checked (L=Lmax?). If this length is exceeded, the section is aborted, or playback of this section is blocked beyond the length Lmax. This can then, for example, be skipped to the next section, which can also be marked in the maximum length specification (by selecting a corresponding word) (Continue for next section? yes/no).

Each time a section is blocked, this can be shown on the device's display, for example.

As already explained, the volume of the total file being played is determined according to a specific key (SUM=max ?). This is done by summing the sections already played according to the file entries in the non-volatile memory (FLASH Sp). For this calculation, the length of the sections can be multiplied by a scaling (e.g., in %) stored as a parameter for the section addresses ADD (as already explained). If the permissible total volume of the file being played is exceeded, playback is blocked.

5 shows how, within sections divided by addresses ADD1.......ADD4, limits Lmax are provided for ADD1, ADD2, but not for ADD3 and ADD4 (since the limit coincides with the end of the section).

6 see above.

7 illustrates an addressing example for a file in a data storage device, not to be confused with the section markings (ADD) made within the file. The control characters and parameters, or addresses, are also used for file addressing. 2 can be encoded directly in an audio signal in the manner described.

The first piece of information evaluated from the read data medium is the label of the publisher or music publisher, film distributor, etc. Conveniently, the label is further encrypted with a security code to prevent counterfeiting. This security code can, for example, be encoded in the audio signal, also as a tone sequence, etc. The label address read from the data medium (from the data source) addresses the area in the non-volatile memory where the files associated with this label are stored. Since the label refers to a unique brand name, but the file name addresses (FILE NAME) can be repeated (randomly) for different labels, confusion is avoided. The same applies to the assignment of device addresses G-ADD.

The control character following the LABEL is the parameter Z, which indicates how many control characters are to be read until the end of the string identifying the data carrier (also called header).

The following encrypted INFO information concerns how the control characters read in sequence are to be interpreted. For example, whether a device address is encoded, and whether the file contains FLASH STACK information that is to be loaded into the non-volatile memory as file entries if it hasn't already been loaded. Or whether it is a file that is to be played back in its entirety, etc.

Background: As already explained, the limited access volume of (e.g., free) sample files is intended to encourage the user to purchase the file in question, which is then encoded as a file with unlimited access with a device address so that it can only be played on the user's device. Since the device address (as already explained) for a LABEL is freely configurable by the device's server, the files can be played even if, for example, the device is defective and a new device address needs to be configured. Since the device is bound to a telephone number when downloading a file, the server would later register misuse if another unauthorized user, for example, used a device address that was reassigned (because the device was not defective) (because the device was not defective). The server can then write a blocking flag for all files for this LABEL into the device's non-volatile memory under its LABEL when attempting to download a file from the server, forcing the user to clarify the process, and so on.

If a file is purchased (with unlimited access) and the device address is included in the download, the file entries for this file (with limited access as a sample file) in the non-volatile memory are deleted the first time this file is played, as they are no longer needed (since the user purchased the file). This is also another prerequisite for the user to be able to play the file with unlimited access at all.

• Der Benutzer schließt sein Wiedergabegerät an seinen Rechner (Client-Rechner), der mit dem betreffenden Server vernetzt ist und erhält über den Browser die Möglichkeit die betreffenden Dateieinträge zu löschen. Dabei wird bei dem Wiedergabegerät generell für alle abzuspielenden Dateien mit begrenztem Zugang (Musterdatei) die Geräteadresse durch den Server geändert (über die angeschlossene Datenverbindung), wobei diese jedoch nicht die Geräeteadresse für die in vollem Umfang wieder zu gebenden Dateien betrifft, deren Geräeteadresse im Gerät unverändert gespeichert bleibt.

This means that if the non-volatile memory is full of existing file entries, this only affects the sample files with limited access and not the regularly purchased ones. If the user is forced to delete the file entries (to make room for new sample files with limited access and to be able to play them), this can be done by purchasing the corresponding files or by the following measure:

• The user connects their playback device to their computer (client computer), which is networked with the server in question, and has the option to delete the relevant file entries via the browser. In this case, the server generally changes the device address of all files to be played with limited access (sample files) on the playback device (via the connected data connection). However, this does not affect the device address for files to be played in full, whose device address remains stored unchanged on the device.

The browser also displays a list of tracks containing the files whose file entries have been deleted from the non-volatile memory. The user is then asked whether they wish to reinstall any tracks. If they do, the user can download these tracks again, but with the new device address and all the file entries (FLASH STACK) associated with these files, which correspond to user behavior (regarding previews, etc.). This allows the user to continue using the selected files, taking into account the portion of these files that has already been played, while still retaining space for the file entries of new templates (files) in the non-volatile memory. These selected files then contain the new device address and, in the INFO section, the note that the FLASH STACK (only!) is to be loaded into the non-volatile memory when the file is used for the first time, where these file entries remain until the next deletion cycle, or when the file is loaded as a file for unlimited playback and thus its other entries concerning the volume limitation during playback are deleted from the non-volatile memory. 7 The file name check shown for unrestricted playback of files that do not have a volume limit can also be omitted if, for example, the status of the file (no volume limit) is noted within the file as a special identifier. It is particularly preferable to do this using the 2 and 6 explained method, whereby this note concerning the authorization for unlimited playback of the file is noted in encrypted form across the entire audio file. If the playback device independently determines that an attempt has been made to tamper with this file, e.g. if the identifier in the file header corresponds to unlimited playback of the file, but parameters still included within the audio signal indicate a file with a volume limit during playback, then the blocking note is entered under the LABEL management of the file(s). This means that an attempt to play a manipulated file from a manufacturer (LABEL) is penalized by the fact that no file from that manufacturer (LABEL) can be played at all. The same happens if the LABEL entry for the file is tampered with, which is also encoded in various places in the audio signal.

To make deciphering control characters and parameters encoded in the audio signal as difficult as possible, it is advisable to statistically distribute their association. The individual bits of the words of, say, a total of 200 parameters and addresses are shuffled according to a specific algorithm and then reassembled in the terminal device (by the DSP), making it very difficult for third parties to decipher the codes and manipulate the file.

Further options for encryption: The 2 The method explained above also offers the possibility of using the audio signal itself for data encryption, for example, by using certain harmonics from the music file (which are not immediately noticeable) for further encoding. To do this, the harmonics are first filtered and then added to the digital encoding accordingly (e.g., using a modulo 2 code, etc.).

As from 7 It is also clear that for a file to be played back, the LABEL name must match the group address of all files assigned to a LABEL, the device address G-ADD assigned to a LABEL, and the file name must match the name stored in the non-volatile memory. Instead of checking a file name stored in the non-volatile memory, however, the file can also contain an encrypted abbreviation that indicates that the file is to be played back in its entirety. This abbreviation can then be freely selected and applied to multiple files, and is updated or checked in the non-volatile memory of the playback device when such a file is downloaded or activated by the server.

8 illustrates the updating of the device address on a device in whose non-volatile memory the file entries of files that can only be played back with a limited volume are stored, which (because the memory is full and the user does not want to delete the memory by purchasing files that can be played back without limit) must be deleted in a special procedure. For this purpose, the user uses his (client) computer connected to the Internet and, for example, a landline telephone connection, which proves to the server that the Internet access is from an authorized user (see also the DE 10 2004 046 413.8 ).

The playback device is connected, for example, to a USB port on the (client) computer. Data is exchanged between the files stored in the non-volatile memory (MEMO, 8 ) and the server that manages all files that can be obtained from a specific LABEL.

After the server has determined that the device address of the playback device, the user's telephone number associated with the device address and (optionally) the password entry are correct, the server reads the file entries stored in the non-volatile memory (MEMO) which concern the files to be played back only to a limited extent (and which form the protection for them) and then deletes the non-volatile memory (MEMO).

Subsequently, the server writes a new device address to the non-volatile memory (MEMO) of the playback device. This address only applies to files that are only allowed to be played back to a limited extent (and thus provides the protection). The old device address also remains in the playback device and is used exclusively for files that are allowed to be played back to their full extent. These two device addresses are differentiated in the playback device by corresponding identification bits. Different device addresses can be provided for different labels (or possibly for different other file groupings).

Furthermore, the part of the file entries read from the non-volatile memory (MEMO) is stored in the server for the device address and is included in the file when re-downloading files that the user already owns or has partially played (but which are no longer playable in their original version due to the changed device address) if the user downloads such a file again from the server (FLASH STACK, 7 ) and when such a file is played back for the first time, the data corresponding to the last playback state (by the user) is re-written into the non-volatile memory (MEMO). This means that the user has reduced the number of files that may only be played back to a limited extent and can play the files that have been kept or downloaded again and assigned a new device address without being able to increase the permissible volume (taking into account the part already played). On the other hand, the user can play new files that have not yet been played and that use the newly assigned device address, as usual with a limited volume.

As in 8 As is still clearly shown, the new device address G-ADD is used for the playback of (sample) files that can only be played with a limited volume (which can also be changed several times in this way). However, for (purchased) files that are to be played with an unlimited volume, the originally configured device address is used. And only for those files that have already been partially played by the user, the transfer of the deleted information from the non-volatile memory (MEMO) to the file itself (with the new device address) is necessary (FLASH STACK, 7 ).

Loss of device or defective device: If a user loses the playback device with the configured device address, or if the device is defective, or if a new device is purchased, then the playback device must be configured again if an external data storage device (CD, DVD) is used so that the user can use the data storage device, ditto if the data on an MP3 player was still stored externally on a computer, etc. In order to detect misuse in this case, it is sensible for the server to save the unalterable electronically encoded serial number in the playback device in the server's database and to check this number each time the device is connected to the server (also via a client computer, etc.) to determine whether the old device is still being used.

If this is the case, the server can block one of the two devices via a corresponding entry (when downloading a new file). It is advisable to register the serial numbers chronologically by the server in order to to take into account the sequence of their access when determining several identical device addresses and to be able to block all devices except the last access by means of a marker written into the non-volatile memory of the device.

Thus, in this case (if it detects two different phone numbers for the same device address), the server is able to distinguish which of two devices with the same device address was the first (which was allegedly broken or lost, or replaced by a new device), and can thus block illegally operated devices by making an entry in the non-volatile memory (MEMO).

This procedure can be further refined on a person-by-person basis if the connection to a telephone number is still used (since, for example, mobile phones with their telephone card tied to a network operator are generally not lent out that often).

A further additional embodiment is to design the playback device in such a way that it can also be used as copy protection for a computer (PC), wherein the playback device is connected to the computer (PC) that plays back the file via a data interface (e.g. USB, etc.), the file is stored encrypted on the computer's mass storage device (hard drive, etc.) and the software used to decrypt the file can access the non-volatile memory of the playback device via the data interface in order to read and update the file entries relating to the limitation of playback, wherein the decryption of the file also takes place in a format that can be processed by standard audio software and the read file is offered to software that is customary for playing the file in relation to the computer's operating system as if it were being read from a mass storage device of the computer (hard drive, etc.).

Technical task in comparison with the state of the art:

The aim is to play back a part selected for access via a control function from the set of a complete file (e.g. the spoken text of a book being read aloud, etc.) on a playback device, or a functional unit of such a device modified for this purpose, which can, for example, play back files as audio or video signals (or text or images).

In addition to the further general applicability of the method, an MP3 player, a CD player, etc., is intended as a playback device.

In further development, for example, a generally applicable format is provided which, regardless of the data format used (e.g. any standard), can accommodate the parameters and addresses required to carry out the procedure in the file directly in an audio file.

The term "device" is understood very broadly here. For example, a so-called data-loadable electronic newspaper (or book), which already exists in the lab, can be used as a text display device. Graphic elements such as musical notation can also be displayed. For example, a dual footswitch (with two pedals) for page forward and page backward allows the music on the display to be paged forward or backward, etc.

The technical task concerns the control function, which controls access for playback in such a way that, on the one hand, the user can freely access the content in specific sections, but can only play back a portion of the file's overall volume. This overall volume is not a fixed, predefined section, but rather results from the sum of the samples freely selected by the user during playback, which can be played back as often as desired. However, the total volume of the sections freely selected from a file in this way represents only a fraction of the entire file.

In principle, an endless number of data carriers (or loaded data packages such as MP3, etc.) should be playable with such a device. Furthermore, when the user repeatedly plays the files, they should always find exactly the previous status (regarding this file and the recording of the permissible playback volume) and should not be able to play back any further excerpts beyond the volume limited by the file being played, while in principle the excerpts can be freely selected.

Considering the decades-long availability of playback devices for various data storage media and their continuous development, including the use of multimedia computers for this purpose, especially in connection with use via the Internet (for downloading and playing back files), the task of the invention alone can be considered particularly inventive, because it primarily covers both the multimedia sector and the distribution of classic print media, such as books, newspapers magazines, etc., which gives the invention of new technical aids an enormous boost.

Preview:

In this case, in addition to the embodiment according to claim 1, generally valid protection is also sought independently of claim 1 solely for a further development of the invention, using device addresses whose correspondence with the data carrier being played back must be present as a check address contained in the data carrier in order to enable its playback, and in particular in detail such that the data carrier is initially stored on a server (from which a file is to be delivered via the Internet) without a defined device address being present, but the device address is added accordingly by the server to the device connected to the client computer when the file is downloaded, and above all that the server can assign a device address to the device, i.e. can configure it, without this type of copy protection being able to be circumvented.

This means that a new player can be sold as standard and play any number of non-copy-protected files (as before), as well as any number of copy-protected files. While the manufacturer must adhere to a certain standard, all devices are identical upon delivery; no individual fixed address is required. The device addresses are only assigned during configuration by the server or when a file is downloaded by the server, and are used for a consistency check (possibly with intermediate calculations for decryption using various algorithms) between the file and the device.

☺ Preferred option: Since different labels (brand names of file suppliers, or music publishers, publishing houses, etc.) can freely assign different device addresses, for a special further development the file name (or its encoding) is used as the address for addressing the device address associated with the conformity check and the procedure is as follows.

1. a) der zur Kennzeichnung einer bestimmten Datei (unabhängig vom Gerät, bzw. Benutzer) verwendete Dateiname, bzw. dessen Kennung in einen nicht flüchtigen Speicher des Wiedergabegerätes eingeschrieben;
2. b) es wird die beim Runterladen der Datei mit vergebene Geräteadresse unter der Adressierung (Verknüpfung) des Dateinamens (und/oder Labels) mit abgespeichert.

When downloading the file from the server,

1. a) the file name used to identify a specific file (regardless of the device or user) or its identifier is written into a non-volatile memory of the playback device;
2. b) the device address assigned when downloading the file is saved under the addressing (link) of the file name (and/or label).

1. a) Ist der betreffende Dateiname überhaupt gespeichert ? Wenn ja, dann zur nächsten Prüfung, wenn nein, dann Verweigern der Wiedergabe und Abbrechen. Als Option kann der Dateiname auch in den nichtflüchtigen Speicher des Wiedergabegerätes eingeschrieben werden.
2. b) Stimmt die unter der Adresse (Referenz) dieses Dateinamens abgespeicherte Geräteadresse mit der in der Datei gespeicherten Prüfadresse überein (unmittelbar oder nach Entschlüsselung, etc.) ? Wenn ja, dann erfolgt die Wiedergabe, wenn nein, dann Verweigern der Wiedergabe und Abbrechen;

When playing a file, a coincidence check of the file name and device address is performed in the playback device, for example:

1. a) Is the file name in question even saved? If so, then proceed to the next check. If not, then refuse playback and abort. Optionally, the file name can also be written to the playback device's non-volatile memory.
2. b) Does the device address stored under the address (reference) of this file name match the verification address stored in the file (immediately or after decryption, etc.)? If yes, playback is performed; if no, playback is denied and the process is aborted.

The file name can also consist of a higher-level address (LABEL, or name of the file supplier) and the name of the piece = actual file name, or the address of the file name can be structured in such a way that, depending on the coding (e.g. differentiated by a control bit in the file), the device address is only addressed with the higher-level file name (i.e. only addressed with the label), or can be addressed with the entire file name (if the control bit indicates this).

At first glance, this measure appears to be very simple from a technical perspective, but it is by no means trivial, as the state of the art in the marketing of such data storage devices demonstrates. For example, there are currently two opposing views regarding copyright law alone: that of publishers, especially music publishers, and that of copier manufacturers for copying data storage devices. The proposal, which is made here solely for the (to be regarded as independent) further development of the invention, is precisely the opposite: the music industry, and ditto the publishers, should become the driving force for copier manufacturers, and conversely, the copier manufacturers should increase publishers' sales. Instead of copiers, a data storage device for compressed files (such as MP3s) is used, into which the data can be written and transported via the data storage device (as a mini device, plug-in card, etc.) to another location and reloaded onto a corresponding playback device.

With this method, it is still possible for different suppliers (providers) of the data carriers to be able to use the To prevent manipulated data storage devices from being played on a device, the supplier can only block the data storage devices it supplies by using an address that differs from the other suppliers' labels as part of the compared code of the assigned device address. The only address to be reserved by agreement (like a trademark) is the supplier's label, as the parent address. This allows different labels to use identical filename addresses to optimally utilize the storage space in the playback device's non-volatile memory.

The present method, both according to claim 1 and the one discussed in the preview just given, goes far beyond a general program for data processing and can, in addition to the usual implementation with a microprocessor or a computer program, also be implemented in hardware logic, e.g. by a state machine sequencer, etc., or by a DSP program of a digital signal processor.

For deleting the non-volatile memory, which relates to the information of a file both for the method specified in claim 1 (or 2) and for the general copy protection method of a file, the same measures as in the further development claims can be used.

Inventive problem in the context of the prior art:

• In addition to the already huge advantage of this advanced version, a major incentive to purchase such a device is that while the user can access demonstration files in their entirety (e.g., free of charge), despite unlimited selection from the entire file size, the file can only be played back to a limited extent (in terms of volume!). This means it's like television commercials: just when things get at their most interesting, the show ends. However, the difference is that the user can freely select the interesting parts from the entire volume.
• ☺ Since the user can test a wide variety of music, videos, radio plays, read books, etc., using this completely new method for free, such a device will, on the one hand, spread rapidly, and, on the other, publishers and the music industry will finally be able to provide their data storage devices with usable, device-specific copy protection. Of course, a variant is also feasible in which, for example, the portable device is connected to a computer (PC, notebook, etc.), enabling playback of the downloaded data storage devices directly on the PC if the user, for example, does not have a CD burner to burn a CD.
• Thus, taking into account the great advantage that can be achieved with the invention for industrial exploitation and the state of the art, the technical problem itself can already be regarded as particularly inventive.

During the technical implementation, particular attention was paid to ensuring that the file size limit cannot be circumvented by repeatedly downloading or obtaining files. This process also takes special cases, such as a device defect, loss of the device, or a new purchase of the device, into account to prevent misuse as much as possible.

The main application of the invention is to play back sample excerpts from a file (sample file) freely selected by the user, thereby encouraging the user to purchase the file or full access to it (full file). Once authorized access to the file has been obtained, the user can only play the file on their device.

For the first variant (limited playback of a sample file), even with a smaller playback device, a device address is generally not required for a few hundred files (as long as the non-volatile memory is not erased, see later). This means that the user can load and play the same file from another user and still not exceed the volume played on their device, even if the user from whom they obtained the file played completely different sections (they still cannot play these sections). For a larger number of files (practically infinite), it is necessary to delete the non-volatile memory, whose contents prevent playback beyond the specified limit, or even to delete it only partially (because it is full). In this case, a device address is also used for files from which only test excerpts are to be played. This is done by the server reconfiguring the playback device accordingly via the Internet.

Since each playback device is coded with a different device address, the Server to delete the non-volatile memory (of the device) whose contents prevent playback beyond the specified limit, e.g. only allow it every few months, etc.

The second variant (unlimited playback of a full file) concerns the possibility of unrestricted playback of a file. For this purpose, it is advisable to encrypt a device address in the file, which is checked when the device is loaded for a match with the one configured in the device. Unrestricted playback is only possible if this match is met. As will be explained in more detail later, the device address in the playback device is configured via the Internet by a server using a key procedure. A device can also persistently store multiple device addresses for different purposes. For example, one device address used for files that can be played back to their full extent and one device address used only for files that can be played back to a limited extent, if necessary (if the device's non-volatile memory needs to be erased so that the file entries for new files can be managed). Or, associated device addresses (even repeating ones) can be configured for several different labels (via which the files are retrieved).

The state of the art and common practice is the reproduction of excerpts from works, e.g., readings from books, broadcast on radio, and distribution via various data storage media. A preselected excerpt (or several excerpts) is made available to an interested party in the hope that they will then purchase the work. This practice is common both in print media and using electronic media (the internet, etc.).

Another very common method according to the state of the art (for a more distant comparison) is to provide data processing software with fixed, restricted use to the customer for a demonstration, e.g. preventing the saving of edited files, or counting certain processing steps, e.g. setting eyes (solder pads, vias, etc.) on programs for the creation of layout patterns for the production of printed circuit boards, etc.

The application of the method specified in claim 1 of the present invention is primarily aimed at the playback of files (acoustically or visually). However, it also includes measures for processing the files using the preferred encoding/decoding of parameters and addresses, e.g., for generating the division of sections and their length assignments, etc.

The technical task of the invention is therefore to fundamentally improve the usual static limitation of a file for the usual reproduction to fixed excerpts (e.g. of a work, book, CD, etc.) in such a way that a dynamic limitation of the file to excerpts freely selected by the user becomes possible without the system being able to be circumvented.

• das Abspielgerät;
• das Laden von Dateien in das Abspielgerät (z.B. über das Internet);
• die Zugangskontrolle zu Auszügen, bzw. Abschnitten einer wiederzugebenden Datei, wobei die Datei unmittelbar autark am Abspielgerät wiedergegeben wird, oder über einen Computer, bei dem das Abspielgerät nur die Dateieinträge (zur Begrenzung) verwaltet;
• die Unterbringung von Paramterwerten und Adressen direkt in einem Audiosignal ohne daß das Format, in welchem das Audiosignal gespeichert ist, zu beeinflußen bzw. zu ändern;
• die nachträgliche Erweiterung des Umfanges für den Zugang, oder das Abschalten der Zugangskontrolle für eine wiederzugebende Datei;

und als Erweiterungsoption:

• die Bindung des Abspielgerätes an eine bestimmte Person, in technischer Hinsicht an ein persönlich genutztes Netz (z.B. Telefon, Handy, etc.) oder auch an die Stimme des Benutzers, insbesondere für die Konfiguration der Geräteadressen, sowie für das Löschen des genannten nicht flüchtigen Speichers, dessen Inhalt die Wiedergabe einer Datei über das vorgegebene Limit hinaus verhindert und das Freischalten einer Datei zur uneingeschränkten Nutzung ermöglicht.
• ➯ Dabei ermöglicht dieses neue Verfahren, daß aus einer jeweils geladenen vollständigen Datei unter Benutzung einer strukturierten Adressierung (z.B. Seitenadressen eines Buches, etc.) jeweils beliebig frei zu wählende Teile, bzw. Abschnitte (als Auszüge aus der vollständigen Datei) dem Benutzer zugänglich gemacht werden, wobei das gesamte Volumen (als Summe) dieser frei wählbaren Auszüge gegenüber dem Volumen der vollständig geladenen Datei in vordefinierter Weise begrenzt ist; z.B. im einfachsten Fall als bestimmter Prozentsatz der gesamten Datei.

The invention includes:

• the playback device;
• loading files into the playback device (e.g. via the Internet);
• access control to excerpts or sections of a file to be played back, whereby the file is played back directly and independently on the playback device, or via a computer, where the playback device only manages the file entries (for limitation purposes);
• the placement of parameter values and addresses directly in an audio signal without influencing or changing the format in which the audio signal is stored;
• the subsequent extension of the scope of access or the deactivation of access control for a file to be played;

and as an extension option:

• the binding of the playback device to a specific person, in technical terms to a personally used network (e.g. telephone, mobile phone, etc.) or even to the voice of the user, in particular for the configuration of the device addresses, as well as for the deletion of the aforementioned non-volatile memory, the content of which prevents the playback of a file beyond the specified limit and enables the release of a file for unrestricted use.
• ➯ This new procedure enables the user to access freely selectable parts or sections (as extracts from the complete file) from a loaded complete file using a structured addressing (e.g. page addresses of a book, etc.), whereby the total volume (as a sum) of these freely selectable extracts is lower than the volume of the fully loaded file in is limited in a defined way; e.g. in the simplest case as a certain percentage of the entire file.

Such as, for example, a certain percentage of a text present as an audio signal from a read-aloud book, a newspaper, etc., with a special feature that differs from the state of the art, namely that the part (excerpt) to be selected is not predetermined when the file (or a data carrier in question) is created, and that an optimized process or system is provided that ensures that this special feature cannot be circumvented by multiple users using a playback device.

The percentage by which the individual sections of the file marked by addresses (ADD, code) add up can be classified differently, e.g., for titles or headlines, 0%, i.e., the titles or headlines are not added up at all or do not influence the total volume. After the title, for example, the first few sentences are counted at 10%, i.e., their length is only evaluated at 10% in the summation, and the further text passages are counted at 100% of their length, whereby, for example, a total of 20% of the total length of the text (e.g., spoken as an audio signal) should be freely available. This means that the text of the section marked by ADD is limited to 20% in its maximum playback length. This means that for each of the individual sections, a length limit can be selectively defined for each section to prevent the entire section from being played back. Alternatively, this length limit can also be defined as a volume limit within a section, meaning that a specific percentage of the section can be freely selected and played back by the user. As always, global parameter presets can also be made within a file (e.g., maximum playback length of a section = 20%, etc.).

• - die maximale absolute Länge des Abschnittes, von START an gemessen,
• - der maximale Prozentsatz der Länge des Abschnittes, frei wählbar innerhalb des Abschnittes,
• - der Wert der Länge in % des Abschnittes, wie er für die Aufsummierung des Volumens gewertet wird,
• - und weiters noch eine optionale Angabe, ob nach Erreichen der Begrenzung eines Abschnittes (z.B. der maximalen Länge) die Wiedergabe beim nächsten Abschnitt, bzw. bei der nächsten START Adresse fortgesetzt werden soll, oder einfach angehalten werden soll.

This means that for each section address, hereinafter referred to as the START address (with which a section is called up), the following parameters for limiting playback can be added:

• - the maximum absolute length of the section, measured from START,
• - the maximum percentage of the length of the section, freely selectable within the section,
• - the value of the length in % of the section as it is used for the summation of the volume,
• - and furthermore an optional indication as to whether, after reaching the limit of a section (e.g. the maximum length), playback should continue at the next section or at the next START address, or simply be stopped.

Depending on the complexity, you can also define subaddresses with corresponding parameter assignments, etc. These subaddresses cannot be accessed directly, but are used only as labels for assigning different parameters. The length (of a section) is measured depending on the medium being played (e.g., acoustic or moving images) as a measure of time, or in the case of text, in the number of words, or in the case of music, e.g., in the number of bars, etc., or even as a percentage of the entire section.

➯ In particular, the same device allows multiple use to play back freely selectable parts or sections of the loaded complete file, if necessary even among multiple users, provided the predefined volume limit is observed, regardless of how many users are using the device. However, and above all after separate activation (taking into account the key provided for this activation), it also allows exclusive single use to play back the entire file for only one authorized user, and without the need for a password. This has the advantage that this protective measure cannot be circumvented by the unauthorized disclosure of a password for access, which would infringe copyright. There are even measures in place to ensure that if the device is passed on along with the loaded file(s), another user can only use the device with severe restrictions.

A particularly preferred playback device is a portable MP3 player that also has an Internet radio. Using a buffer memory (FIFO), several programs can be recorded simultaneously for hours and the user can also permanently save and copy selected music from it. However, upon repeated playback, only excerpts can be played back, with the option to purchase the entire file.

➯ Or the device is also very well suited for a car radio with integrated radio telephone/mobile phone connection, with the option that, for example, book texts, newspapers, etc. can be played back via data storage devices or downloaded via the Internet, for example to listen to excerpts and to then purchase a title (music, a book being read aloud, etc.) from the home PC as a file that can be played back indefinitely. The file is loaded into the car radio as an MP3 from a server via the car radio's radio/mobile phone connection, while the user is connected to the server at their home PC via the Internet. For example, to first listen to excerpts from a book, then buy the entire file and the book in order to alternately listen to the book on the car radio or continue reading at home, etc. The user then has the option of using their PC's browser or its Internet connection to the server to directly enter the point where they left off reading the book. The server then sends an SMS to the car radio's radio/mobile phone connection containing the exact jump address of the point in the text where the user stopped reading. If the car radio user switches to the MP3 recorder, they can listen to the book they have read as a book being read aloud from the set point in the text.

Or the user can, for example, independently of the application according to claim 1, have a subscribed newspaper read to him while driving, which he has downloaded via the radio telephone/mobile phone connection of his car radio using his home PC (by specifying the telephone number of the mobile phone in the car radio).

For this variant, it is also practical to install the radio/cell phone module outside the car radio and conceal it within the vehicle. The car radio only has a corresponding interface to the radio/cell phone/MP3 player, making it very inexpensive to implement. The radio/cell phone/MP3 player module, which is housed independently of the car radio, is also equipped with a GPS receiver so that the location can be transmitted via the radio/cell phone in the event of the vehicle being stolen. It is also practical to integrate a microphone into the car radio, which can be used to record conversations via the MP3 memory and also retrieve them via the radio/cell phone connection.

The solution to this technical problem relates to the method according to claim 1 as the essential idea of the invention with the specified developments in the subclaims and the measures for implementing the control functions for controlling access for playback, in particular when a portable device is used for playback, which can, for example, also be reduced to only part of the control functions and can be plugged into a conventional standard device (e.g. also in a car radio, etc.) as a plug-in module (if the previously described preferred option is not used).

Or the device has a modulator/transmitter to feed in via the antenna of a car radio (also via its switching with an RF relay), etc. Or these control functions can be built into an otherwise conventional portable CD player or MP3 player.

In particular, extensions are made to the file to be played, e.g., an MP3 file, an audio file stored on a CD, or a video file, etc., which involve the addition of addresses and parameters, with the associated address recognition, address checks, and parameter evaluation provided by the playback device in order to implement the access control functions. In addition to the usual storage of the file to be played, the addresses contained in the file, as well as their associated check functions, are permanently stored in a non-volatile memory. This also includes the implementation of the deletion conditions and reinitialization when the non-volatile semiconductor read/write memory, in which the addresses controlling access to the information are permanently stored (and therefore retained when the device is switched off), is full and must therefore be deleted.

It is further provided that if a file that has already been played (heard or seen) is played repeatedly, the sections already heard or seen will still be accessible, but new sections can only be accessed as long as the amount of data limited to the intended share (e.g. corresponding to a predetermined percentage) is not exceeded.

➯ In further development, the specification of this share (or percentage) can be influenced by a procedure that allows unlimited access (100% access) to the file during playback, which, however, can only be performed depending on the identification of the user (or the playback device). And the file in question is updated (e.g., via the Internet) using appropriate access control.

It should be briefly explained why a customer should buy such a device? For example, to be able to play freely selectable reading samples from a printed publication completely legally without violating copyright by using the option of obtaining a file from the Internet, or to listen to freely selectable music titles, etc. And if necessary, for example, using the MP3 method in the To be able to listen to a collection of files loaded onto a device either continuously or just once (for a smaller fee) after paying a fee, or after purchasing a book in question, etc. It is precisely the enormous possibilities that arise from the seamless hierarchy of access to a copyrighted work acquired in several steps that make the new process so economically interesting.

The inventive concept is represented by claim 1. This is followed by subclaims characterizing further developments and options for implementation.

Even if the preferred method were to be implemented exclusively by software on a computer, which is in principle possible if only a computer is used as the playback device (which can also be connected to the Internet), this is not a program used exclusively for data processing, but rather a novel memory organization, controlled by a special method, for address generation and address verification carried out to implement the preferred access control (which is controlled by this new method in a special manner corresponding to the invention). As a further example, it is preferred that the aforementioned "playback device" with the non-volatile memory, for example, only manages (stores) the file entries, but the file is played back on a computer (PC) via appropriate software. According to patent law and current case law, such a method is protected by intellectual property law even if it is implemented exclusively by software, i.e., by a data processing program, if it is also used accordingly in accordance with the inventive features.

Preferred application: A preferred application of the invention is to provide a complete (e.g. spoken) book text, or an audio file spoken in the book text (as a read-aloud text), which is encrypted ( 1 , 11 ) is loaded into the memory of a CD player or MP3 player modified for implementation of the method (e.g., via an internet connection or a data storage device), using an access control method corresponding to the technical task of the invention. For this application, the played audio file (with the spoken text) is divided into sections corresponding to the book pages, with the relevant page numbers being displayed on the device and being able to be accessed or listened to according to the user's selection.

The user can start playback of the file from any designated start address (which here, for example, corresponds to the page number of the book being read aloud and is continuously shown or can be selected by pressing a standard forward/backward step button on the display, see access/operation in 1 , 11 ).

In the hierarchy, the following addresses and parameters, classified according to priority, are provided as a protection code to control access and, in a further development of the invention, are directly included in the digital code of the audio signal. It is obvious that this example can be modified as desired using other known methods.

• - Geräteadresse:
  • Die Geräteadresse ist in der geladenen (wiederzugebenden) Datei enthalten und wird bereits beim Laden mit der im Wiedergabegerät dauerhaft abgespeicherten geprüft. Stimmt sie nicht überein, dann wird die Wiedergabe grundsätzlich verweigert (oder die Datei gleich gar nicht geladen). Die Konfiguration der Geräteadresse im Wiedergabegerät bei der Initialisierung erfolgt bevorzugt über eine zentrale Datenbank eines oder mehrerer Server im Internet und es sind entsprechende Weiterbildungsoptionen vorgesehen um zu verhindern, daß unterschiedliche Benutzer jeweils das gleiche Gerät verwenden und nachfolgend noch im Detail beschrieben.

Explanation of terms: The term "initialization" of the playback device refers to the deletion or reorganization of the stored security addresses and parameters that control the device's access. This is only possible if special security measures are observed, which are explained in more detail later. When initializing the device (e.g., using the Internet), the device address is primarily assigned. This device address has nothing to do with the data network protocol; rather, it is an identification address for the server. It is assigned not to the Internet connection, but to the playback device as an absolute and permanently stored address. It can only be changed by reinitializing the playback device.

• - Device address:
  • The device address is contained in the loaded (playable) file and is checked against the address permanently stored in the playback device during loading. If it doesn't match, playback is generally refused (or the file isn't loaded at all). The device address in the playback device is configured during initialization, preferably via a central database on one or more servers on the Internet. Corresponding configuration options are provided to prevent different users from using the same device. These options are described in more detail below.

• - Dateiname:
  • Der Dateiname ist im Kopf der geladenen (wiederzugebenden) Datei enthalten und wird bei der erstmaligen Wiedergabe der Datei in ein nichtflüchtiges Speicherregister (z.B. FLASH RAM) des Wiedergabegerätes als Bezeichner (Adresse) einer Liste, nachfolgend Dateinamenliste genannt, eingetragen und bleibt zusammen mit dieser einschließlich ihres Inhaltes bis zu einer erneuten Initialisierung (siehe erläuterter Begriff oben) des Gerätes dauerhaft gespeichert, auch wenn die Datei deren Dateiname diese Liste betrifft, aus dem Wiedergabegerät bereits wieder gelöscht (MP3) ist bzw. ein betreffender Datenträger, von dem die Wiedergabe der Datei erfolgte (z.B. eines CD-Players) zwischenzeitlich wieder entfernt worden ist. Gleichfalls dauerhaft mitgespeichert werden die in die Dateinamenliste zu einem Dateinamen jeweils zugehörig eingetragenen Parameter und Adressen, die für die Zugangssicherung der einzelnen Abschnitte bei der Wiedergabe der Datei verwendet sind, und deshalb innerhalb der Dateinamenliste als Schlüsseldaten einer betreffenden Datei bezeichnet werden.

The use of device addresses allows the server program to better control the use of files downloaded from the server's database to a user.

• - File name:
  • The file name is contained in the header of the loaded (to be played) file and is converted into a non-volatile memory register (e.g. FLASH RAM) of the playback device as the identifier (address) of a list, hereinafter referred to as the file name list, and remains permanently stored together with this list, including its contents, until a reinitialization (see term explained above) of the device, even if the file whose file name relates to this list has already been deleted from the playback device (MP3) or a corresponding data carrier from which the file was played back (e.g. a CD player) has been removed in the meantime. Also permanently stored are the parameters and addresses entered in the file name list belonging to a file name, which are used to secure access to the individual sections when the file is played back, and are therefore referred to as key data of a corresponding file within the file name list.

For applications such as playing back text from books, it is still useful if the file name corresponds directly to the title of a book, etc.

A file name is created as an identifier (address) of the corresponding file name list, along with the corresponding section addresses as key data for the file, only when the file is first played back. The relevant excerpt(s) being played back are permanently stored as key data in the file name list of this file via their corresponding section addresses. For example, "File name" (page 1 to page 5 / page 10 to page 12, etc.). Of course, not the actual file is permanently stored, but only its section addresses with the corresponding current length coding (incremental as a step number, or as a time value, etc.).

• - Seitenadresse (bzw. Abschnittsadresse):
  • Die Seitenadresse ist bei diesem Beispiel jeweils die Startadresse eines über diese Startadresse jeweils abrufbaren Abschnittes der wiedergegeben Datei, bzw. hier des zugehörigen Audiosignals und entspricht hier bei diesem Beispiel (nach 1,11) unmittelbar der Seitennummer des gedruckten Textes (eines Buches, oder Zeitung, etc.). Wobei diese Abschnitte mit ihren Startadressen (zu Beginn eines jeden Abschnittes) unmittelbar aneinandergereiht sind. Da zwischen den Abschnitten keine besondere Sprechpause vorgesehen ist, ist es sinnvoll bei durch einen Seitenwechsel unterbrochenem Satz, die Seitenadresse der (nächsten Seite) als Startadresse zu Beginn des Satzes, d.h. am Ende der vorherigen Seite, zu setzen.

It may be useful to provide an option for the file prepared with the section addresses, which, for example, allows for a short listening session (in seconds) of a section without the section in question being entered as a key value in the file name list. This parameter, associated with a section address of a file (see later for the [START + ADD] format), then corresponds to a delay in seconds over which a section must be played in order for it to be entered into the file name list (e.g., in a hash or an array) as a key file for access control during playback.

• - Page address (or section address):
  • The page address in this example is the start address of a section of the played file, or in this case the associated audio signal, that can be accessed via this start address and corresponds to 1 , 11 ) directly follows the page number of the printed text (a book, newspaper, etc.). These sections, with their starting addresses (at the beginning of each section), are immediately adjacent. Since there is no special pause between sections, it is advisable, when a sentence is interrupted by a page break, to place the page address of the (next page) as the starting address at the beginning of the sentence, i.e., at the end of the previous page.

It is evident that the division into sections, or in this case page addresses, can be carried out according to any specifications. For example, subdivisions into paragraphs (page number/paragraph, e.g. 4/2 corresponding to page 4 paragraph 2) can be made, or the division into sections can be carried out according to any specifications, which is why the address referred to here as the page address is generally also referred to as the section address.

Note: When accessing or playing the file, the section addresses (here page addresses) are incremented accordingly (INCRvol) to determine the volume of the access.

For this example, the division into equal sections is proportional to the number of pages in a book (or the reproduced audio signal of a read text), i.e., the accessed volume can be directly determined from the number of pages. However, this is undesirable for many applications. For each start address of a section, the corresponding classified volume, regardless of the actual volume of the section, is added as a calculation parameter and taken into account during playback or when summing the volume. It is advisable to provide a smallest counting unit, the integer multiple of which is specified for the start address of a section. The INCRvol command (see above) then multiplies the smallest counting unit by the specified multiple and adds it to the current volume. Before each access to a new section, the access volume is checked to ensure that it has not been exceeded during this access (in order to block access to new sections). The start addresses of the sections are then also consecutively numbered so that they can be saved under a file name in a non-volatile memory.

As a second parameter, which can also be optionally added to a start address, the maximum playback length of the relevant section can also be coded.

For example, in a music CD application, the start address of interesting tracks can be assigned this additional parameter to prevent the track from being played in its entirety. Conversely, a lesser-known piece of music can be allowed in its entirety (no specification) or at a longer length, etc. The same is also useful for newspapers, for example, where certain short articles should be prevented from being played in their entirety.

As a third parameter, which can optionally be added to a start address, a delay time Delay can be coded, after which only the reproduced section belonging to the respective start address is entered into the file name list for the key data.

Thus, for a section (here a page) the following characters placed at the beginning of the section, starting with the control character [START], are encoded in the following form:

Format:

• [START]; [Option=Z]; [ADD]; [Parameter 1]; [Parameter 2]; [Parameter 3];....Audio, Audio, Audio, etc.
• [Option]; ....to a specified number of parameters optional format: specifies the number of parameters following the address [ADD].
• [ADD]........Address, ifd. No., associated with the control character [START] to designate a section with this number. Associated with this address is the section length, which refers to this absolute address and indicates the end of the section. This section length can coincide with the next value of the subsequent address (seamless transitions) or end the section earlier.
• [START].....control character used uniformly for all sections marked as start address to mark the beginning of a section;
• ADD...........The consecutively numbered section address, e.g. corresponding to a corresponding page number of the text;
• [Parameter 1]...... Value of the volume percentage (relative to the total file volume; see the following explanation of percentage) of the portion of the section permitted for playback. If parameter 1 is not specified, the value added to the file name as a parameter in the file header is interpreted as the default value for parameter 1.
• [Parameter 2]......Length specification, e.g., in a unit appropriate for playback (number of characters for text, time unit in s for audio or video, etc.). Once this length is reached (e.g., also as a time specification in seconds), playback of this section is stopped and, for example, the user is informed how to obtain the entire file, etc. If parameter 2 is not specified to prematurely terminate a section, then it is interpreted as a length specification coinciding with the subsequent address of a section and there is no premature selective length limitation of the section; instead, the limitation is only based on the percentage specified as a parameter to the file name (see next point) of the total volume.
• [Parameter 3]......Time delay as explained above. If the listened-to section is to be immediately entered into the file name list for the key data, then a zero is defined as the parameter.

In addition to the device address, a default value (as a preset) of this parameter can also be defined at the head of the file, which is inserted into the parameters whenever only a character defined as a placeholder is used instead of a parameter value.

• neue Datei..... [BEGIN]; [DATEINAME beliebiger Länge]; [START]; [Parameter 1 default]; [Parameter 2 default]; [Parameter 3 default]; START + ADD]; [Parameter 1]; [Paramter2]; ....Audio, Audio, Audio, usw.

Example of a file header:

• new file..... [BEGIN]; [FILENAME of any length]; [START]; [Parameter 1 default]; [Parameter 2 default]; [Parameter 3 default]; START + ADD]; [Parameter 1]; [Parameter 2]; ....Audio, Audio, Audio, etc.

The bold italicized part corresponds to the file header. The [BEGIN] control character at the beginning of a file indicates the file name.

• Um die Steuerzeichen innerhalb eines in einem beliebigen Format gepackten, bzw. gespeicherten digitalen Audiosignals zu kodieren, kann beispielsweise ein Verfahren eines reduzierten Codes benutzt werden, bei dem z.B. der sich aus der verwendeten Bitzahl ergebende Maximalwert des Aussteuerungsbereiches um den Wert von 1 oder einige weiteren Schritte (je nach Bedarf) reduziert wird (d.h. bei der Aufbereitung des Digitalsignals als maximal mögliche Aussteuerung begrenzt wird).

Example of encoding the format in any digitized audio signal (also compressed, such as MP3):

• In order to encode the control characters within a digital audio signal packed or stored in any format, For example, a reduced code method can be used in which, for example, the maximum value of the control range resulting from the number of bits used is reduced by the value of 1 or a few further steps (as required) (ie is limited as the maximum possible control when processing the digital signal).

Whereby, if the key values of the analog signal correspond to a value range of e.g. +max.=01111...1110 to -max.=1000.....00001 of the two's complement representation and the actual maximum values positive=01111 ... 1111 or negative= max= 1000.....00000 are used (reserved) as a control signal, where e.g. the control character [START] which always precedes a code sequence is to be interpreted as an equivalent positive or negative number, depending on which half-wave range positive or negative the reproduced audio signal is currently in.

If a digitally processed audio signal is already present, it is scanned for the maximum occurring value and if the maximum values positive = 01111...1111 or negative = max = 1000.....00000 occur, the entire signal is multiplied by a corresponding correction factor less than 1 to ensure that these values no longer occur in the audio signal.

Thus the start character is defined as
[START] = (01111...1111) + (1000.....00000), where +... represents an OR symbol.

• Wird ein dem digitalen Startsignal [START] entsprechender digitaler Wert dekodiert, dann wird der Übernahmeimpuls für die Übernahme des dieser Kodierung betreffenden Amplitudenwertes unterdrückt und der Wert als Startsignal [START] interpretiert.

Decoding a start signal [START]:

• If a digital value corresponding to the digital start signal [START] is decoded, the transfer pulse for the transfer of the amplitude value corresponding to this coding is suppressed and the value is interpreted as the start signal [START].

For the register in which the respective (suppressed) amplitude value corresponding to the time frame would be written (stored), a value is set instead of the amplitude value (not present in the file). This value is derived from the previous amplitude value and the amplitude value stored after the control character as an interpolation value corresponding to the previous signal increase, even across multiple values, taking the curvature into account. This interpolation is further filtered by the reconstruction filter used during playback. The exact process will be explained later. 2 , 12 and 3 , 13 explained.

The following further definition is used:

After the recognition (decoding) of a [START] character, a certain number of parameters or addresses should be transferred (coded) according to the counting sequence (counted parameters), whereby as an option, in addition to a fixed number of such characters, e.g. the first parameter [Option=Z] before the address [ADD] can also encode or define the number of subsequent characters.

• Auf diese Weise lassen sich Parameter und Adressen an beliebiger Stelle eines mit einem linearen Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Audiosignals (CD Format, oder auch MP3, etc.) unterbringen, ohne daß man sich um das Format, in dem das Audiosignal bei der A/D-Umsetzung kodiert, bzw. bei der D/A Umsetzung wieder dekodiert wird, kümmern muß. Was große Vorteile hat, da jedes nach ISO Standart genormte Format benutzt werden kann und es ausreichend ist, unmittelbar nach der A/D Wandlung die Parameter und Adressen anstelle der dem Analogsignal entsprechenden Werte einzufügen, dito bei der Dekodierung vor der D/A Wandlung wieder abzutrennen. Es ist evident, daß sich das Verfahren für jede Art analoger Signale eignet, daher im Prinizip auch für Videosignale.
• Dabei ist es im Prinzip ausreichend, mit einem dem [START] Zeichen nachfolgenden Kontrollzeichen einen Sprunglabel zu kodieren (z.B. wenn das Datenformat als MP3 in einem RAM abgespeichert ist, und das Audiosignal sowie die Daten in getrennten Sektionen gespeichert sind) und unter diesem Sprunglabel den String mit den Steuerzeichen (Kontrollzeichen) zu speichern, oder es kann auch innerhalb des Audiosignals der komplette String von Steuerzeichen oder Kontrollzeichen untergebracht werden (z.B. wenn als Datenträger eine CD oder DVD verwendet wird, usw.).
• Um beispielsweise in einer Audiodatei die Marken mit den [START] Zeichen zu setzen, ist es ausreichend, eine Audiodatei mit einer entsprechenden Software, die um diese Funktion erweitert ist, abzuhören und an den entsprechenden Stellen z.B. über eine Tasteneingabe eine Marke zu setzen (die automatisch inkrementiert wird, z.B. Seitenzahlen erhöht) und weiters über eine Menüeingabe eine lineare oder individuelle Volumenseinheit, wie sie der Bewertung in Bezug auf die gesamte Datei zur Zugangsbegrenzung entsprechen soll, zugeordnet werden soll, weiters auch noch eine Längenbegrenzung, die gleichfalls empirisch durch Setzen betreffender Marken an den Stellen der Audiodatei vorgenommen werden kann, bzw. gegebenenfalls auch noch den gleichfalls bereits erläuterten Delay Parameter. Da die Steuerzeichen, Parameter und Adressen direkt anstelle eines Wertes des Audiosignals in das Audiosignal hineingeschrieben werden, kann eine fertige Bearbeitungssoftware zu diesem Zweck mit minimalem Aufwand modifiziert werden, um die Audiodateien mit den betreffenden Adressen zu konfigurieren. Weiters können auch nur Platzhalter vergeben werden, um abhängig vom einem laufenden Programm die Parameter und Adressen durch Zuweisungen aus Variablen zu setzen.

In the preferred coding (or preferred format), a mandatory sequence also specifies that for each parameter value P (or address, etc.) associated with the string of the [START] character, which is not to be interpreted as an amplitude value an* of the digitally coded analog signal, an analog value (IPL) corresponding to the signal rise and determined by interpolation is set at the respective time grid position (or stored for playback). An example of this will be given later. 2 , 12 and 3 , 13 explained in more detail.

• In this way, parameters and addresses can be placed anywhere in an audio signal reproduced with a linear time raster (CD format, or MP3, etc.), without having to worry about the format in which the audio signal is encoded during A/D conversion or decoded again during D/A conversion. This has significant advantages, as any ISO-standardized format can be used, and it is sufficient to insert the parameters and addresses immediately after A/D conversion in place of the values corresponding to the analog signal, and then remove them again during decoding before D/A conversion. It is evident that the method is suitable for any type of analog signal, and therefore, in principle, also for video signals.
• In principle, it is sufficient to encode a jump label with a control character following the [START] character (e.g. if the data format is stored as MP3 in a RAM, and the audio signal and the data are stored in separate sections) and to store the string with the control characters (control characters) under this jump label, or the complete string of control characters or control characters can also be accommodated within the audio signal (e.g. if a CD or DVD is used as the data carrier, etc.).
• For example, to set the markers with the [START] characters in an audio file, it is sufficient to listen to an audio file with appropriate software that has been expanded to include this function and to set a marker at the appropriate point, e.g. via a keystroke (which is automatically incremented, e.g. page numbers are increased). Furthermore, via a menu entry, a linear or individual volume unit is to be assigned, which should correspond to the rating in relation to the entire file for access restriction. Furthermore, a length limit, which can also be set empirically by setting appropriate markers at the appropriate points in the audio file, or if necessary also the delay parameter already explained. Since the control characters, parameters and addresses are written directly into the audio signal instead of a value of the audio signal, ready-made editing software can be modified for this purpose with minimal effort in order to configure the audio files with the relevant addresses. Furthermore, only placeholders can be assigned in order to set the parameters and addresses by assignments from variables, depending on the program that is running.

• an540; [START]; an541; [Option=*Z]; an542; [*0]; an543;[*1]; an544; an545; an546....

For playback, it is sufficient if the start character [START] is decoded as the first character of a control character string to start a multiplexer process according to a forced sequence, in which the next but one and all subsequent values arriving at an odd-numbered position (relative to the decoding of [START]) of the time grid are interpreted as belonging to the control character [*], and all values arriving in between at an even-numbered position of the time grid are interpreted as belonging to the analog signal [an*], as the following scheme illustrates:

• an540; [START]; an541; [Option=*Z]; an542; [*0]; an543;[*1]; an544; an545; an546....

The [START] character decoded as an amplitude value (01111...1111) or (1000.....00000) during processing (A/D conversion) of the analog signal switches to the interpretation as a parameter to be interpreted for the time clock after the next but one (with which the values of the digitized analog signal are transported), i.e. after the amplitude value an541, and the value of [*Z] is read, in which the value Z=1 is located, which means that two more parameters ([*0] and [*1] follow), whereby the values in between are each interpreted as amplitude values an542 and an543 (switched with a toggle function corresponding to a clocked flip-flop, whose clock activation or reset or output value is set by the decoded [START] character, and clock deactivation is determined by the Z parameter or the number of coded parameters). It is evident that the number of defined parameters can also be much larger (e.g. Z=10, etc.)

The interpretation for the assignment of the values obtained via the parameter list [* ;] to the assigned variables or addresses is carried out by a list that is passed from the file to the playback device independently of the audio signal of the file (at the beginning) after the file name and the device address and can also be modified within the file by using further code sequences each introduced with [START], etc.

The control character [START], which can be directly coded in any digital audio signal, can be compared with the control character ESCAPE commonly used in data technology in order to code any code sequence for any purpose.

After the last parameter character P (in this example P=[*1]) has been recognized (and counted accordingly) by definition using [*Z], all subsequent characters are again interpreted as amplitude values an544; an545; an546....; etc.

• - Prozentangabe:
  • Die Prozentangabe ist in der geladenen (wiederzugebenden) Datei als Parameter angegeben (z.B. nach dem Dateinamen) und betrifft die Angabe des zulässigen Anteils (z.B. in Prozent der gesamt vorhandenen Seitenzahl, etc.), der in freier Auswahl des Benutzers dem Benutzer zugänglich gemacht werden soll.
• - Prüfung der Prozentangabe: Bei jeder Wiedergabe eines neuen Abschnittes einer Datei wird als erster Schritt unter der Adresse des Dateinamens im nicht flüchtigen Speicher (falls noch nicht angelegt, wird diese Adresse in die betreffende Liste der Datei nach Ablauf der im Delay Parameter definierten Zeit aufgenommen) geprüft, ob die Abschnittsadresse ADD des aktuell wiederzugebenden Abschnittes (hier Seite) unter der Adresse des betreffenden Dateinamens bereits abgelegt ist ?:
  • Wenn ja, dann wird der Befehl INCRvol zur Incrementierung des Zählers zur ständigen Feststellung des zugegriffenen Volumens, bzw. (bei ungleichen Abschnitten) zum laufenden Addieren des Volumens beim Zugriff auf den Abschnitt dieser (bereits gespeicherten Abschnittsadresse, bzw. Seitenadresse) nicht ausgeführt und der betreffende Abschnitt (z.B. einer bestimmten Seitenadresse) wiedergegeben (z.B. als Audio Datei eines gesprochenen Textes einer betreffenden Buchseite). D.h. genauer, der Befehl INCRvol wird solange nicht ausgeführt als der bereits wiedergegebene Teil eines Abschnittes bei der Wiedergabe nocht nicht erreicht ist.

Non-volatile memory: A FLASH semiconductor memory can be used as a non-volatile read-write memory, for example, or an electromechanical memory (hard disk), from which a volatile memory RAM is usually loaded when the device is switched on.

• - Percentage:
  • The percentage is specified as a parameter in the loaded (to be played) file (e.g. after the file name) and concerns the specification of the permissible proportion (e.g. in percent of the total number of pages available, etc.) that is to be made accessible to the user in a freely selectable manner.
• - Checking the percentage: Each time a new section of a file is played, the first step is to check whether the section address ADD of the section currently being played (here page) is already stored at the address of the file name in the non-volatile memory (if not already created, this address will be added to the relevant list of the file after the time defined in the delay parameter has elapsed):
  • If yes, then the INCRvol command is used to increment the counter to constantly determine the accessed volume, or (in the case of unequal sections) for continuously adding the volume when accessing the section of this (already stored section address or page address) is not executed, and the relevant section (e.g., a specific page address) is played back (e.g., as an audio file of a spoken text from a specific book page). In other words, the INCRvol command is not executed until the already played part of a section has been reached during playback.

If not, the INCRvol command is executed on the section of this (already saved section address or page address), i.e., the counter is incremented, or (if the volume fractions of the sections are unequal), the volume specified at the start address of the section is added while the volume is being added. The result is then compared with the percentage (as a data value) to determine whether the currently summed volume exceeds the specified percentage from the file. If so, the list containing the previously executed sections under the file name (as an identifier or address) in non-volatile memory is locked, and the start address of the section is no longer included in this list. If, however, the currently summed volume has not yet been exceeded, the start address is included in the list of the file name, and the relevant section is played back.

The status no also corresponds to this query if a section that has already been marked as played (by the preferred storage) is exceeded during playback, ie the exceeded part of the section is continuously checked for the specified maximum permissible volume and is permanently saved when the section is finished (see the following detailed explanation of 4 , 14 ).

This means that specific locations on the storage medium itself do not have to be directly assigned to which the user can or cannot access, as has been the case up to now. Instead, the selection of sections to be divided into arbitrary sections is left to the user. For example, after reading a section, they can listen to the next section or a newly selected section, etc. Only the total number of sections is monitored for access restriction. However, additional individual section restrictions can also be used (e.g., via the length parameter).

Preference list option: Another option is to define a parameter at the top of the file to be played as a preference list. This parameter contains a series of preferred start addresses (ADD) that the file creator considers to be of particular interest. By pressing a special key, these start addresses of preferred sections (e.g., pages) are displayed to the user in sequence (e.g., as page numbers) (with a forward/backward function), with a higher-level switching option for personal selection by the user. It is advisable to include a text file in the source file, which contains an overview of the individual chapters (corresponding to the start addresses to be jumped to), etc. By using the device in conjunction with a PC connected to the Internet, this selection can be further improved through appropriate menu navigation.

1 , 11 concerns the example in which the sections of an audio signal, each indicated by start addresses and otherwise arranged one after the other without additional pauses, are divided according to the pages of a (read aloud) book (or radio play, etc.). Thus, the summation of the current volume can be achieved without taking any further volume information into account using a simple counter Z in the program of the relevant processor, which is incremented each time the above-mentioned (and thus named) INCRvol command is executed. The counter counts in a counting unit defined by a parameter (e.g., one unit every 20 seconds of playback time, etc.). In the non-volatile memory, the total counter reading for each file is also stored in the list of sections already played (here page numbers) at a specific position (e.g., position 0), so that it can be loaded into the RAM of the processor (e.g., DSP) when the playback device is switched on.

In a further development of the process, it is also possible to dynamically control the extent of the limited data volume (i.e., the specified percentage) to which the user has access. This is done in such a way that, for example, upon purchase and payment of a book, the customer (or user) shall have free access to the entire spoken text of the book. This is achieved by appropriately marking the file corresponding to the book (via the percentage indication) when the customer downloads the file in question as an upgrade via the Internet (which can also be done in a bookstore, etc.). In addition to the option of attaching a password to a book, which is used once for a device address, as a scratch-off info or in a sealed envelope, The activation can also be carried out by the bookstore (via the Internet) to the device address of the playback device.

This allows the user to have the book "read to" them via audio playback, then continue reading the book themselves, and then have the continuation read to them again, alternating as often as they wish. To better protect copyright, this extended function, which allows the user to access the full contents of the file, should only be available to the person authorized as a user upon purchase of the book, and the use of technical means should make it less attractive to share the playback device. This corresponds to the additional task specified below.

Additional technical tasks.

The additional technical challenge concerns the connection of the device (which is identified by the permanently stored device address) to the user. Two variants are proposed here.

For both variants, for example, using a computer connected to the Internet, an initialization procedure is carried out using the method described in the pre-registration. DE 10 2004 046 413.8 specified procedure.

In the pre-registration DE 10 2004 046 413.8 A procedure was specified with which the location of a computer, e.g. an Internet connection, can be linked to any telephone connection that is independent of the computer's Internet connection in a tamper-proof manner, while excluding the possibility of manipulating the detection procedure for this connection if, for example, another telephone connection were used for this purpose.

In this procedure, the method specified here is used for optional further training. DE 10 2004 046 413.8 used in such a way that when a file is downloaded over the Internet, the playback of the downloaded files is only possible, or these files can only be used in the device, if the device address stored in the device corresponds to an identifier that the server downloading the file checks and also checks whether the device or the device address belongs to the user whose password is used when logging into the relevant web page (to download the file) for the telephone connection to which the web page is linked using the procedure with 10 2004 046 413.8.

Practical example with reference to Fig. 1, Fig. 11 with extension option according to DE 10 2004 046 413.8 for initialization:

The playback device is an MP3 player equipped with a special chip (e.g., DSP) for implementing the process. It also features audio playback and a standard file storage function, along with a keypad with additional keys in addition to the standard keys for jumping to the points encoded in the audio signal. For example, every page of a spoken text from a book can be continuously encoded, including the marking of paragraphs. It is advisable to provide an interface between the device and a computer (PC, notebook) so that the device's starting position can be found even on a computer with its far better menu structuring capabilities. Otherwise, it is advisable to design text input (if desired) to be compatible with SMS input on a mobile phone.

Furthermore, the device contains a display on which the names of the files contained in the MP3 file (in this case book titles) can be shown directly, as well as the page numbers to identify sections into which an audio file is divided and which relate, for example, to the reading text of a book, a drama, or a radio play, etc.

For the MP3 player configuration, the system is structured so that loading the data storage is only possible with the involvement of the web server from which the tracks are downloaded. The initial loading requires a one-time initialization of the playback device, during which the encrypted device address is permanently written into the device and stored non-volatilely (e.g., in a flash memory, etc.). For the CD or DVD player configuration, the file must also be obtained from a web server, in which case the user must then burn the CD or DVD themselves.

In both cases, the device address can be assigned, for example, via a web page linked to the telephone number of a telephone or mobile phone. During subsequent downloads (via a computer connected to the internal network), it is always checked whether the user of the web page, via which files are (supposed to be) loaded into the device, has access to the corresponding telephone number during the download process. This procedure is an option that is not available, for example, in bookstores. where the customer can present their playback device so that when they buy a book the corresponding file is either loaded directly onto the device (e.g. as an MP3) or a CD is burned with a file downloaded from the Internet, which is then processed accordingly before burning using a suitable computer, into which the device address of the playback device is read directly via the device connection, so that the correct device address is included in the file. Or if necessary, a new (additionally valid) device address can be assigned, which the user can then later adapt to their device using the Internet and their website access linked to them via a personal telephone number using the server, etc.

Is the option of additional use of the procedure after the DE 10 2004 046 413.8 If use is made of this option, then each time the user loads a file over the Internet, the server checks whether the device address stored in the playback device in a non-volatile manner corresponds to the telephone number that was assigned by the server to the user of the device when the device was first initialised or, where appropriate, when a correction was made (in order to link the initialisation to a changed telephone number) via a file loaded into the recording device in connection with this initialisation process by saving it in the non-volatile memory.

• Vorgangsweise, um die Anbindung der Telefonnummer an den Client- Rechner, über den eine Datei zur Verwendung an dem das erfindungsgemäße Verfahren betreffende Wiedergabegerät heruntergeladen werden soll, zu überprüfen:
  • a) Der Benutzer ruft von seinem Telefon (oder Handy, etc.) eine automatisierte Servicenummer, welche den Server der betreffenden WEB-Seite (oder einen weiteren Verbindungsserver, etc.) betrifft an, wobei gegebenenfalls eine geringe Gebühr zusätzlich noch abgebucht wird, um die Kosten des nachfolgenden Rückrufes (voice over IP) des Servers zu decken. Wobei bei diesem Anruf des Benutzers der Benutzer das Mikrofon seines Telefons an den Lautsprecher seines über das Internet mit dem betreffenden Server verbundenen (Client) Rechners hält, um (z.B. nach Drücken eines Buttons der betreffenden WEB-Seite) das aus dem Lautsprecher seines Rechners wiedergegebene, vom Server ausgesendete Kennsignal über die Telefonverbindung an den Server zurück zu senden. Dieses Kennsignal betrifft einerseits eine verschlüsselte Adresse und bestätigt dem Server, welcher aktuellen Sitzung er die den Telefonanruf entsprechenden Gebühren (als Kostenersatz für den Rückruf) zuordnen soll, andererseits enthält dieses Kennsignal, die aus Sicherheitsgründen dem Server zweifach übermittelte Geräeteadresse, einmal über die Internetverbindung und einmal über die akustische Kopplung (über Lautsprecher des Client- Rechners und Mikrofon des Telefons).
    • Die aktuelle Sitzung kann dabei als Absender des Benutzers auch nur eine einmalig für die Sitzung verwendete, vom Server des Providers vergebene IP- Adresse betreffen.
  • b) Über die erhaltene Geräteadresse identifiziert der Server die Telefonnummer, die er zurückrufen soll. Die Telefonnummer, die den Server angerufen hatte, kann dabei auch eine andere, beliebige sein (Festnetz, etc.), da die über diesen Telefonanruf gut geschriebenen Gebühren, zunächst jener Sitzung (WEB-Seite) gut geschrieben werden, über welche der Server durch die akustische Kopplung die Geräteadresse erhalten hat. Über diese aktuelle Sitzung (WEB-Seite) prüft der Server, ob das bei seinem initialisierten Rückruf (nach einer Sprachansage und nach Auslösung durch einen Start Button der WEB-Seite) an die WEB-Seite (über den Lautsprecher des Client-Rechners und Mikrofon des Telefons) gesendete und über die Telefonverbindung zurück erhaltene Kennsignal (verschlüsseltes Signal mit jeweils einmaliger Verwendung) auch übereinstimmt (betreffend der zuvor beim erhaltenen Anruf festgestellten aktuellen Sitzung mit der zugehörigen Geräteadresse).

In further development, the procedure is as follows: If the user wants to download a file from the Internet for use (regardless of whether directly, e.g. as an MP3 file, or via a subsequently created data carrier, such as a CD, etc.), then they connect their playback device via a corresponding port on the computer (USB, etc.) via which they have access to their hard disk (this can also be the connection of a network card, etc.), whereby the device address of the playback device is first copied to the hard disk via this connection, or if access to the disk via the Internet is to be blocked, it is saved in the area for cookies, or can also be copied to the copy storage (clipboard), from where the user can copy it into a corresponding window of the relevant WEB page by simply using the copy function. If the device address is visible to everyone, this usually does not play a special role, since firstly the playback device can only be configured via an encrypted file with the device address, and secondly a file can only be played on the device if it contains the correct device address, and furthermore the device address with a currently loaded file can still be encrypted in any way (so that if the device address remains the same, the visibly displayed address changes from file to file, etc.).

• Procedure for checking the connection of the telephone number to the client computer via which a file is to be downloaded for use on the playback device relating to the method according to the invention:
  • a) The user calls an automated service number from their telephone (or cell phone, etc.) that refers to the server of the respective website (or another connecting server, etc.). A small fee may be charged additionally to cover the costs of the subsequent callback (voice over IP) from the server. During this call, the user holds their telephone microphone to the speaker of their (client) computer connected to the respective server via the Internet in order to send the identification signal emitted by the server, played through their computer's speaker (e.g., after pressing a button on the respective website), back to the server via the telephone connection. This identification signal contains an encrypted address and confirms to the server which current session the server should allocate the corresponding charges for the telephone call (as reimbursement for the callback). This identification signal also contains the device address, which is transmitted to the server twice for security reasons: once via the Internet connection and once via the acoustic connection (via the client computer's speaker and the telephone's microphone).
    • The current session can also refer to an IP address assigned by the provider's server, which is used once for the session, as the user's sender.
  • b) Using the received device address, the server identifies the telephone number it should call back. The telephone number that called the server can also be any other telephone number (landline, etc.), since the charges credited via this telephone call are initially credited to the session (web page) through which the server received the device address via the acoustic coupling. Using this current session (web page), the server checks whether the call sent to the web page (via the client computer's loudspeaker and the telephone's microphone) during its initial callback (after a voice announcement and after being triggered by a start button on the web page) and transmitted via the telephone connection also matches the identification signal (encrypted signal with a single use each time) (concerning the current session previously identified during the received call with the associated device address).

If the proximity of the telephone line (or mobile device) to the computer in use is detected via the acoustic connection established with the user of the client computer, the telephone number called, or the data transmitted to the client computer (sent and received by the server), then the user is considered authorized. Of course, depending on the application, a password and an additional access number may also be used.

If necessary, the DE 10 2004 046 413.8 The already proposed verification of the telephone connection by monitoring the available bandwidth by servers has been used to prevent the possibility of manipulation using an additional telephone line. DE 10 2004 046 413.8 As already stated, the signal is tuned according to a running time grid using a filter implemented in the software in the server in order to obtain a bandwidth limit that corresponds to the time grid. For the signal transmitted back to the server via the acoustic coupling (loudspeaker of the client computer / telephone microphone of the telephone or cell phone, or microphone of the client computer / loudspeaker of the telephone or cell phone), a further filter is then implemented in the software in the server, which is also tuned according to this time function (or this time grid). This filter reverses the process when the audio signal transmitted as a file is sent out so that, taking into account the permitted bandwidth of the telephone channel used, the original signal is obtained again in terms of frequency dependence. An alternative to this method is to examine the received signal with an FFT (Fast Fourier Transformation) to determine whether it has a frequency influence.

It is also possible to provide the Internet connection directly in the playback device.

Explanation of the figures:

1 , 11 already explained.

2 , 12 relates to a pulse scheme for implementing the already explained preferred coding of the control characters (X) nested in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters P, addresses, etc., which are not associated with the analog signal an*, wherein a linear output time pattern (corresponding to output clock AST) is used and the resulting time offset is compensated by a phase jump of the input clock EST at the time positions X at which the control characters are positioned. 6c , 16c This phase jump (phi) of EST is illustrated: During the phase initiated by the START character of a certain number of control characters, which is determined by the value of the character Z = value following the START character, the output Q=log.1 of a flip-flop FF2 ( 6b , 16b) , whereby the extension of the time for the generation of the (here) positive clock edge EST is effected to such an extent that EST no longer occurs in the current time frame X, but at the beginning of the following time frame of a value an* of the analog signal, whereby the actual clock edge EST of the analog signal value an*, which is still present in the time frame, is retained and after this first clock edge, generated by the phase jump phi of the clock, occurs as the second clock edge EST within the time frame of an*. This means that

Number of read-in clock cycles EST generated by the single-stage FIFO register ( 3 , 13 ) does not change and therefore corresponds to the number of FIFO readout cycles generated according to a linear (i.e., regular) time pattern. Since in this variant each control character (X) is followed by an analog signal value an*, a single-stage FIFO delay is sufficient (although with a different sequence, the FIFO can then be adapted accordingly, configured with multiple stages, etc.).

The clock pulse omitted in the time interval X of a control character is therefore made up for in the following time interval of the following analog value an*. 2 , 12 As can be seen, the readout clock AST of the FIFO is leading the source clock of the readout clock EST (see also preEST, EST in 3b , 13b) , i.e. first read from the FIFO (with linear time frame) and then subsequently written, after a time interval X of a control character (in which no value is written into the FIFO), in the following time interval (from an*) first the calculated interpolation value an-1(IPL) is written and also read out by the output clock AST (as belonging to the time frame of the previous value) and then the analog value an(ES) occurring in this time frame is written into the FIFO, which, however, is only read out again in the next time frame (e.g. X) by the output clock AST; whereby this time frame (instead of X) can also refer to a value at* a series of values of the audio signal continuing after a control string inserted into the audio values, etc.

• SPW....die Reihe der Symbole, wie sie dem Datenträger, bzw. der Datenquelle entsprechenden Werte (über die Zeitachse t aufgetragen) entsprechen, wobei an11....an25 der Amplitude entsprechende Amplitudenwerte sind, START das dekodierte Startzeichen (01111...1111 oder 1000.....00000) betrifft, Z, dem Wert für die Zählerangabe zum Abzählen der nachfolgenden Kontrollzeichen, bestehend aus Parametern und Adressen P betrifft. Wobei hier nur drei dieser Kontrollzeichen P eingezeichnet sind, jedoch auch beliebig mehr verwendet sein können.

In the 2 , 12 The diagram drawn along the time axis means:

• SPW....the series of symbols corresponding to the values of the data carrier or data source (plotted over the time axis t), where an11....an25 are the amplitude values corresponding to the amplitude, START refers to the decoded start character (01111...1111 or 1000.....00000), Z refers to the value for the counter specification for counting the subsequent control characters, consisting of parameters and addresses P. Only three of these control characters P are shown here, but any number of them can be used.

IPW .... correspond to the amplitude values obtained by interpolation, as they are available at the time positions at which the control characters are coded, for the ASL output (cf. 3 , 13 ) be used.

ES......refers to the values corresponding to the data source, where X indicates the decoded control characters. The control characters are not written to the FIFO ( 3 , 13 ), which is intended exclusively for the temporally correct (with a linear time grid) playback of the audio signal. Instead, it is stored in a separate latch or memory area (DEC) and decoded ditto (see Latch outputs as the current memory address for control characters, and START output for the decoded start signal of the character string).

The 3 / 3b ; 13 / 13b The clock signal preEST, which is shown in advance of the clock signal EST to be generated, corresponds to a linear time grid (with regular time intervals) and saves the control characters (or the start character START to be decoded) in good time.

With START a flip flop (see to 6c , 16c and 6a , 16a) which is clocked with the clock of the characters on the data carrier and whose output indicates whether the code read from the data carrier is a directly coded analog value or a control character. Since in this example in 2 , 12 Z=3, after the third control character P, the flip-flop is set again so that its output corresponds to the constant interpretation of the characters as analog values (an24, an25, etc.). A detailed implementation example is given for 6a , 16a until 6c , 16c explained in more detail.

ASL....concerns in 2 , 12 the values output to the D/A converter or to the reconstruction of the digitized analog signal with a linear time raster (AST), where AST is the readout clock (the positive clock edge) of the 3 , 13 shown FIFO memory register (which is realized, for example, within a DSP by a RAM register).

The read-in clock EST (also a positive clock edge) is initially generated as a source clock preEST from the common conditioning clock for the read-out clock AST. An EST clock that lags preEST sufficiently by the setup time (and delay time) corresponds to the read-in clock of the FIFO. However, with the difference to preEST that preEST, like AST, has a regular linear time grid, whereas the read-in clock EST has a corresponding phase jump phi, depending on whether a control character or check character is currently being encoded. Furthermore, preEST (ditto EST) is offset from the read-out clock AST in such a way that the character (data) previously read into the FIFO with EST is read out with the subsequent read-out clock AST if the character sequence has a continuous series of analog values an*...

• Fall 1: Es wurde seit Beendigung einer gelesenen Kontrollzeichenkette (String von X Zeichen mit jeweils dazwischen eingeschobenen Werten an* ....) kein START Zeichen und somit keine Kontrollzeichenkette dekodiert, d.h. das genannte toggle Flip-Flop zur Umschaltung zwischen Kontrollzeichen und Analog Datenwert weist einen statisch ruhenden Ausgang auf. Das entspricht QF1=0 und Q=0 der Flip-Flop Schaltung in 6b, 16b.

For the control of the reading clock EST, two cases are distinguished:

• Case 1: Since the completion of a read control string (string of X characters with values inserted between * ....), no START character and therefore no control string has been decoded, i.e., the toggle flip-flop used to switch between control characters and analog data values has a statically idle output. This corresponds to QF1=0 and Q=0 of the flip-flop circuit in 6b , 16b .

Case 2: A START character was decoded, ie the mentioned toggle flip-flop (FF2, 6b , 16b) for switching between control character and analog data value is activated and switches the output Q alternately back and forth with a clock corresponding to the character clock.

The output Q (FF2) of this flip-flop is used to prepare the read-in clock EST, which, like the read-out clock AST, is derived from a clock with a higher clock frequency (e.g. generated with a synchronously clocked state machine logic, which also contains the toggle flip-flop mentioned, or possibly also generated in the DSP, etc.), for each detected control character for the Reading clock EST from 2 , 12 to generate a phase jump to be taken; (where START is recognized directly via the code of the file, or the following characters Z, P, P, P, are each recognized by the output Q=1 of the flip-flop, which switches alternately to a defined state for each character after an amplitude value (an* value).

• Somit ergibt sich für die jeweils unmittelbar aufeinanderfolgenden Amplitudenwerte (an* Werte an11...an13 und an24,an25....), bei denen keine Kontrollzeichen eingefügt sind, und somit keine Phasensprünge des Einlesetaktes initialisiert sind, jeweils eine Taktflanke des Einlesetaktes EST in jedem Zeitraster, mit der der in diesem Zeitraster betreffende aktuelle Amplitudenwert an in das FIFO Register eingeschrieben wird und (hier unmittelbar zuvor) der im vorherigen Zeitraster jeweils eingeschriebene Amplitudenwert an-1 ausgelesen wird, Einlesetaktflanke EST und Auslesetaktflanke AST entsprechend versetzt sind.

This phase jump phi is achieved, for example, by changing the charging values (see LDZ and LDZphi of switch UMS, 6c , 16c ), the counter used for processing the read-in clock EST (from a higher clock frequency) is used, in such a way that it is not the frequency, ie the number of clock pulses across the entire time frame, that changes, but only the phase phi, which is corrected again for the following clock edge, which after a control character corresponds to an amplitude value (an* value) of the signal to be reproduced.

• This results in a clock edge of the read-in clock EST in each time frame for the immediately successive amplitude values (an* values an11...an13 and an24,an25....), for which no control characters are inserted and thus no phase jumps of the read-in clock are initialized, with which the current amplitude value an relevant to this time frame is written into the FIFO register and (here immediately before) the amplitude value an-1 written in the previous time frame is read out, read-in clock edge EST and read-out clock edge AST are offset accordingly.

• Sind jedoch zwischen (/) den Amplitudenwerten (hier an15/an17;an17/an19; an21/an23) Kontrollzeichen (START; Z; P; P; P) eingefügt und nach der beschriebenen Methode (Erkennung von START und über toggle Flip Flop) jeweils erkannt, dann wird zu jedem erkannten Kontrollzeichen (Q=1) ein Phasensprungsteuerung der Taktflanke des Einlesetaktes EST für das betreffende Zeitraster initialisiert. Wodurch sich die Taktflanke von EST so verschiebt, daß für den FIFO- Speicher, der ausschließlich die Wiedergabe des Audiosignals, bzw. des Analogsignals betrifft (und nicht das grundsätzliche Einlesen der von einem Datenträger oder einer Datenquelle gelieferten Daten wo die Dekodierung der Kontrollzeichen statt findet), innerhalb des jeweils ein Kontrollzeichen betreffenden Zeitrasters X keine (positive) Taktflanke des Einschreibtaktes EST auftritt und durch zeitliche Verlängerung der log.0 erst innerhalb des dem betreffenden Kontrollzeichen nachfolgenden Zeitrasters für den betreffenden Amplitudenwert (vgl. an17, an19, an21, an23) auftritt. Bewirkt wird dies durch über den Status des Flip Flop Ausganges ausgelöstem Phasensprung von EST, wodurch durch zwei (positive) Taktflanken des Einschreibtaktes EST innerhalb dieses Zeitrasters auftreten. Dabei übernimmt die erste Taktflanke nicht den innerhalb des betreffenden Zeitrasters vom Datenträger, bzw. von der Datenquelle gelesenen Wert, sondern den rückwirkend das vorangegangene Kontrollzeichen betreffenden, nicht direkt übernommenen, sondern errechneten Interpolationswert (vgl. Wertereihe IPW). Dieser Wert wird gebildet aus dem, dem Kontrollzeichen (z.B. START) vorangegangenen Wert (z.B. an-2(ASL)= an13) und dem nachfolgenden, dem aktuellen Zeitraster (z.B. an(ES) =an15) entsprechenden Wert (wobei hier der Wert an14 als Interpolationswert IPL erhalten wird, 2, 12, 3, 13).

Example ( 2 , 12 , 3 , 13 ): an11 is read in the time interval SPW=an11 (EST) and read out again in the time interval SPW=an12 (with AST), where in SPW=an12 the value of an12 is read in (with EST), etc.

• However, if control characters (START; Z; P; P; P) are inserted between (/) the amplitude values (here an15/an17;an17/an19; an21/an23) and are each recognized according to the described method (detection of START and via toggle flip flop), then for each recognized control character (Q=1) a phase jump control of the clock edge of the read-in clock EST is initialized for the relevant time grid. This shifts the clock edge of EST in such a way that for the FIFO memory, which exclusively concerns the playback of the audio signal or the analog signal (and not the basic reading of the data supplied from a data carrier or a data source where the decoding of the control characters takes place), no (positive) clock edge of the write clock EST occurs within the time grid X corresponding to a control character, and by extending the time of the log.0 only occurs within the time grid following the relevant control character for the relevant amplitude value (cf. an17, an19, an21, an23). This is caused by a phase jump of EST triggered by the status of the flip-flop output, whereby two (positive) clock edges of the write clock EST occur within this time grid. The first clock edge does not take the value read from the data carrier or data source within the respective time frame, but rather the interpolation value retroactively corresponding to the preceding control character, which is not directly taken over but calculated (see value series IPW). This value is formed from the value preceding the control character (e.g. START) (e.g. an-2(ASL) = an13) and the subsequent value corresponding to the current time frame (e.g. an(ES) = an15) (where the value an14 is retained as the interpolation value IPL). 2 , 12 , 3 , 13 ).

Example ( 2 , 12 , 3 , 13 ): an13 is read in the time interval SPW=an13 (EST) and read out again in the time interval SPW=START (with AST), whereby in SPW=START (due to the clock edge of EST being shifted to SPW=an15) no analog value is read into the FIFO. Instead, at the beginning of SPW=an15, which is still at the output of the FIFO, or in the symbolic representation after 3 , 13 The value an-2(ASL) = an13 present at the SPA register together with the current value an(ES) = an15 is used to calculate the interpolation value an14, which is written into the FIFO register at the beginning of SPW=an15 with the first write clock pulse EST (as value an-1(IPL), see MUX in 3 , 13 ) and is read out again with the read-out clock AST, ditto subsequently with the second write-in clock EST the current value an15 (as value an(ES), cf. MUX in 3 , 13 ) is rewritten into the FIFO (after reading an14).

At the character an* following a control character (or the corresponding time grid), the toggle flip-flop switches back to Q=1, so that no more phase jump occurs for EST.

The 3 , 13 The multiplexer MUX shown further at the input of the FIFO memory is controlled accordingly via the control character recognition (recognition of START and via toggle flip flop) and within the relevant time frame in order to write the current amplitude value read from the data carrier to (ES) or to write an interpolation value to-1 (IPL) as required.

In case the interpolation value an-1(IPL) is written instead of the current amplitude value an(ES), it will be output again immediately within the same time frame.

Realization: The model of a circuit according to 3 and 6b , 16b is very useful for the explanation, but in implementation it is much more advantageous to use a standard DSP (signal processor) and/or a digital programmable logic circuit (as ASIC) which is configured as a synchronous state machine sequencer and, for example, receives the decoded message signal of the decoded START character from the DSP, and if necessary can also be implemented directly by the DSP using an internal timer for clock processing. Conversely, the state machine sequencer supplies the DSP with the two interrupt signals est and ast, where ast is an interrupt that leads the output clock AST of the output latch. This means that the entire timing can also be generated externally (as an option to internal generation in the DSP via the DSP's internal timer) and the FIFO register in the DSP's RAM is implemented accordingly. Ditto the multiplexer MUX, shown here only for explanation, is implemented using corresponding access variables, the contents of which are assigned accordingly to the RAM write process. The same applies to the 3 , 13 The explicitly represented register SPA stores an already read value an-1(ASL) with a further time delay (as value an-2(ASL)) so that this value can be used for interpolation after receiving a control character. SPA is thus merely a variable that occupies a corresponding memory location in the DSP's RAM.

Furthermore, in 3 , 13 : DEC....Decoding of the start character (START) and storage (latch output) of the control characters Z, P, etc. inserted between the values of the audio signal. This storage and decoding is performed with a leading clock preEST to the FIFO write clock EST, so that the measures related to the write clock EST can be activated in a timely manner before the arrival of the clock edge of EST. This concerns the suppression of EST within the respective time frame (of the control character) and the shifting of EST (by phase shift) to the beginning of the subsequent time frame (which again concerns an amplitude value an*). See also 6a until 6d , 16a until 16d .. 6d / 16d shows a circuit suggestion, 6c / 16c the corresponding pulse scheme.

To 6b , 16b : With a D-Flip Flop (Latch) FF1, the control character that introduces the character string (see above) START (DEK= START) is initially stored as the status “recognize character string” (QF1=1) and remains in this status until either a character counter Z ( 6b , 16b) the end of the character string is detected, or in case of a time-out error, a monostable time (MONO), which is started by decoding START, is reset; in both cases, FF1 is reset. The character counter Z ( 6b , 16b) is loaded by the control character Z following the START character, or its value (see 2 , 12 ). The character clock pulses received from the decoding of Start (or QF1=1) are counted and the control characters following the START character are interpreted according to their position.

In the status “Recognize character string” (QF1=1) the toggle flip flop FF2 is enabled (via R input).

This diagram is only to be understood symbolically: the function is expediently implemented as a synchronous state machine clocked at a sufficiently high clock frequency, thus eliminating the need for the clock delays specified here, as they can then simply be implemented by "empty" switching transfer conditions (also known as NOPs, no operation) of the status machine. Likewise, if only D flip-flops are used and toggle flip-flops are avoided, the reset problem in the event of a time-out error is eliminated, as the state machine then always switches itself to a defined state when an undefined status occurs. Instead of implementing the status machine in hardware, this can just as easily be done in the DSP using the DSP's software.

To follow the simple explanation scheme 6b , 16b In order to remain stable, the leading clock pulse preEST is split into two further clock pulses pre1EST and pre2EST, where pre2EST is delayed compared to pre1EST to such an extent that the switching edge of pre2EST at the toggle FF of FF2 only occurs when FF1 has already been switched on via the decoding of the control character START. REG/DEC here symbolises the acceptance of the characters from the data carrier and their interpretation as control characters when Q=1 (of FF2). UMS symbolises the switching of the time period until the edge EST becomes positive (e.g. generated by a down counter Z2dwn), where the subsequent time for the next positive pulse is likewise corrected so that this occurs after the shift of the first pulse (from the time interval X to an*, cf. 6c , 16c ) again (as a second impulse within the time grid) into the regular time grid (cf. an* 6c , 16c ) of EST (see also 2 , 12 ).

6a , 16a illustrates the distinction between control character (X) and analog value an* by the toggle flip flop (signal Q) switched with the source clock of EST (here referred to as pre2EST).

As already explained, the symbols indicated in the circuits, such as clocks, EST, AST, multiplexers MUX, latches SPA, REG/DEC, counters, etc., are to be understood as access times (concerning the clocks) or access variables (concerning the components) of a corresponding program (a DSP, etc.).

4 , 14 This diagram shows a scheme for the preferred volume monitoring of a playing file. When a file is initialized (started) for playback, the device program first branches to a search procedure to locate the file entries for this file in the non-volatile memory (FLASH Sp) (ADD=new?). If none are present, a corresponding entry is stored for this file. ADD here symbolizes a played section of a file, whereby the file name is always queried first in order to manage the file entries in the non-volatile memory (FLASH Sp) under the file name.

During file playback, the length of a playback section (associated with ADD) is constantly determined (constant determination of L), which is recorded in the file entries of the non-volatile memory s(FLASH Sp). Any resolution for determining the length can be provided for a section address ADD, where ADD then quantifies an absolute value and the subsequent codings, for example, only add incremental lengths, which are additionally encoded in the absolute value. Only the most recent (current) value for an address is stored or constantly updated in the non-volatile memory s(FLASH Sp). Furthermore, it is possible for the absolute maximum permissible length for this section to be stored for a section address ADD. This length is also constantly checked (L=Lmax?) and, if exceeded, this section is aborted, or playback of this section is blocked beyond the length Lmax. In this case, it is possible, for example, to skip to the next section, which can also be marked in the maximum length specification (by selecting a corresponding word) (Continue at next section? yes/no).

Each time a section is blocked, this can be shown on the device's display, for example.

As already explained, the volume of the total file being played is determined according to a specific key (SUM=max ?). This is done by summing the sections already played according to the file entries in the non-volatile memory (FLASH Sp). For this calculation, the length of the sections can be multiplied by a scaling (e.g., in %) stored as a parameter for the section addresses ADD (as already explained). If the permissible total volume of the file being played is exceeded, playback is blocked.

5 , 15 shows how, within sections divided by addresses ADD1.......ADD4, limits Lmax are provided for ADD1, ADD2, but not for ADD3 and ADD4 (since the limit coincides with the end of the section).

6 , 16 see above.

7 , 17 illustrates an addressing example for a file in a data storage device, not to be confused with the section markings (ADD) made within the file. The control characters and parameters, or addresses, are also used for file addressing. 2 , 12 can be encoded directly in an audio signal in the manner described.

The first piece of information evaluated from the read data medium is the label of the publisher or music publisher, film distributor, etc. Conveniently, the label is further encrypted with a security code to prevent counterfeiting. This security code can, for example, be encoded in the audio signal, also as a tone sequence, etc. The label address read from the data medium (from the data source) addresses the area in the non-volatile memory where the files associated with this label are stored. Since the label refers to a unique brand name, but the file name addresses (FILE NAME) can be repeated (randomly) for different labels, confusion is avoided. The same applies to the assignment of device addresses G-ADD.

The control character following the LABEL is the parameter Z, which indicates how many control characters are to be read until the end of the string identifying the data carrier (also called header).

The following encrypted INFO information concerns how the control characters read in sequence are to be interpreted. For example, whether a device address is encoded, and whether the file contains FLASH STACK information that is to be loaded into the non-volatile memory as file entries if it hasn't already been loaded. Or whether it is a file that is to be played back in its entirety, etc.

Background: As already explained, the limited access volume of (e.g., free) sample files is intended to encourage the user to purchase the file in question, which is then encoded as a file with unlimited access with a device address so that it can only be played on the user's device. Since the device address (as already explained) for a LABEL is freely configurable by the device's server, the files can be played even if, for example, the device is defective and a new device address needs to be configured. Since the device is bound to a telephone number when downloading a file, the server would later register misuse if another unauthorized user, for example, used a device address that was reassigned (because the device was not defective) (because the device was not defective). The server can then write a blocking flag for all files for this LABEL into the device's non-volatile memory under its LABEL when attempting to download a file from the server, forcing the user to clarify the process, and so on.

If a file is purchased (with unlimited access) and the device address is included in the download, the file entries for this file (with limited access as a sample file) in the non-volatile memory are deleted the first time this file is played, as they are no longer needed (since the user purchased the file). This is also another prerequisite for the user to be able to play the file with unlimited access at all.

• Der Benutzer schließt sein Wiedergabegerät an seinen Rechner (Client-Rechner), der mit dem betreffenden Server vernetzt ist und erhält über den Browser die Möglichkeit die betreffenden Dateieinträge zu löschen. Dabei wird bei dem Wiedergabegerät generell für alle abzuspielenden Dateien mit begrenztem Zugang (Musterdatei) die Geräteadresse durch den Server geändert (über die angeschlossene Datenverbindung), wobei diese jedoch nicht die Geräeteadresse für die in vollem Umfang wieder zu gebenden Dateien betrifft, deren Geräeteadresse im Gerät unverändert gespeichert bleibt.

This means that if the non-volatile memory is full of existing file entries, this only affects the sample files with limited access and not the regularly purchased ones. If the user is forced to delete the file entries (to make room for new sample files with limited access and to be able to play them), this can be done by purchasing the corresponding files or by the following measure:

• The user connects their playback device to their computer (client computer), which is networked with the server in question, and has the option to delete the relevant file entries via the browser. In this case, the server generally changes the device address of all files to be played with limited access (sample files) on the playback device (via the connected data connection). However, this does not affect the device address for files to be played in full, whose device address remains stored unchanged on the device.

The browser also displays a list of tracks containing the files whose file entries have been deleted from the non-volatile memory. The user is then asked whether they wish to reinstall any tracks. If they do, the user can download these tracks again, but with the new device address and all the file entries (FLASH STACK) associated with these files, which correspond to user behavior (regarding previews, etc.). This allows the user to continue using the selected files, taking into account the portion of these files that has already been played, while still retaining space for the file entries of new templates (files) in the non-volatile memory. These selected files then contain the new device address and, in the INFO section, the note that the FLASH STACK (only!) is to be loaded into the non-volatile memory when the file is used for the first time, where these file entries remain until the next deletion cycle, or when the file is loaded as a file for unlimited playback and thus its other entries concerning the volume limitation during playback are deleted from the non-volatile memory. 7 , 17 The file name check shown for unrestricted playback of files that do not have a volume limit can also be omitted if, for example, the status of the file (no volume limit) is noted within the file as a special identifier. It is particularly preferable to do this using the 2 , 12 and 6 , 16 explained procedure, whereby this note of authorization for unlimited playback of the file is encrypted across the entire audio file. Should the playback device independently detect that an attempt has been made to tamper with this file, e.g., if the identifier in the file header corresponds to unlimited playback of the file, but parameters contained within the audio signal still indicate a file with a volume limit during playback, then the blocking note is entered under the LABEL management of the file(s). This means that the attempt to play a manipulated file from a manufacturer (LABEL) is punished by that no file from the manufacturer (LABEL) can be played at all. The same thing happens if the file's LABEL entry, which is also encoded at various points in the audio signal, is tampered with.

To make deciphering control characters and parameters encoded in the audio signal as difficult as possible, it is advisable to statistically distribute their association. The individual bits of the words of, say, a total of 200 parameters and addresses are shuffled according to a specific algorithm and then reassembled in the terminal device (by the DSP), making it very difficult for third parties to decipher the codes and manipulate the file.

Further options for encryption: The 2 , 12 The method explained above also offers the possibility of using the audio signal itself for data encryption, for example, by using certain harmonics from the music file (which are not immediately noticeable) for further encoding. To do this, the harmonics are first filtered and then added to the digital encoding accordingly (e.g., using a modulo 2 code, etc.).

As from 7 , 17 It is also clear that for a file to be played back, the LABEL name must match the group address of all files assigned to a LABEL, the device address G-ADD assigned to a LABEL, and the file name must match the name stored in the non-volatile memory. Instead of checking a file name stored in the non-volatile memory, however, the file can also contain an encrypted abbreviation that indicates that the file is to be played back in its entirety. This abbreviation can then be freely selected and applied to multiple files, and is updated or checked in the non-volatile memory of the playback device when such a file is downloaded or activated by the server.

8 , 18 illustrates the updating of the device address on a device in whose non-volatile memory the file entries of files that can only be played back with a limited volume are stored, which (because the memory is full and the user does not want to delete the memory by purchasing files that can be played back without limit) must be deleted in a special procedure. For this purpose, the user uses his (client) computer connected to the Internet and, for example, a landline telephone connection, which proves to the server that the Internet access is from an authorized user (see also the DE 10 2004 046 413.8 ).

The playback device is connected, for example, to a USB port on the (client) computer. Data is exchanged between the files stored in the non-volatile memory (MEMO, 8 , 18 ) and the server that manages all files that can be obtained from a specific LABEL.

After the server has determined that the device address of the playback device, the user's telephone number associated with the device address and (optionally) the password entry are correct, the server reads the file entries stored in the non-volatile memory (MEMO) which concern the files to be played back only to a limited extent (and which form the protection for them) and then deletes the non-volatile memory (MEMO).

Subsequently, the server writes a new device address to the non-volatile memory (MEMO) of the playback device. This address only applies to files that are only allowed to be played back to a limited extent (and thus provides the protection). The old device address also remains in the playback device and is used exclusively for files that are allowed to be played back to their full extent. These two device addresses are differentiated in the playback device by corresponding identification bits. Different device addresses can be provided for different labels (or possibly for different other file groupings).

Furthermore, the part of the file entries read from the non-volatile memory (MEMO) is stored in the server for the device address and is included in the file when re-downloading files that the user already owns or has partially played (but which are no longer playable in their original version due to the changed device address) if the user downloads such a file again from the server (FLASH STACK, 7 , 17 ) and upon the first playback of such a file, the data corresponding to the last playback status (by the user) is rewritten into the non-volatile memory (MEMO). Thus, the user has reduced the number of files that may only be played back to a limited extent, and can play the files that have been retained or re-downloaded and provided with a new device address, without exceeding the permitted volume. (taking into account the part already played), on the other hand, the user can play new files that he has not yet played and that use the newly assigned device address, as usual with a limited volume.

As in 8 , 18 As is still clearly shown, the new device address G-ADD is used for the playback of (sample) files that can only be played with a limited volume (which can also be changed several times in this way). However, for (purchased) files that are to be played with an unlimited volume, the originally configured device address is used. And only for those files that have already been partially played by the user, the transfer of the deleted information from the non-volatile memory (MEMO) to the file itself (with the new device address) is necessary (FLASH STACK, 7 , 17 ).

Loss of device or defective device: If a user loses the playback device with the configured device address, or if the device is defective, or if a new device is purchased, then the playback device must be configured again if an external data storage device (CD, DVD) is used so that the user can use the data storage device, ditto if the data on an MP3 player was still stored externally on a computer, etc. In order to detect misuse in this case, it is sensible for the server to save the unalterable electronically encoded serial number in the playback device in the server's database and to check this number each time the device is connected to the server (also via a client computer, etc.) to determine whether the old device is still being used.

If this is the case, the server can block one of the two devices via a corresponding entry (when downloading a new file). It is advisable for the server to register the serial numbers chronologically in order to take the order of access into account when detecting multiple identical device addresses, and to be able to block all devices except the most recent access by means of a marker written into the device's non-volatile memory.

Thus, in this case (if it detects two different phone numbers for the same device address), the server is able to distinguish which of two devices with the same device address was the first (which was allegedly broken or lost, or replaced by a new device), and can thus block illegally operated devices by making an entry in the non-volatile memory (MEMO).

This procedure can be further refined on a person-by-person basis if the connection to a telephone number is still used (since, for example, mobile phones with their telephone card tied to a network operator are generally not lent out that often).

A further additional embodiment is to design the playback device in such a way that it can also be used as copy protection for a computer (PC), wherein the playback device is connected to the computer (PC) that plays back the file via a data interface (e.g. USB, etc.), the file is stored encrypted on the computer's mass storage device (hard drive, etc.) and the software used to decrypt the file can access the non-volatile memory of the playback device via the data interface in order to read and update the file entries relating to the limitation of playback, wherein the decryption of the file also takes place in a format that can be processed by standard audio software and the read file is offered to software that is customary for playing the file in relation to the computer's operating system as if it were being read from a mass storage device of the computer (hard drive, etc.).

Further options:

If a data storage medium does not contain any special coding according to a special format that limits the playback volume, or if the analysis in the file header does not find any such coding after a predefined length, the file will play as usual, without a device address and without access restrictions. State-of-the-art playback of precisely predefined sections of the data storage medium is also possible. The provided coded addresses, which mark the beginning of the respective sections, are accessed via a corresponding sequence program. Playback can be paused at any time by pressing a key, and freely selected sections can be played back by selection (e.g., entering the relevant page numbers of a printed table of contents, etc.), or the playback length of the sections can be extended (if necessary, using an entry to determine the volume limit for the file in question).

When playing according to a fixed sequence program, the program always contains the The address is coded to be jumped to when a section has ended after a length specification (e.g., a time value) contained in the address as a parameter. If the section has been played back up to this length specification, or if this length evaluation is decoded during playback, then a jump is simply executed to the next address specified in the program, and so on. If no length specification (only a placeholder, e.g., zero) is specified for the address, then playback continues up to the next address or another length limitation superior to this section (defined by further parameters, etc.).

Example:

• ADD ; [length]; ADDbranch where
• ADD....is a marker address of a section detected during playback of a file or by jumping to it;

Length...from the detection of ADD onwards, the length of the played file is continuously determined. When the value specified by the parameter [Length] is reached, corresponding to the current length of the played file, the jump to the ADDbranch marker is executed. For less precise jumps (CD, etc.), it is advisable to define ADDbranch slightly before the next ADD, so that the next ADD can still be reliably detected, with playback being paused for the very short period between ADDbranch and ADD. With MP3, for example, the ADDbranch address can also be identical to that of the immediately following section, since ADD or ADDbranch then refers to a memory address of the RAM in which the MP3 file is stored.

Exact length determination of non-predefined jump addresses:

For example, if an audio file is played back on the preferred playback device which corresponds to a spoken text (from a book, a newspaper, etc.) or even music, etc., and this audio file is saved, for example, in MP3 format or even as a simple wave file (e.g. on a CD), etc., then it is desirable for the user to be able to set a marker at interesting points in the played audio file by pressing a key. This marker should then be quickly found again later in the visually displayed text, or even in a musical score, etc. Or, if necessary, the reverse process should also be possible, so that a specific point in a text file or musical score can be clicked on with the mouse and the corresponding playback of the audio signal (or even a video signal) can be heard. What's special about it, and in further contrast to the prior art, is that the two files, which are only meaningfully linked, do not have to be generated interdependently by a computer program, but rather use a synchronization file created specifically for this purpose in an automated process, and protection is sought for such a process. Likewise, any process that uses such a synchronization file is also part of the protection sought. The protection claim for this process also applies to devices that play back both files: the file that is played back according to a time grid, e.g., an audio file, and the file that is only displayed graphically, e.g., a text file. Thus, the protection right applies to the process even if it is implemented exclusively by software for a computer.

State-of-the-art information: The state of the art, for example, in the music field, involves generating sounds from a musical notation, which can also be input via a MIDI function, etc., and from which various instruments generated by software are played. This means that the coupling or synchronization between the musical notation and the reproduced audio signal is already created, i.e., it no longer needs to be created. Likewise, the state of the art involves generating speech from a text file; i.e., here too, the coupling between the text file and the audio signal already exists and does not need to be created separately.

If this connection, which exists through a direct software link between a computer and the synchronization of related files of different media genres (e.g., a text file, a score file of one media genre and an audio signal such as speech, music, etc., or even a video or a so-called Flash movie of the other media genre), is missing, then automated synchronization between such files is not common practice and has not been considered necessary. The present invention provides a remedy.

Furthermore, the state of the art also includes a so-called trigger or pre-trigger function, in which the reproduced signal is stored at the time of a key press or trigger signal (which can also be assigned to a time shortly before, see pre-trigger) or is reproduced again later as a detail.

The state of the art also includes, for example, the usual method for synchronising video images (flash images, etc.) and an audio signal, in which a predefined time grid is used, to which markers can also be set.

The time values set as markers allow the playback to jump to the corresponding points. An automated interrelationship between the video and audio signals is established during processing for the purpose of synchronization using reference signals contained in the reproduced process. These reference signals are recorded in a temporal relationship for the input of synchronization signals, which the user (processor) enters into the computer for this purpose. This relationship ensures a rhythmic adjustment between image and sound, predetermined by an action signal derived from a synchronization signal entered by the user or processed by a user, and which refers to the reference signals contained in the reproduced process. These reference signals can, but do not have to, be pre-programmed in the reproduced file; they can also be generated in real time during playback by various filtering devices for the detection and decoding of sound sequences, pauses, envelope curves, etc. The basis for the first usable system here is, for example, the DE 41 43 257 C2 a patent belonging to the same applicant with claims 1 and 8, which are to be mentioned here as prior art (the DE 41 43 257 C2 ).

In contrast to the present invention, as claimed in claim 39 as a preferred development and also as an independent invention in independent application, the prior art always concerns the synchronization of time sequences and not of information content. In the present invention, however, for the first time, information content from different files is automatically synchronized using the time frame of one file, whereby the other file need not have such a time frame at all, and no synchronization measures need to be specified when preparing the files to be synchronized according to information content. This problem alone is considered particularly inventive according to the prior art.

The task (of this additional function as further training or as a standalone application) thus concerns the synchronization between different media types of files, e.g. between a text file and an audio file, or between a musical score and an audio signal, etc. In contrast to the state of the art, however, the aim here is not to synchronize the playback of a file with regard to the associated rhythmic process in the temporal sequence during playback, but only to synchronize it automatically according to the meaningful context.

The file that does not require a time grid during playback can usually be understood as a corresponding source file from which the file that uses a time grid during playback was (somehow) created (manually or computer-assisted or via a MIDI instrument or via speech software for a text file on a computer, etc.).

Definition for the user: The use of the synchronization carried out according to information content for the user should be carried out in such a way that a synchronization reference desired according to the respective information content is carried out by using the time grid already available for the playback of the one file and saving the time values relating to the selected information content.

Such that during the time-proportional reproduction of the signal corresponding to a file (such as an acoustic reproduction, or an image sequence such as video or flash, etc.) at any time in which the user finds the information content of a reproduced file particularly interesting, the user inputs a synchronization signal (key signal, trigger signal, etc.) with which a time stamp corresponding to these times is stored in accordance with the temporal course of the reproduced signal. These time stamps are stored in the playback device as a supplementary file belonging to the played back file, whereby these time stamps can be used to jump to precisely those points in the source file of the other media genre (e.g. text template of a spoken text, song, or musical notation for music) using a table implemented in a connection file, which is to be referred to here as a synchronization file, which at the time of their setting as a time stamp during the time-proportional playback of the file played back according to a time grid (such as an acoustic playback, or an image sequence, video, etc.) have been set by the user as the particularly interesting points.

Both files, the one reproduced proportionally to time and the source file that only exists as a graphic image, can have been created completely separately, even with the involvement of the human mind (user) without any direct reference to the software.

The invention does not concern the actual creation of the reproduced file from the source file.

Rather, the automated creation of a synchronization file to generate the explained affiliation of information content encoded by timestamps of the files concerned and/or their use when the information content is individually selected by the user.

The problem of the invention stated in claim 39 of this application alone can already be considered inventive, since the prior art does not yet know of a method for automatically creating or using such a synchronization file, which uses time stamps to establish a reference for addressing information content to a file that is not reproduced according to a predetermined time sequence.

Two examples are given for the application of this new method: one in which the reproduced file is a spoken (or sung) text of an audio signal based on a graphically represented text template (a computer text file displayed on the screen or a text template from a printed publication, etc.) as the source file, and another in which the reproduced file is the music of an audio signal based on a graphically represented musical notation as the source file. In both examples, the audio file can also be coupled to a synchronous video playback, etc.

In further development, a further measure is provided that, in the event that the fully automatic creation of the synchronization file explained below fails, the user has the option of immediate intervention and/or the option of later semi-automatic correction in order to avoid errors in the creation of the synchronization file or to be able to correct them automatically.

This technical problem is solved by using a time clock for each media genre or for the files used for playback, e.g. an audio file played back according to a time grid for playback such as speech, music, etc. and an associated source file without a time grid as a text file or a graphic musical image, etc., which for both media genres or files (i.e. for the playback file and the source file) consistently marks the reproduced information content (elements) of the file during playback, which advances (increments or decrements) a counter reading ZTime according to the file played back after a time lapse (or according to a time grid) and is used to address the information elements contained in the source file without a time grid, which is displayed to the user when viewing the file directly or via further references (page or line information of a printed work, etc.) according to their position within the source file.

The progression of the counter reading Ztime begins at the respective marks (ADD, or START, etc.) of the individual sections, or in a simplified version can also begin at the beginning of the file.

During acoustic playback (audio signal such as speech or music), which has (meaningfully) matching markers for the graphically reproduced file, this time frame is linked to the output clock pulse, e.g., to the D/A converter clock of an output audio signal, or to the generation clock of the line sync pulses of a video signal (also picture change, depending on the application, etc.). Generally, this clock pulse Ztime is therefore tied to the output time frame or is generated by a common processing clock; for example, for a video signal, this clock would correspond in stability to the line or picture change pulses, etc.

If a marker signal (trigger) is set using the marker button on the playback device, the time value of the time grid is saved; the file itself is not affected by this process. Therefore, the time values corresponding to each marker (pressing a button) can also be saved in a separate data packet as a file entry for the file name (of the played file), e.g., in the non-volatile memory of the playback device. From there, they can then be sent later via the client computer to a server that manages the files, or, for example, via the mobile phone connection of a car radio to the server (as a closed packet, e.g., when the radio is turned off).

The server stores a reference address for each word (or bar of the musical notation, etc.) of the text file under which this word (or musical notation, etc.) can be called up. This reference address corresponds to the counter reading Ztime as it occurs when the text is incremented by the time when the text is spoken or the musical notation is played (singing, etc.).

The possibility is used to ensure the corresponding correspondence of the elements reproduced in the graphic file (without time stamp) by using software (e.g. words, etc.) with those reproduced acoustically (according to a time cycle) (of the relevant audio file), whereby the start addresses for the sections, e.g. by page, are set in the acoustically reproduced file (e.g. by means of appropriate editing software), the file is then played back within a computer program and during the acoustic playback the counter reading Ztime is advanced accordingly with the time cycle, e.g. at the beginning of the sections starting with zero.

For the application of a spoken text, the spoken text available as an audio signal is converted into a text from a text file using speech recognition. Each word is retrieved from the text file in turn, and when the spoken text is recognized in accordance with the text from the text file, the time value or counter reading Ztime corresponding to the spoken text of the audio signal is saved as a key (or reference or address). The position address associated with the key within the text file (of the recognized text) is also saved as a value in a key/value pair list under which the key can be retrieved again via this list.

The value then corresponds to the position address of the text within the text file and is addressed with the corresponding counter reading Ztime during a subsequent playback of the text file in order to call up the relevant text passages in the text file, as they were marked as interesting (but only heard) passages as a time value via the respective saving of the counter reading Ztime during the playback of the audio file.

Example:

The text stored in a file is read word by word into an array word$(x%). Here, as a simplified representation, the index (x%) is incremented word by word according to each word recognized (via speech recognition) to check whether it is the correct word. By reading the array word$(x%) step by step, the text in the text file is compared word by word with the words recognized by speech recognition.

After each word is recognized, the array word$(x%) is advanced to the next word by incrementing x%, and a check is made to see whether the current audio signal also provides the (advanced) word as word recognition. The words read from the text file for comparison are thus advanced according to the text sequence, synchronously with the playback of these words as a speech signal.

If the audio signal text provided by the speech recognition system matches the text in the text file (word for word), the time value determined for each word during playback of the audio signal is stored as a supplement to the existing text file in a hash list (input value, output value). The time value Ztime and index (x%) are stored in pairs such that the corresponding index (x%) can be read from the time value (like a dictionary). This mode, in which the speech recognition system correctly recognizes the words presented by the text array word$(x%), is referred to below as the speech recognition evaluation mode. Of course, an approximation method can also be used in which a word from the text file is recognized as correct by the word supplied by the speech recognition, even if only a few essential syllables (which make up the word taking into account the other recognized words) are recognized in the word supplied by the speech recognition, etc. In principle, all that matters with this method is that the forwarding (from (x%)) for reading out the comparison words from the text file word$(x%) takes place synchronously with the spoken words contained in the audio signal, so that the time values (or counter readings) Ztime determined for each word (or word start) match those read from the text file in order to be able to create the key/value pair list as a synchronous file.

If, however, a word preselected by advancing the array word$(x%) is not recognized by the speech recognition, then the system switches to a semi-automatic mode, referred to as mouse mode below. In mouse mode, word selection is not made by advancing through the recognized words in speech recognition, but manually, as described below for further training. In mouse mode, several words or strings located in a catch range of the manual selection are also included in the comparison, so that this mode corresponds to a semi-automatic mode in which the word selection made is still marked for automatic retrieval for later correction and checking. In mouse mode, the time value Ztime and Index(x%) are also saved in pairs.

Thus, by entering the variable “time value” = Ztime into the hash list (input value, output value), the index (x%) can be read from this list immediately, which in turn immediately determines the correct position tion of the text, or rather, the text passage. It is obvious that the index (x%) can also be created multidimensionally, e.g., divided into line/word number within the line, etc., as is common in word processing programs, in order to be able to jump immediately to a relevant text passage.

The table (list) can also be created in such a way that reverse addressing (referencing) is possible, i.e. the “time value” = Ztime is read using the position of the text (e.g. marked by the user with the mouse) as a key.

Since the time value Ztime can be defined (and saved) relative to the RAM address (or flash memory, etc.) of an MP3 file, it is possible, for example, to click on any text location and hear the correct text for a specific section starting at that point. The text playback is not performed by direct translation of the text (i.e., not via a computer voice), but exclusively through the preferred synchronization.

If the time value Ztime is transmitted from the supplementary file associated with the data file to the server, the server sends the line number (absolute or further subdivided by page division, etc.) and the word number (within the line) to the program used to display the text on the client computer. This allows the passages previously marked by a keystroke while listening to the text on the playback device to be called up sequentially in the visually displayed text, either automatically or by entering them using a search function, or by looking them up in a printed publication, etc. The connection file between the playback device and the server is, on the server side, the synchronization file created for a file; for the playback device, these are the time values Ztime saved as supplementary files by the user using the selection key. These values correspond to the passages of interest in the file played back according to a time grid (e.g., the listened audio file or a video file, etc.).

For example, a user can play an MP3 file on their car radio, press a button at interesting passages, and quickly retrieve the passages marked on their car radio as text data via their client computer and an internet connection (or locally independently), either by removing a chip card or via a direct mobile phone connection to the server, etc. Or they can look up the relevant passages using the page/line references in a printed publication (book, newspaper) based on information from a database, etc. Or, with music, for example, the relevant passages can be displayed via sheet music. Or they can have them loaded directly into an electronically downloadable book.

Options: To create the list, in order to save the corresponding index (x%) of a word of the "source file" that is not displayed according to a time grid but only graphically (e.g. a text file word$(x%)) for a (arbitrary) grid time value Ztime of the file that is displayed according to a time grid, it can be used as an option or as an additional extension with a camera, the video image of which is evaluated to determine which word the user is currently looking at (on the screen).

Or, using a screen or even a printed text (with an input pad function based on the principle of a writing pad with a pointing function), a mouse function can be used, where the user, while reading the text, moves the mouse along a ruler (or with the Y-coordinate direction switched off, etc.) or the finger or a pen according to the words read over the text, etc.

• - daß der Mauszeiger/Cursor schrittweise von Wort zu Wort bewegt wird, was durch entsprechende Erkennung der einem Wortbeginn jeweils entsprechenden Zeichenpositionen der Mauszeigerbewegung gesteuert ist,
• - daß der Mauszeiger/Cursor des Bildschirms nach dem Erreichen des letzten Wortes einer Zeile automatisch auf den Anfang der nächsten Zeile gesetzt wird, wobei gleichzeitig die Maus zurück in Richtung Anfang der Zeile bewegt werden kann und diese ausschließlich zur Rückführung der Maus vorgenommene Bewegungseingabe von der Software ausgetastet wird, wobei diese Austastung nach Ablauf des nächsten Wortes wieder eingeschaltet wird,
• - daß die Mausbewegung in Y- Richtung (welche die Zeilen schneidet) während der X-Bewegung in Zeilenrichtung abgeschaltet ist oder nur an der ersten Wortposition möglich ist.
• - daß diese Mauszeigereingabe (Modus Maus) mit dem erläuterten Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung (Spracherkennungstextumsetzung) kombiniert ist, wobei die durch die Spracherkennungstextumsetzung erkannten Worte jeweils durch den Mauszeiger/Cursor angezeigt sind und weiters bei gegebenenfalls eintretender Nichterkennung eines Wortes (wobei dies z.B. durch Änderung der Textfarbe noch besonders angezeigt wird) durch manuelle Bewegung der Maus die Texterkennung in einem Fangbereich (bezogen auf die Cursorposition) wieder einrastet, wobei von der Steuerung folgender Ablauf erfolgt:
  1. a) wird ein in der Textdatei wort$(x%) jeweils weiter geschaltetes Wort durch die Spracherkennungsbewertung (im Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung) nicht erkannt, dann erfolgt die Umschaltung der Zuordnungssteuerung, welche den gemessenen Zeitwert Ztime (zu dem ein gelesenes Wort jeweils gesprochen wird) jeweils zu einer Wortposition in der Textdatei wort$(x%) zuordnet (um es in die Liste (Eingabewert, Ausgabewert) zu speichern) derart, daß das betreffende Wort nicht mehr über die Spracherkennungsbewertung sondern über die durch die vom Benutzer vorgenommene Mauszeigerbedienung (im Modus Maus) Worte ausgewählt wird, dabei erfolgt die Weiterschaltung des Arrays wort$(x%) über den Index x%, unmittelbar durch die über den Mauszeiger bewegte Cursorpostion,
  2. b) wird ein durch die Cursorposition angezeigtes Wort, bzw. gegebenenfalls auch eine Gruppe von Wörtern (string$) durch die Texterkennung/Worterkennung (wieder) erkannt, dann erfolgt die Umschaltung (bzw. Rückschaltung) der Zuordnungssteuerung welche den gemessenen Zeitwert (zu dem ein gelesenes Wort jeweils gesprochen wird) jeweils zu einem Wort zuordnet um es in die Liste (Eingabewert, Ausgabewert) zu speichern in den Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung, wobei (wieder) zu jedem erkannten Wort der Textdatei wort$(x%) das nächste Wort der Textdatei (oder gegebenenfalls auch eine Wortgruppe) für den Vergleich verwendet wird (Fortschalten von (x%)).

For this mouse pointer variant, hereinafter referred to as mouse mode, the following training measures for operation are specifically provided:

• - that the mouse pointer/cursor is moved step by step from word to word, which is controlled by the corresponding recognition of the character positions of the mouse pointer movement corresponding to the beginning of a word,
• - that the mouse pointer/cursor of the screen is automatically set to the beginning of the next line after reaching the last word of a line, whereby at the same time the mouse can be moved back towards the beginning of the line and this movement input, which is carried out exclusively for the purpose of returning the mouse, is blanked out by the software, whereby this blanking is switched on again after the next word has been read,
• - that the mouse movement in the Y direction (which cuts the lines) is switched off during the X movement in the line direction or is only possible at the first word position.
• - that this mouse pointer input (mouse mode) is combined with the explained speech recognition evaluation mode (speech recognition text conversion), whereby the words recognized by the speech recognition text conversion are each displayed by the mouse pointer/cursor and furthermore, in the event of a non-recognition of a word (where this is e.g. by changing the text color is particularly indicated) the text recognition is re-engaged in a capture area (related to the cursor position) by manually moving the mouse, whereby the following process is carried out by the control:
  1. a) If a word advanced in the text file word$(x%) is not recognized by the speech recognition evaluation (in speech recognition evaluation mode), then the assignment control is switched, which assigns the measured time value Ztime (at which a read word is spoken) to a word position in the text file word$(x%) (in order to save it in the list (input value, output value)) in such a way that the word in question is no longer selected via the speech recognition evaluation but via the words selected by the user using the mouse pointer (in mouse mode). The array word$(x%) is advanced via the index x%, directly by the cursor position moved over the mouse pointer.
  2. b) If a word indicated by the cursor position, or possibly also a group of words (string$) is (re)recognized by the text recognition/word recognition, then the assignment control which assigns the measured time value (at which a read word is spoken) to a word in order to save it in the list (input value, output value) is switched over (or back) to the speech recognition evaluation mode, whereby (again) for each recognized word in the text file word$(x%) the next word in the text file (or possibly also a group of words) is used for the comparison (advancing from (x%)).

All text passages where the speech recognition evaluation (in speech recognition evaluation mode) failed (i.e., the words were not recognized) are saved sequentially (in a correction file similar to a logbook file) so that these passages can be played back (acoustically) by repetition. The user can then pause or resume playback by clicking a mouse button. If, during the time intervals in which the speech recognition evaluation failed and the mouse mode was switched on, an incorrect association between the spoken word and the manually selected word (based on the cursor position) in the text file word$(x%) occurs, the user can correct this by editing the correction file.

The positions to which the assignment control automatically switched from speech recognition evaluation mode to mouse mode are then read from the correction file in sequence as jump addresses. In this case, the conventional method for acoustic playback is used in which an audio signal is played back unchanged, retaining the envelope curve and the frequency range contained therein, but at a slower speed. This means that the time course of the envelope is spread by inserting appropriate periods of the audio signal.

This process is called phase voicing and is also known as "elastic audio." The timing of the time base used to measure the timing of each word is also adjusted to this speed change (which is only used for editing). Since the text is spoken more slowly (while listening) for correction purposes, the user can better follow the corresponding mouse movement to highlight the corresponding text in mouse mode.

The synchronization file obtained for a text file thus contains, as table values (input value, output value), e.g. a hash list with the assignment of the time values Ztime of the file played back according to a time grid in the format (input value, output value) = (key, value) = (Ztime, x%) to the relevant words of the text as position value x% (of the graphically displayed file word$(x%), which correspond in sequence to the file played back according to a time grid, or acoustically). Likewise, the file played back according to a time grid can also be a video or Flash file, etc., instead of an audio file. The synchronization file obtained during the creation (production) of the audio file (e.g. from a text file) is then saved under the relevant file name as an auxiliary file on the server, from which the user can download these passages in order to, for example, visually read the text passages marked by keystrokes (in a text file or in a printed publication) via his client computer, which is connected to the server via the Internet.

The precision achievable with the method is particularly desirable when a graphical musical notation is used instead of a text and the acoustic reproduction uses a frequency analysis instead of speech recognition, with which a musical notation is generated from the acoustically reproduced music, at least to the extent that it is sufficient for comparison with a stored musical notation (a graphically displayed file) for synchronization in order to A table (time value of the acoustic playback = input value / position of the graphical notation marked by the cursor = output) is created. This means that, in principle, the synchronization for storing the time values by addressing the notes of the notation is carried out in the same way as the synchronization for storing the time values by addressing the words of a text.

The time values Ztime can be measured either only from the beginning or from markers already set to mark the beginning of sections during acoustic playback.

Further applications: For example, a third file of a third media genre, e.g. a video file, can be synchronized, whereby the audio file associated with the video file is still available as a text file, etc. The video file with the associated audio file then also generates the preferred time grid for synchronization (to generate the time values Ztime).

• 9a, 19a betrifft die Wiedergabe der Datei am Gerät (DATEI BENUTZEN) durch den Benutzer, der über ein Tastensignal die gehörten Stellen der nach einem Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Datei markieren kann und so eine im Wiedergabegerät abgespeicherte Ergänzungsdatei erstellen kann, mit der er unter Verwendung der im Server gespeicherten Synchronisationsdatei die durch Tastendruck markierten Stellen in der graphisch angezeigten, nicht nach einem Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Datei anspringen, bzw. aufsuchen kann.
• 9b, 19b betrifft die Erstellung der Synchronisationsdatei (SYNCHRONDATEI ERSTELLEN) als Ergänzung zur graphisch angezeigten, nicht nach einem Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Datei, um zu jedem (bei der akustischen Wiedergabe) vorgenommenen Tastendruck in das Array zur Abspeicherung der Marken (Markenarray(x)) die Zeitwerte ZTime, über welche die Stellen in der Datei für die visuelle Wiedergabe adressiert werden sollen, abzuspeichern. Mit dieser im Wiedergabegerät gespeicherten Ergänzungsdatei kann der Benutzer unter späterer Verwendung der im Server gespeicherten Synchronisationsdatei, die bei der akustischen Wiedergabe durch Tastendruck markierten Stellen in der graphisch angezeigten, nicht nach einem Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Datei unmittelbar anspringen bzw. aufsuchen.

9a and 9b ( 19a and 19b) illustrate the procedure:

• 9a , 19a concerns the playback of the file on the device (USE FILE) by the user, who can mark the heard parts of the file played back according to a time grid using a key signal and can thus create a supplementary file stored in the playback device with which he can jump to or search for the parts marked by pressing a key in the graphically displayed file that is not played back according to a time grid using the synchronization file stored in the server.
• 9b , 19b Concerns the creation of the synchronization file (CREATE SYNCHRONIZATION FILE) as a supplement to the graphically displayed file, which is not played back according to a time grid. This file is used to store the time values ZTime, which are used to address the points in the file for visual playback, for each keystroke (during acoustic playback) in the array for storing the markers (mark array(x)). With this supplementary file stored in the playback device, the user can later use the synchronization file stored on the server to directly jump to or search for the points marked by a keystroke in the graphically displayed file, which is not played back according to a time grid.

Explanation of 9a , 19a : (USE FILE). At each section marker of a new section (e.g., a new page of text in a book) encoded by an ADD address, the counter Ztime is reset (ZTime=0) to count down a time interval. For most applications, it is sufficient to set the time interval counted (or incremented, see INCR ZTime) with the received value of ZTime so that a few measures are allocated to each spoken word (instead of synchronizing the start of Ztime exactly with the start of the word, which is an option).

For each key signal (trigger) that the user can enter on the playback device (possibly via a remote control, etc.), the value of the counter reading ZTime, which is further linked to the address ADD of the section marker (e.g., via the memory organization, where ADD forms a kind of directory), is written into an array that is continuously incremented (INCRx) with each write operation (from Ztime1....... Ztime2......Ztime_n). Upon triggering or upon switching off the device, this is stored in the aforementioned non-volatile memory of the playback device as a supplementary file to a played file, or remains stored there, or is transferred via an interface to the server or an alternative computer, via which the text file can then be examined. It is evident that this function can, in principle, also be housed independently in the playback device, just as the playback device can also have a direct internet connection to the server, etc.

Explanation of 9b , 19b : (CREATE SYNCHRONOUS FILE). To create the file (here, for example, the additional file for the text file visually displayed on the screen), the starting point is first determined using the mouse function explained (by selecting the relevant text passage with the mouse), with the mouse mode being active during this START phase. Speech recognition always remains effective in this mode, with speech recognition evaluation being performed by comparing the text obtained by speech recognition with the text selected by the user using the mouse function. An extension function is provided in mouse mode, where the evaluation is performed within a capture area in the area of the text selected by the user. This means that even if the user has not yet placed the cursor exactly on the correct word recognized by speech recognition using the mouse movement, the correct word (or a string or a word sequence) is still recognized at the relevant text passage within the capture area selected by the mouse cursor. whereupon the assignment control automatically switches back to the speech recognition evaluation mode, in which the cursor in the graphically and not time-synchronously displayed file (e.g. text file) is no longer set by the user's mouse movement, but by the speech recognition and for each recognized word (or recognized word sequence) the data supplied by the graphically displayed file (e.g. text file) are switched on in their sequence within the file (or the text) (e.g. by incrementing or decrementing (x%) within word$(x%)).

Of course, in principle it does not matter whether the synchronization input for assigning the time values to the visually displayed text is made in real time during recording or during playback of an already recorded text.

• - Stimmt das über die Spracherkennung erkannte Wort (oder auch ein String) mit dem jeweils über das Textarray durch die Mausfunktion ausgewählten, bzw. adressierten, bzw. innerhalb des Fangbereiches fortgeschalteten aus der dargestellten Textdatei überein (Wadd oder Wadd+1, etc.), dann wird vom Modus Maus in den Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung geschaltet und der zugehörige aktuelle Zeitwert ZTIME des akustisch wiedergegebenen Audiosignals als Schlüssel (=ZTIME) für die Abspeicherung in einen Hash verwendet, dessen Wert die Textposition (Zeilennummer, Wortnummer) des als übereinstimmend erkannten Textes ist (Übereinstimmung von durch Spracherkennung aufgefundenen Text und durch Suchen im Bereich der Mausposition aufgefundenen Text). Anschließend (nach der Abspeicherung) wird das Textarray, welches die Folge der Wörter des Textes (1 Wort je Index Nr.) enthält um 1 auf das nachfolgende Wort inkrementiert und mit dem durch die Spracherkennung nachfolgenden Wort verglichen, usw. Diese in diesem Absatz erläuterte Prozedur wird solange wiederholt, solange das jeweils nach einer Erkennung fortgeschaltete (nächste Wort) im Textarray mit dem von der Spracherkennung gelieferten aktuellen Wort jeweils erkannt wird. Wobei zu jeder Erkennung der Hasheintrag in die Liste Schlüssel/Wert = ZTIME/Textposition vorgenommen wird.
• - Stimmt das über die Spracherkennung erkannte Wort (oder auch ein String) mit dem jeweils im Textarray fortgeschalteten nicht überein, dann wird wieder in den Modus Maus wie im vorherigen Absatz erläutert zurückgeschaltet und das Einphasen auf die automatische Erkennung des gesprochenen Textes neu begonnen.
• - Die Textpositionen, deren Zuordnung als Wert zu den zugehörigen Zeitwerten ZTIME (als jeweils entsprechende Schlüssel) im Modus Maus gespeichert werden, solange sie durch die Spracherkennungsbewertung nicht ausreichend erkannt sind, werden der Reihe nach gespeichert, damit sie in einer nachfolgenden Korrektur automatisch angesprungen und manuell überprüft werden können.
• - Um den Benutzer sofort darauf hinzuweisen, ab wann jeweils der Modus Maus (selbsttätig) sich eingeschaltet hat, ist vorgesehen, die Farbe der Textdarstellung entsprechend zu wechseln, z.B. von schwarz (im Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung) auf rot im Modus Maus, wobei dann nur jener Text (Wort oder Wortgruppe) in rot, z.B. auch noch zusätzlich fett dargestellt, hervorgehoben wird, wo der Mauscursor sich gerade befindet. Schaltet die Software wieder in den Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung um, weil der durch die Spracherkennungsbewertung übersetzte Text im Fangbereich des Mauscursors liegt und durch das automatisierte suchen aufgefunden wird, dann wird der Text wieder ausschließlich schwarz dargestellt, wobei die ausschließlich durch das Programm (über die Worterkennung fortgeschaltete) Cursormarke jedoch noch zusätzlich bunt (z.B. blau) angezeigt werden kann, usw.

In mouse mode, every word (or word sequence) recognized by the speech recognition system that is in the immediate vicinity of the cursor mark in the graphically displayed file (e.g. text file) that is evaluated and displayed as the capture area is taken into account for recognition. This is done by constantly searching the position area of the word marked using the mouse (e.g. in the area three words before and three words after the word, etc.) in the displayed text file (using a corresponding loop). In addition to individual words, a string of, for example, a number of several words (e.g. three) can also be taken into account in this comparison, etc., ditto the number of words in the capture area can also be defined by user input, etc.

• - If the word (or string) recognized by speech recognition matches the word selected, addressed, or advanced within the capture range from the displayed text file using the mouse function via the text array (Wadd or Wadd+1, etc.), then the mode switches from mouse mode to speech recognition evaluation mode and the associated current time value ZTIME of the acoustically reproduced audio signal is used as a key (=ZTIME) for storage in a hash whose value is the text position (line number, word number) of the text recognized as matching (match between text found by speech recognition and text found by searching in the area of the mouse position). Subsequently (after saving), the text array containing the sequence of words in the text (1 word per index number) is incremented by 1 to the next word and compared with the next word generated by speech recognition, and so on. This procedure, explained in this paragraph, is repeated until the next word in the text array following a recognition is recognized with the current word provided by speech recognition. For each recognition, a hash entry is made in the list key/value = ZTIME/text position.
• - If the word (or string) recognized by the speech recognition does not match the one currently advanced in the text array, then the system switches back to mouse mode as explained in the previous paragraph and starts phasing in to the automatic recognition of the spoken text again.
• - The text positions whose assignment as a value to the corresponding time values ZTIME (as corresponding keys) are saved in mouse mode, as long as they are not sufficiently recognized by the speech recognition evaluation, are saved in sequence so that they can be automatically jumped to and manually checked in a subsequent correction.
• - In order to immediately inform the user when mouse mode has been activated (automatically), the color of the text display changes accordingly, e.g. from black (in speech recognition evaluation mode) to red in mouse mode, whereby only the text (word or group of words) where the mouse cursor is currently located is highlighted in red, e.g. also in bold. If the software switches back to speech recognition evaluation mode because the text translated by speech recognition evaluation is within the mouse cursor's capture range and is found by the automated search, the text is again displayed exclusively in black, although the cursor mark, which is advanced exclusively by the program (via word recognition), can also be displayed in color (e.g. blue), etc.

The automated search in the mouse cursor's capture area in mouse mode is performed by a continuous search loop, in which the text array circulates the words in the capture area accordingly and constantly compares them with the text words recognized by the speech recognition. The positional index between which the text array circulates is determined by the position of the mouse cursor. If two identical words are found in a row, or if it is unclear whether or not there is a space between two words, etc., then a string check is also performed. Instead of checking several individual words in the text one after the other, the word group is then checked by gradually adding them. of the next word if the first word is omitted. If a match is found, this is taken into account when moving on to the next word (in relation to the word's position in the text). The single-word comparison and the string comparison can also be performed simultaneously (virtually "simultaneously," alternating according to a program), whereby both comparisons can also influence each other with regard to the addressing of the string or word used for the comparison.

In this way, the synchronization file is obtained for the graphically displayed file (e.g. a text file) that is not played back according to a time grid. This allows the user to immediately display or locate the points marked as interesting by a key function during playback of a file played back according to a time grid (e.g. while listening to an acoustically played file (of another media genre)) via the graphically displayed file (e.g. a text file or even a printed work). Since such synchronization with the audio file also allows a video file to be synchronously integrated, to which text can be recorded, for example using a teleprompter as explained above, a reference to image sections can also be established in this way. As already mentioned, the reference between a music file (e.g. a wave file) and a score file can also be established in this way.

Further options are: The device designed according to the method according to claim 1, after saving the supplementary file (created by the user's keystroke), enables the playback of the file played back according to a time grid (e.g., an acoustic playback) using the synchronization file additionally stored on the server with a graphic source file (of another media type, e.g., a text file), also to display only partial excerpts concerning the text passages of a text file requested via the supplementary file. This can, for example, also be logged independently in non-volatile memory if the playback device also enables the reading of a text or the viewing of a graphic (music score, etc.), e.g., using an electrically rechargeable newspaper (with digital ink, etc.).

Alternatives and additional information: Depending on the application, it may be useful to make the aforementioned synchronization file (table) reverse-addressable, or to create such a table in which the positions of the graphic reference elements (image elements such as text, music notation, etc.) selected within the graphically displayed file not played back according to a time grid (text, music notation, etc.) are used as addresses (keys) to read out the time values Ztime corresponding to the file (audio, video, Flash, etc.) played back according to a time grid, and to use the read values to address the respective positions in the file (or signal) played back according to a time grid. The positions of the graphic reference elements (image elements such as text, music notation, etc.) are then selected, for example, using a mouse function.

Final note: The progressive code ZTime generated in the playback device as a time value for the playback of a file played according to a time grid does not necessarily refer to an absolute time, but rather to the amplitude curve of the signal corresponding to the file. As usual, the counting pulses are derived from the highest possible output frequency and synchronized accordingly with the signal playback. How this is done depends on the playback method used. For example, in a video signal, these are the line sync pulses; in an audio method, this corresponds to a clock whose stability corresponds to the output clock of the D/A converter, etc.

Technical task in comparison with the state of the art:

• Neben der weiteren allgemeinen Anwendbarkeit des Verfahrens ist als Wiedergabegerät z.B. ein MP3-Player, oder auch ein CD-Player, etc., vorgesehen.

The aim is to play back a part selected for access via a control function from the set of a complete file (e.g. the spoken text of a book being read aloud, etc.) on a playback device, or a functional unit of such a device modified for this purpose, which can, for example, play back files as audio or video signals (or text or images).

• In addition to the further general applicability of the method, an MP3 player, a CD player, etc., is intended as a playback device.

In further development, for example, a generally applicable format is provided which, regardless of the data format used (e.g. any standard), can accommodate the parameters and addresses required to carry out the procedure in the file directly in an audio file.

The term device is understood very broadly here, so for example a so-called electronic newspaper (or book) that can be loaded with data, which already exists in the laboratory, can be used as a text display device. Graphic Elements such as music notation are displayed, for example using a dual foot switch (with two pedals) for forward and backward scrolling, the music on the display can be scrolled forward or backward page by page, etc.

• Dabei soll im Prinizip eine endlose Menge von Datenträgern (oder jeweils geladene Datenpakete wie bei MP3, etc.) mit einem solchen Gerät abspielbar sein, weiter soll der Benutzer bei wiederholter Abspielung der Dateien immer genau den vorherigen Stand (betreffend dieser Datei und der Erfassung des zulässigen Wiedergabevolumens) vorfinden und über das der abgespielten Datei jeweils entsprechend begrenzte Volumen hinaus keine weiteren Ausschnitte mehr wiedergeben können, bei im Prinizip freier Auswahl der Ausschnitte.

The technical task concerns the control function, which controls access for playback in such a way that, on the one hand, the user can freely access the content in specific sections, but can only play back a portion of the file's overall volume. This overall volume is not a fixed, predefined section, but rather results from the sum of the samples freely selected by the user during playback, which can be played back as often as desired. However, the total volume of the sections freely selected from a file in this way represents only a fraction of the entire file.

• In principle, an endless number of data carriers (or loaded data packages such as MP3, etc.) should be playable with such a device. Furthermore, when the user repeatedly plays the files, they should always find exactly the previous status (regarding this file and the recording of the permissible playback volume) and should not be able to play back any further excerpts beyond the volume limited by the file being played, while in principle the excerpts can be freely selected.

Given the worldwide availability of playback devices for various data storage media that has existed for decades and their constant further development, including the use of multimedia computers for this purpose, especially in connection with use via the Internet (for downloading and playing back files), the task of the invention alone can be considered particularly inventive, because it gives both the multimedia sector and the distribution of classic print media, such as books, newspapers, magazines, etc., an enormous boost through the new technical aid relating to the invention.

Preview:

• In this case, only for a further development of the invention, using device addresses, the correspondence of which with the played data carrier must be present as a check address contained in the data carrier in order to enable its playback, in addition to the embodiment according to claim 1, generally valid protection is further sought independently of claim 1, in particular in detail such that the data carrier is initially stored on a server (from which a file is to be delivered via the Internet) without a defined device address being present, but the device address is added by the server to the device connected to the client computer when downloading the file, and above all,
• that the server can assign a device address to the device, i.e. can configure
• without this type of copy protection being circumvented.
  • This means that a new playback device can be sold as standard and play any number of non-copy-protected files (as before), as well as any number of copy-protected files. The manufacturer must adhere to a certain standard, but all devices are identical upon delivery and no individual fixed address is required. The device addresses are only assigned when configured by the server or when a file is downloaded by the server, and are used for a consistency check (if necessary with intermediate calculations for decryption using various algorithms) between the file and the device. ☺ Preferred option: Since different labels (brand names of file suppliers, or music publishers, etc.) can freely assign different device addresses, for a special development the file name (or its encoding) is used as the address to address the device address associated with the consistency check and the procedure is as follows.

1. a) der zur Kennzeichnung einer bestimmten Datei (unabhängig vom Gerät, bzw. Benutzer) verwendete Dateiname, bzw. dessen Kennung in einen nicht flüchtigen Speicher des Wiedergabegerätes eingeschrieben;
2. b) es wird die beim Runterladen der Datei mit vergebene Geräteadresse unter der Adressierung (Verknüpfung) des Dateinamens (und/oder Labels) mit abgespeichert.

When downloading the file from the server,

1. a) the file name used to identify a specific file (regardless of the device or user) or its identifier is written into a non-volatile memory of the playback device;
2. b) the device address assigned when downloading the file is saved under the addressing (link) of the file name (and/or label).

• a) Ist der betreffende Dateiname überhaupt gespeichert ? Wenn ja, dann zur nächsten Prüfung, wenn nein, dann Verweigern der Wiedergabe und Abbrechen. Als Option kann der Dateiname auch in den nichtflüchtigen Speicher des Wiedergabegerätes eingeschrieben werden.
• b) Stimmt die unter der Adresse (Referenz) dieses Dateinamens abgespeicherte Geräteadresse mit der in der Datei gespeicherten Prüfadresse überein (unmittelbar oder nach Entschlüsselung, etc.) ? Wenn ja, dann erfolgt die Wiedergabe, wenn nein, dann Verweigern der Wiedergabe und Abbrechen;

When playing a file, a coincidence check of the file name and device address is performed in the playback device, for example:

• a) Is the file name in question actually saved? If yes, then proceed to the next check, if no, then refuse playback and cancel. As an option, the File name can also be written into the non-volatile memory of the playback device.
• b) Does the device address stored under the address (reference) of this file name match the verification address stored in the file (immediately or after decryption, etc.)? If yes, playback is performed; if no, playback is denied and the process is aborted.

The file name can also consist of a higher-level address (LABEL, or name of the file supplier) and the name of the piece = actual file name, or the address of the file name can be structured in such a way that, depending on the coding (e.g. differentiated by a control bit in the file), the device address is only addressed with the higher-level file name (i.e. only addressed with the label), or can be addressed with the entire file name (if the control bit indicates this).

At first glance, this measure appears to be very simple from a technical perspective, but it is by no means trivial, as the state of the art in the marketing of such data storage devices demonstrates. For example, there are currently two opposing views regarding copyright law alone: that of publishers, especially music publishers, and that of copier manufacturers for copying data storage devices. The proposal, which is made here solely for the (to be regarded as independent) further development of the invention, is precisely the opposite: the music industry, and ditto the publishers, should become the driving force for copier manufacturers, and conversely, the copier manufacturers should increase publishers' sales. Instead of copiers, a data storage device for compressed files (such as MP3s) is used, into which the data can be written and transported via the data storage device (as a mini device, plug-in card, etc.) to another location and reloaded onto a corresponding playback device.

This method also allows different storage media suppliers to block access to the storage media they supply, if necessary or if they detect that tampered media are being played on a device. The supplier can block access to only the storage media they supply by using an address that differs from the other suppliers' labels as part of the compared code for the assigned device address. The only address that must be reserved by agreement (like a trademark) is the supplier's label, as the parent address. This allows different labels to use identical filename addresses to optimally utilize the storage space in the playback device's non-volatile memory.

The present method, both according to claim 1 and the one discussed in the preview just given, goes far beyond a general program for data processing and can, in addition to the usual implementation with a microprocessor or a computer program, also be implemented in hardware logic, e.g. by a state machine sequencer, etc., or by a DSP program of a digital signal processor.

For deleting the non-volatile memory, which relates to the information of a file both for the method specified in claim 1 (or 2) and for the general copy protection method of a file, the same measures as in the further development claims can be used.

Inventive problem in the context of the prior art:

• In addition to the already huge advantage of this advanced version, a major incentive to purchase such a device is that while the user can access demonstration files in their entirety (e.g., free of charge), despite unlimited selection from the entire file size, the file can only be played back to a limited extent (in terms of volume!). This means it's like television commercials: just when things get at their most interesting, the show ends. However, the difference is that the user can freely select the interesting parts from the entire volume.
• ☺ Since the user can test a wide variety of music, videos, radio plays, read books, etc., using this completely new method for free, such a device will, on the one hand, spread rapidly, and, on the other, publishers and the music industry will finally be able to provide their data storage devices with usable, device-specific copy protection. Of course, a variant is also feasible in which, for example, the portable device is connected to a computer (PC, notebook, etc.), enabling playback of the downloaded data storage devices directly on the PC if the user, for example, does not have a CD burner to burn a CD.
• Thus, taking into account the great advantage that can be achieved with the invention for industrial exploitation, taking into account Considering the state of the art, the technical problem itself is already to be regarded as particularly inventive.

During the technical implementation, particular attention was paid to ensuring that the file size limit cannot be circumvented by repeatedly downloading or obtaining files. This process also takes special cases, such as a device defect, loss of the device, or a new purchase of the device, into account to prevent misuse as much as possible.

The main application of the invention is to play back sample excerpts from a file (sample file) freely selected by the user, thereby encouraging the user to purchase the file or full access to it (full file). Once authorized access to the file has been obtained, the user can only play the file on their device.

For the first variant (limited playback of a sample file), even with a smaller playback device, a device address is generally not required for a few hundred files (as long as the non-volatile memory is not erased, see later). This means that the user can load and play the same file from another user and still not exceed the volume played on their device, even if the user from whom they obtained the file played completely different sections (they still cannot play these sections). For a larger number of files (practically infinite), it is necessary to delete the non-volatile memory, whose contents prevent playback beyond the specified limit, or even to delete it only partially (because it is full). In this case, a device address is also used for files from which only test excerpts are to be played. This is done by the server reconfiguring the playback device accordingly via the Internet.

Since each playback device is coded with a different device address, the server can allow the deletion of the non-volatile memory (of the device) whose contents prevent playback beyond the specified limit, e.g., only every few months, etc.

The second variant (unlimited playback of a full file) concerns the possibility of unrestricted playback of a file. For this purpose, it is advisable to encrypt a device address in the file, which is checked when the device is loaded for a match with the one configured in the device. Unrestricted playback is only possible if this match is met. As will be explained in more detail later, the device address in the playback device is configured via the Internet by a server using a key procedure. A device can also persistently store multiple device addresses for different purposes. For example, one device address used for files that can be played back to their full extent and one device address used only for files that can be played back to a limited extent, if necessary (if the device's non-volatile memory needs to be erased so that the file entries for new files can be managed). Or, associated device addresses (even repeating ones) can be configured for several different labels (via which the files are retrieved).

The state of the art and common practice is the reproduction of excerpts from works, e.g., readings from books, broadcast on radio, and distribution via various data storage media. A preselected excerpt (or several excerpts) is made available to an interested party in the hope that they will then purchase the work. This practice is common both in print media and using electronic media (the internet, etc.).

Another very common method according to the state of the art (for a more distant comparison) is to provide data processing software with fixed, restricted use to the customer for a demonstration, e.g. preventing the saving of edited files, or counting certain processing steps, e.g. setting eyes (solder pads, vias, etc.) on programs for the creation of layout patterns for the production of printed circuit boards, etc.

The application of the method specified in claim 1 of the present invention is primarily aimed at the playback of files (acoustically or visually). However, it also includes measures for processing the files using the preferred encoding/decoding of parameters and addresses, e.g., for generating the division of sections and their length assignments, etc.

The technical task of the invention is therefore to fundamentally improve the usual static limitation of a file for the usual reproduction to fixed extracts (e.g. of a work, book, CD, etc.) in such a way that a dynamic limitation of the file to extracts freely selected by the user is possible without the system being able to be circumvented.

• das Abspielgerät;
• das Laden von Dateien in das Abspielgerät (z.B. über das Internet);
• die Zugangskontrolle zu Auszügen, bzw. Abschnitten einer wiederzugebenden Datei, wobei die Datei unmittelbar autark am Abspielgerät wiedergegeben wird, oder über einen Computer, bei dem das Abspielgerät nur die Dateieinträge (zur Begrenzung) verwaltet;
• die Unterbringung von Paramterwerten und Adressen direkt in einem Audiosignal ohne daß das Format, in welchem das Audiosignal gespeichert ist, zu beeinflußen bzw. zu ändern;
• die nachträgliche Erweiterung des Umfanges für den Zugang, oder das Abschalten der Zugangskontrolle für eine wiederzugebende Datei;

und als Erweiterungsoption:

• die Bindung des Abspielgerätes an eine bestimmte Person, in technischer Hinsicht an ein persönlich genutztes Netz (z.B. Telefon, Handy, etc.) oder auch an die Stimme des Benutzers, insbesondere für die Konfiguration der Geräteadressen, sowie für das Löschen des genannten nicht flüchtigen Speichers, dessen Inhalt die Wiedergabe einer Datei über das vorgegebene Limit hinaus verhindert und das Freischalten einer Datei zur uneingeschränkten Nutzung ermöglicht.
• ➯ Dabei ermöglicht dieses neue Verfahren, daß aus einer jeweils geladenen vollständigen Datei unter Benutzung einer strukturierten Adressierung (z.B. Seitenadressen eines Buches, etc.) jeweils beliebig frei zu wählende Teile, bzw. Abschnitte (als Auszüge aus der vollständigen Datei) dem Benutzer zugänglich gemacht werden, wobei das gesamte Volumen (als Summe) dieser frei wählbaren Auszüge gegenüber dem Volumen der vollständig geladenen Datei in vordefinierter Weise begrenzt ist; z.B. im einfachsten Fall als bestimmter Prozentsatz der gesamten Datei.

The invention includes:

• the playback device;
• loading files into the playback device (e.g. via the Internet);
• access control to excerpts or sections of a file to be played back, whereby the file is played back directly and independently on the playback device, or via a computer, where the playback device only manages the file entries (for limitation purposes);
• the placement of parameter values and addresses directly in an audio signal without influencing or changing the format in which the audio signal is stored;
• the subsequent extension of the scope of access or the deactivation of access control for a file to be played;

and as an extension option:

• the binding of the playback device to a specific person, in technical terms to a personally used network (e.g. telephone, mobile phone, etc.) or even to the voice of the user, in particular for the configuration of the device addresses, as well as for the deletion of the aforementioned non-volatile memory, the content of which prevents the playback of a file beyond the specified limit and enables the release of a file for unrestricted use.
• ➯ This new procedure allows for freely selectable parts or sections (as extracts from the complete file) to be made available to the user from a loaded complete file using a structured addressing (e.g. page addresses of a book, etc.), whereby the total volume (as a sum) of these freely selectable extracts is limited in a predefined way compared to the volume of the fully loaded file; e.g. in the simplest case as a certain percentage of the entire file.

Such as, for example, a certain percentage of a text present as an audio signal from a read-aloud book, a newspaper, etc., with a special feature that differs from the state of the art, namely that the part (excerpt) to be selected is not predetermined when the file (or a data carrier in question) is created, and that an optimized process or system is provided that ensures that this special feature cannot be circumvented by multiple users using a playback device.

The percentage by which the individual sections of the file marked by addresses (ADD, code) add up can be classified differently, e.g., for titles or headlines, 0%, i.e., the titles or headlines are not added up at all or do not influence the total volume. After the title, for example, the first few sentences are counted at 10%, i.e., their length is only evaluated at 10% in the summation, and the further text passages are counted at 100% of their length, whereby, for example, a total of 20% of the total length of the text (e.g., spoken as an audio signal) should be freely available. This means that the text of the section marked by ADD is limited to 20% in its maximum playback length. This means that for each of the individual sections, a length limit can be selectively defined for each section to prevent the entire section from being played back. Alternatively, this length limit can also be defined as a volume limit within a section, meaning that a specific percentage of the section can be freely selected and played back by the user. As always, global parameter presets can also be made within a file (e.g., maximum playback length of a section = 20%, etc.).

• - die maximale absolute Länge des Abschnittes, von START an gemessen,
• - der maximale Prozentsatz der Länge des Abschnittes, frei wählbar innerhalb des Abschnittes,
• - der Wert der Länge in % des Abschnittes, wie er für die Aufsummierung des Volumens gewertet wird,
• - und weiters noch eine optionale Angabe, ob nach Erreichen der Begrenzung eines Abschnittes (z.B. der maximalen Länge) die Wiedergabe beim nächsten Abschnitt, bzw. bei der nächsten START Adresse fortgesetzt werden soll, oder einfach angehalten werden soll.

This means that for each section address, hereinafter referred to as the START address (with which a section is called up), the following parameters for limiting playback can be added:

• - the maximum absolute length of the section, measured from START,
• - the maximum percentage of the length of the section, freely selectable within the section,
• - the value of the length in % of the section as it is used for the summation of the volume,
• - and furthermore an optional indication as to whether, after reaching the limit of a section (e.g. the maximum length), playback should continue at the next section or at the next START address, or simply be stopped.

• ➯ Im Besonderen ermöglicht das gleiche Gerät zwar die Mehrfachnutzung zur Wiedergabe von aus der jeweils geladenen vollständigen Datei beliebig frei zu wählender Teile, bzw. Abschnitte, gegebenenfalls auch unter mehreren Benutzern bei Einhaltung der vordefinierten Volumensbegrenzung unabhängig davon wieviele Benutzer das Gerät verwenden, es ermöglicht jedoch vor allem nach einer gesonderten Freischaltung (unter Berücksichtigung der vorgesehenen Schlüssel für diese Freischaltung), auch nur die ausschließliche Einfachnutzung zur gesamten Wiedergabe der vollständigen Datei für nur einen autorisierten Benutzer, und zwar ohne hiefür ein Paßwort benützen zu müssen. Was den Vorteil hat, daß durch unerlaubte Weitergabe eines Paßwortes für den Zugang, die das Urheberrecht verletzen würde, diese Schutzmaßnahme nicht unterlaufen werden kann. Es sind sogar Maßnahmen vorgesehen, daß bei Weitergabe des Gerätes mitsamt der geladenen Datei(en) ein weiterer Benutzer das Gerät nur mit großen Einschränkungen nutzen kann.

Depending on the effort, you can also define sub-addresses, with corresponding different parameter assignments, etc. These sub-addresses cannot then be directly They cannot be jumped to, but are used only as labels for assigning different parameters. The length (of a section) is measured depending on the medium being reproduced (e.g., acoustic or moving images) as a measure of time, or in the case of text, in the number of words, or in the case of music, e.g., in the number of bars, etc., or even as a percentage of the entire section.

• ➯ In particular, the same device allows multiple use to play back freely selectable parts or sections of the loaded complete file, if necessary even among multiple users, provided the predefined volume limit is observed, regardless of how many users are using the device. However, and above all after separate activation (taking into account the key provided for this activation), it also allows exclusive single use to play back the entire file for only one authorized user, and without the need for a password. This has the advantage that this protective measure cannot be circumvented by the unauthorized disclosure of a password for access, which would infringe copyright. There are even measures in place to ensure that if the device is passed on along with the loaded file(s), another user can only use the device with severe restrictions.

• ➯ Oder das Gerät eignet sich auch sehr gut für ein Autoradio mit integrierter Funktelefon/Handy Verbindung, mit der Option, daß z.B. Buchtexte, Zeitungen, usw. neben der Möglichkeit sie über Datenträger wiederzugeben auch über Internet geladen werden können, z.B. um Auszüge (als Hörbücher) zu hören und anschließend vom Heim PC aus einen Titel (Musik, vorgelesenes Bucht, etc.) als unbegrenzt wiederzugebenden Datei zu kaufen, wobei über die Funktelefon/Handy Verbindung des Autoradios die Datei in das Autoradio als MP3 von einem Server geladen wird, während der Benutzer an seinem Heim PC über das Internet mit dem Server verbunden ist. Z.B. um ein Buch zunächst auszugsweise zu hören, anschließend die gesamte Datei und das Buch zu kaufen um abwechselnd das Buch im Autoradio zu hören, oder zu Hause weiterzulesen, usw. Dabei hat der Benutzer dann die Möglichkeit über den Browser seines PCs, bzw. dessen Internetverbindung zum Server, unmittelbar die Stelle einzugeben, wo der beim Lesen des Buches aufgehört hat, wobei der Server anschließend an die Funktelefon/Handy Verbindung des Autoradios eine SMS schickt, die exakt die Sprungadresse jener Textstelle einstellt, wo der Benutzer zum Lesen aufgehört hat. Schaltet der Benutzer des Autoradios auf MP3 Rekorder um, dann kann er das gelesene Buch als vorgelesenes Buch ab der eingestellten Textstelle abhören.

A particularly preferred playback device is a portable MP3 player that also has an Internet radio. Using a buffer memory (FIFO), several programs can be recorded simultaneously for hours and the user can also permanently save and copy selected music from it. However, upon repeated playback, only excerpts can be played back, with the option to purchase the entire file.

• ➯ Or the device is also very suitable for a car radio with integrated radio telephone / mobile phone connection, with the option that, for example, book texts, newspapers, etc. can be played back via data storage devices and also loaded via the Internet, e.g. to listen to excerpts (as audio books) and then buy a title (music, a book being read aloud, etc.) as a file that can be played back indefinitely from the home PC, whereby the file is loaded into the car radio as an MP3 from a server via the radio telephone / mobile phone connection of the car radio, while the user is connected to the server via the Internet on his home PC. For example, to first listen to excerpts from a book, then purchase the entire file and the book, then alternate between listening to the book on the car radio or continuing to read at home, etc. The user can then use their PC's browser, or its internet connection to the server, to directly enter the point where they left off reading the book. The server then sends an SMS to the car radio's mobile phone connection containing the exact jump address to the point where the user left off reading. If the car radio user switches to the MP3 recorder, they can listen to the book being read aloud, starting at the selected point.

Or the user can, for example, independently of the application according to claim 1, have a subscribed newspaper read to him while driving, which he has downloaded via the radio telephone/mobile phone connection of his car radio using his home PC (by specifying the telephone number of the mobile phone in the car radio).

For this variant, it is also practical to install the radio/cell phone module outside the car radio and conceal it within the vehicle. The car radio only has a corresponding interface to the radio/cell phone/MP3 player, making it very inexpensive to implement. The radio/cell phone/MP3 player module, which is housed independently of the car radio, is also equipped with a GPS receiver so that the location can be transmitted via the radio/cell phone in the event of the vehicle being stolen. It is also practical to integrate a microphone into the car radio, which can be used to record conversations via the MP3 memory and also retrieve them via the radio/cell phone connection.

The solution to this technical problem relates to the method according to claim 1 as the essential idea of the invention with the specified developments in the subclaims and the measures for implementing the control functions for controlling access for playback, in particular when a portable device is used for playback, which can, for example, also be reduced to only part of the control functions and can be plugged into a conventional standard device (e.g. also in a car radio, etc.) as a plug-in module (if the previously described preferred option is not used).

Or the device has a modulator/transmitter to feed in via the antenna of a car radio (also via its switching with an RF relay), etc. Or these control functions can be built into an otherwise conventional portable CD player or MP3 player.

In particular, extensions are made to the file to be played back, e.g. an MP3 file or an audio file stored on a CD or a video file, etc., which involve the addition of addresses and parameters, with the associated address recognition and address checks provided in the playback device, and an evaluation of the parameters in order to implement the control functions for access. In addition to the usual storage of the file to be played back, the addresses contained in the file and their associated check functions are permanently stored in a non-volatile memory. This also includes the implementation of the deletion conditions and reinitialization when the non-volatile semiconductor read/write memory, in which the addresses controlling access to the information are permanently stored (and therefore retained when the device is switched off), is full and must therefore be deleted.

• ➯ In Weiterbildung ist die Vorgabe dieses Anteils (bzw. Prozentsatzes) durch eine Verfahrensprozedur beeinflußbar, welche den unbegrenzten Zugang (100% Zugriff) der Datei bei der Wiedergabe ermöglicht, der jedoch nur abhängig von einer Identifikation des Benutzers (bzw. des Wiedergabegerätes) vorgenommen werden kann. Und die betreffende Datei (z.B. via Internet) unter Verwendung einer entsprechenden Zugangskontrolle aktualisiert wird.

It is further provided that if a file that has already been played (heard or seen) is played repeatedly, the sections already heard or seen will still be accessible, but new sections can only be accessed as long as the amount of data limited to the intended share (e.g. corresponding to a predetermined percentage) is not exceeded.

• ➯ In a further development, the specification of this share (or percentage) can be influenced by a procedure that allows unlimited access (100% access) to the file during playback, which, however, can only be performed depending on the identification of the user (or the playback device). And the file in question is updated (e.g., via the Internet) using appropriate access control.

Let me briefly explain why a customer should buy such a device? For example, to be able to play freely selectable excerpts from a printed work, or listen to freely selectable music tracks, etc., completely legally and without infringing copyright, using the option to obtain a file from the Internet. And, if necessary, to be able to listen to the file collection loaded into the device using the MP3 format, for example, after paying a fee or after purchasing a specific book, etc., either continuously or just once (for a smaller fee). It is precisely the enormous possibilities that arise from the seamless hierarchy of access to a copyrighted work, acquired in several steps, that make the new process so economically attractive.

The inventive concept is represented by claim 1. This is followed by subclaims characterizing further developments and options for implementation.

Even if the preferred method were to be implemented exclusively by software on a computer, which is in principle possible if only a computer is used as the playback device (which can also be connected to the Internet), this is not a program used exclusively for data processing, but rather a novel memory organization, controlled by a special method, for address generation and address verification carried out to implement the preferred access control (which is controlled by this new method in a special manner corresponding to the invention). As a further example, it is preferred that the aforementioned "playback device" with the non-volatile memory, for example, only manages (stores) the file entries, but the file is played back on a computer (PC) via appropriate software. According to patent law and current case law, such a method is protected by intellectual property law even if it is implemented exclusively by software, i.e., by a data processing program, if it is also used accordingly in accordance with the inventive features.

Preferred application: A preferred application of the invention is to provide a complete (e.g. spoken) book text, or an audio file spoken in the book text (as a read-aloud text), which is encrypted ( 1 , 11 , 21 ) is loaded into the memory of a CD player or MP3 player modified for implementation of the method (e.g., via an internet connection or a data storage device), using an access control method corresponding to the technical task of the invention. For this application, the played audio file (with the spoken text) is divided into sections corresponding to the book pages, with the relevant page numbers being displayed on the device and being able to be accessed or listened to according to the user's selection.

The user can start playback of the file from any designated start address (which here, for example, corresponds to the page number of the book being read aloud and is continuously shown or can be selected by pressing a standard forward/backward step button on the display, see access/operation in 1 , 11 , 21 ).

In the hierarchy, the following addresses and parameters, classified according to priority, are provided as a protection code to control access and, in a further development of the invention, are directly included in the digital code of the audio signal. It is obvious that this example can be modified as desired using other known methods.

• - Geräteadresse:
  • Die Geräteadresse ist in der geladenen (wiederzugebenden) Datei enthalten und wird bereits beim Laden mit der im Wiedergabegerät dauerhaft abgespeicherten geprüft. Stimmt sie nicht überein, dann wird die Wiedergabe grundsätzlich verweigert (oder die Datei gleich gar nicht geladen). Die Konfiguration der Geräteadresse im Wiedergabegerät bei der Initialisierung erfolgt bevorzugt über eine zentrale Datenbank eines oder mehrerer Server im Internet und es sind entsprechende Weiterbildungsoptionen vorgesehen um zu verhindern, daß unterschiedliche Benutzer jeweils das gleiche Gerät verwenden und nachfolgend noch im Detail beschrieben.

Explanation of terms: The term "initialization" of the playback device refers to the deletion or reorganization of the stored security addresses and parameters that control the device's access. This is only possible if special security measures are observed, which are explained in more detail later. When initializing the device (e.g., using the Internet), the device address is primarily assigned. This device address has nothing to do with the data network protocol; rather, it is an identification address for the server. It is assigned not to the Internet connection, but to the playback device as an absolute and permanently stored address. It can only be changed by reinitializing the playback device.

• - Device address:
  • The device address is contained in the loaded (playable) file and is checked against the address permanently stored in the playback device during loading. If it doesn't match, playback is generally refused (or the file isn't loaded at all). The device address in the playback device is configured during initialization, preferably via a central database on one or more servers on the Internet. Corresponding configuration options are provided to prevent different users from using the same device. These options are described in more detail below.

• - Dateiname:
  • Der Dateiname ist im Kopf der geladenen (wiederzugebenden) Datei enthalten und wird bei der erstmaligen Wiedergabe der Datei in ein nichtflüchtiges Speicherregister (z.B. FLASH RAM) des Wiedergabegerätes als Bezeichner (Adresse) einer Liste, nachfolgend Dateinamenliste genannt, eingetragen und bleibt zusammen mit dieser einschließlich ihres Inhaltes bis zu einer erneuten Initialisierung (siehe erläuterter Begriff oben) des Gerätes dauerhaft gespeichert, auch wenn die Datei deren Dateiname diese Liste betrifft, aus dem Wiedergabegerät bereits wieder gelöscht (MP3) ist bzw. ein betreffender Datenträger, von dem die Wiedergabe der Datei erfolgte (z.B. eines CD-Players) zwischenzeitlich wieder entfernt worden ist. Gleichfalls dauerhaft mitgespeichert werden die in die Dateinamenliste zu einem Dateinamen jeweils zugehörig eingetragenen Parameter und Adressen, die für die Zugangssicherung der einzelnen Abschnitte bei der Wiedergabe der Datei verwendet sind, und deshalb innerhalb der Dateinamenliste als Schlüsseldaten einer betreffenden Datei bezeichnet werden.

The use of device addresses allows the server program to better control the use of files downloaded from the server's database to a user.

• - File name:
  • The file name is contained in the header of the loaded (to be played back) file and is entered into a non-volatile memory register (e.g. FLASH RAM) of the playback device when the file is played back for the first time as the identifier (address) of a list, hereinafter referred to as the file name list. This list remains permanently stored together with the list, including its contents, until the device is reinitialized (see the term explained above), even if the file whose file name relates to this list has already been deleted from the playback device (MP3) or a data medium from which the file was played back (e.g. a CD player) has been removed in the meantime. Also permanently stored are the parameters and addresses entered in the file name list belonging to a file name; these are used to secure access to the individual sections when the file is played back and are therefore referred to as key data for a particular file within the file name list.

For applications such as playing back text from books, it is still useful if the file name corresponds directly to the title of a book, etc.

A file name is created as an identifier (address) of the corresponding file name list, along with the corresponding section addresses as key data for the file, only when the file is first played back. The relevant excerpt(s) being played back are permanently stored as key data in the file name list of this file via their corresponding section addresses. For example, "File name" (page 1 to page 5 / page 10 to page 12, etc.). Of course, not the actual file is permanently stored, but only its section addresses with the corresponding current length coding (incremental as a step number, or as a time value, etc.).

• - Seitenadresse (bzw. Abschnittsadresse):
  • Die Seitenadresse ist bei diesem Beispiel jeweils die Startadresse eines über diese Startadresse jeweils abrufbaren Abschnittes der wiedergegeben Datei, bzw. hier des zugehörigen Audiosignals und entspricht hier bei diesem Beispiel (nach 1, 11,21) unmittelbar der Seitennummer des gedruckten Textes (eines Buches, oder Zeitung, etc.). Wobei diese Abschnitte mit ihren Startadressen (zu Beginn eines jeden Abschnittes) unmittelbar aneinandergereiht sind. Da zwischen den Abschnitten keine besondere Sprechpause vorgesehen ist, ist es sinnvoll bei durch einen Seitenwechsel unterbrochenem Satz, die Seitenadresse der (nächsten Seite) als Startadresse zu Beginn des Satzes, d.h. am Ende der vorherigen Seite, zu setzen.

It may be useful to provide an option for the file prepared with the section addresses, which, for example, allows for a short listening session (in seconds) of a section without the section in question being entered as a key value in the file name list. This parameter, associated with a section address of a file (see later for the [START + ADD] format), then corresponds to a delay in seconds over which a section must be played in order for it to be entered into the file name list (e.g., in a hash or an array) as a key file for access control during playback.

• - Page address (or section address):
  • The page address in this example is the start address of a section of the played file, or in this case the associated audio signal, that can be accessed via this start address and corresponds to 1 , 11 , 21 ) directly to the page number of the printed text (of a book, or newspaper, etc.). These sections are identified by their starting addresses (to beginning of each section). Since there is no special pause between the sections, it is advisable to set the page address of the (next page) as the starting address at the beginning of the sentence, i.e., at the end of the previous page, when a sentence is interrupted by a page break.

It is evident that the division into sections, or in this case page addresses, can be carried out according to any specifications. For example, subdivisions into paragraphs (page number/paragraph, e.g. 4/2 corresponding to page 4 paragraph 2) can be made, or the division into sections can be carried out according to any specifications, which is why the address referred to here as the page address is generally also referred to as the section address.

Note: When accessing or playing the file, the section addresses (here page addresses) are incremented accordingly (INCRvol) to determine the volume of the access.

For this example, the division into equal sections is proportional to the number of pages in a book (or the reproduced audio signal of a read text), i.e., the accessed volume can be directly determined from the number of pages. However, this is undesirable for many applications. For each start address of a section, the corresponding classified volume, regardless of the actual volume of the section, is added as a calculation parameter and taken into account during playback or when summing the volume. It is advisable to provide a smallest counting unit, the integer multiple of which is specified for the start address of a section. The INCRvol command (see above) then multiplies the smallest counting unit by the specified multiple and adds it to the current volume. Before each access to a new section, the access volume is checked to ensure that it has not been exceeded during this access (in order to block access to new sections). The start addresses of the sections are then also consecutively numbered so that they can be saved under a file name in a non-volatile memory.

As a second parameter, which can also be optionally added to a start address, the maximum playback length of the relevant section can also be coded.

For example, in a music CD application, the start address of interesting tracks can be assigned this additional parameter to prevent the track from being played in its entirety. Conversely, a lesser-known piece of music can be allowed in its entirety (no specification) or at a longer length, etc. The same is also useful for newspapers, for example, where certain short articles should be prevented from being played in their entirety.

As a third parameter, which can optionally be added to a start address, a delay time Delay can be coded, after which only the reproduced section belonging to the respective start address is entered into the file name list for the key data.

Thus, for a section (here a page) the following characters placed at the beginning of the section, starting with the control character [START], are encoded in the following form:

Format:

• [START]; [Option=Z]; [ADD]; [Parameter 1]; [Parameter 2]; [Parameter 3];....Audio, Audio, Audio, etc.
• [Option]; ....to a specified number of parameters optional format: specifies the number of parameters following the address [ADD].
• [ADD]........Address, consecutive number associated with the control character [START], to designate a section with this number. Associated with this address is the section length, which refers to this absolute address and indicates the end of the section. This section length can coincide with the next value of the subsequent address (seamless transitions) or end the section earlier.
• [START].....control character used uniformly for all sections marked as start address to mark the beginning of a section;
• ADD...........The consecutively numbered section address, e.g. corresponding to a corresponding page number of the text;
• [Parameter 1]......Value of the volume percentage (relative to the total file volume; see the following explanation of percentage) of the portion of the section permitted for playback. If parameter 1 is not specified, the value added to the file name as a parameter in the file header is interpreted as the default value for parameter 1.
• [Parameter 2]......Length specification, e.g., in a unit appropriate for playback (number of characters for text, time unit in s for audio or video, etc.). Once this length is reached (e.g. also as a time specification in seconds), playback of this section is stopped and the user is informed, for example, how to obtain the entire file, etc. If parameter 2 is not specified to prematurely terminate a section, then it is interpreted as a length specification coinciding with the subsequent address of a section and there is no premature selective length limitation of the section, but the limitation is only based on the percentage specified as a parameter to the file name (see next point) of the total volume.
• [Parameter 3]......Time delay as explained above. If the listened-to section is to be immediately entered into the file name list for the key data, then a zero is defined as the parameter.

In addition to the device address, a default value (as a preset) of this parameter can also be defined at the head of the file, which is inserted into the parameters whenever only a character defined as a placeholder is used instead of a parameter value.

Example of a file header:

new file..... [BEGIN]; [FILENAME of any length]; [START]; [Parameter 1 default]; [Parameter 2 default]; [Parameter 3 default]; START + ADD]; [Parameter 1]; [Parameter 2]; ....Audio, Audio, Audio, etc.

The bold italicized part corresponds to the file header. The [BEGIN] control character at the beginning of a file indicates the file name.

• Um die Steuerzeichen innerhalb eines in einem beliebigen Format gepackten, bzw. gespeicherten digitalen Audiosignals zu kodieren, kann beispielsweise ein Verfahren eines reduzierten Codes benutzt werden, bei dem z.B. der sich aus der verwendeten Bitzahl ergebende Maximalwert des Aussteuerungsbereiches um den Wert von 1 oder einige weiteren Schritte (je nach Bedarf) reduziert wird (d.h. bei der Aufbereitung des Digitalsignals als maximal mögliche Aussteuerung begrenzt wird).

Example of encoding the format in any digitized audio signal (also compressed, such as MP3):

• In order to encode the control characters within a digital audio signal packed or stored in any format, a reduced code method can be used, for example, in which the maximum value of the control range resulting from the number of bits used is reduced by the value of 1 or a few further steps (as required) (ie is limited as the maximum possible control level when processing the digital signal).

Whereby, if the key values of the analog signal correspond to a value range of e.g. +max.=01111...1110 to -max.=1000.....00001 of the two's complement representation and the actual maximum values positive=01111...1111 or negative= max= 1000.....00000 are used (reserved) as a control signal, where e.g. the control character [START] which always precedes a code sequence is to be interpreted as an equivalent positive or negative number, depending on which half-wave range, positive or negative, the reproduced audio signal is currently in.

If a digitally processed audio signal is already present, it is scanned for the maximum occurring value and if the maximum values positive = 01111...1111 or negative = max = 1000.....00000 occur, the entire signal is multiplied by a corresponding correction factor less than 1 to ensure that these values no longer occur in the audio signal.

Thus the start character is defined as [START] = (01111...1111) + (1000.....00000), where +... means an OR symbol.

Decoding a start signal [START]:

If a digital value corresponding to the digital start signal [START] is decoded, the transfer pulse for the transfer of the amplitude value corresponding to this coding is suppressed and the value is interpreted as the start signal [START].

For the register in which the respective (suppressed) amplitude value corresponding to the time frame would be written (stored), a value is set instead of the amplitude value (not present in the file). This value is derived from the previous amplitude value and the amplitude value stored after the control character as an interpolation value corresponding to the previous signal increase, even across multiple values, taking the curvature into account. This interpolation is further filtered by the reconstruction filter used during playback. The exact process will be explained later. 2 , 12 , 22 and 3 , 13 , 23 explained.

The following further definition is used:

After the recognition (decoding) of a [START] character, a certain number of parameters or addresses should be transferred (encoded) according to the counting sequence (counted parameters), whereby as an option, in addition to a fixed number of such characters, for example, the first parameter [Option=Z] before the address [ADD] also can encode or define the number of subsequent characters.

• Auf diese Weise lassen sich Parameter und Adressen an beliebiger Stelle eines mit einem linearen Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Audiosignals (CD Format, oder auch MP3, etc.) unterbringen, ohne daß man sich um das Format, in dem das Audiosignal bei der A/D-Umsetzung kodiert, bzw. bei der D/A Umsetzung wieder dekodiert wird, kümmern muß. Was große Vorteile hat, da jedes nach ISO Standart genormte Format benutzt werden kann und es ausreichend ist, unmittelbar nach der A/D Wandlung die Parameter und Adressen anstelle der dem Analogsignal entsprechenden Werte einzufügen, dito bei der Dekodierung vor der D/A Wandlung wieder abzutrennen. Es ist evident, daß sich das Verfahren für jede Art analoger Signale eignet, daher im Prinizip auch für Videosignale.
• Dabei ist es im Prinzip ausreichend, mit einem dem [START] Zeichen nachfolgenden Kontrollzeichen einen Sprunglabel zu kodieren (z.B. wenn das Datenformat als MP3 in einem RAM abgespeichert ist, und das Audiosignal sowie die Daten in getrennten Sektionen gespeichert sind) und unter diesem Sprunglabel den String mit den Steuerzeichen (Kontrollzeichen) zu speichern, oder es kann auch innerhalb des Audiosignals der komplette String von Steuerzeichen oder Kontrollzeichen untergebracht werden (z.B. wenn als Datenträger eine CD oder DVD verwendet wird, usw.).
• Um beispielsweise in einer Audiodatei die Marken mit den [START] Zeichen zu setzen, ist es ausreichend, eine Audiodatei mit einer entsprechenden Software, die um diese Funktion erweitert ist, abzuhören und an den entsprechenden Stellen z.B. über eine Tasteneingabe eine Marke zu setzen (die automatisch inkrementiert wird, z.B. Seitenzahlen erhöht) und weiters über eine Menüeingabe eine lineare oder individuelle Volumenseinheit, wie sie der Bewertung in Bezug auf die gesamte Datei zur Zugangsbegrenzung entsprechen soll, zugeordnet werden soll, weiters auch noch eine Längenbegrenzung, die gleichfalls empirisch durch Setzen betreffender Marken an den Stellen der Audiodatei vorgenommen werden kann, bzw. gegebenenfalls auch noch den gleichfalls bereits erläuterten Delay Parameter. Da die Steuerzeichen, Parameter und Adressen direkt anstelle eines Wertes des Audiosignals in das Audiosignal hineingeschrieben werden, kann eine fertige Bearbeitungssoftware zu diesem Zweck mit minimalem Aufwand modifiziert werden, um die Audiodateien mit den betreffenden Adressen zu konfigurieren. Weiters können auch nur Platzhalter vergeben werden, um abhängig vom einem laufenden Programm die Parameter und Adressen durch Zuweisungen aus Variablen zu setzen.

In the preferred coding (or preferred format), a mandatory sequence also specifies that for each parameter value P (or address, etc.) associated with the string of the [START] character, which is not to be interpreted as an amplitude value an* of the digitally coded analog signal, an analog value (IPL) corresponding to the signal rise and determined by interpolation is set at the respective time grid position (or stored for playback). An example of this will be given later. 2 , 12 , 22 and 3 , 13 , 23 explained in more detail.

• In this way, parameters and addresses can be placed anywhere in an audio signal reproduced with a linear time raster (CD format, or MP3, etc.), without having to worry about the format in which the audio signal is encoded during A/D conversion or decoded again during D/A conversion. This has significant advantages, as any ISO-standardized format can be used, and it is sufficient to insert the parameters and addresses immediately after A/D conversion in place of the values corresponding to the analog signal, and then remove them again during decoding before D/A conversion. It is evident that the method is suitable for any type of analog signal, and therefore, in principle, also for video signals.
• In principle, it is sufficient to encode a jump label with a control character following the [START] character (e.g. if the data format is stored as MP3 in a RAM, and the audio signal and the data are stored in separate sections) and to store the string with the control characters (control characters) under this jump label, or the complete string of control characters or control characters can also be accommodated within the audio signal (e.g. if a CD or DVD is used as the data carrier, etc.).
• For example, to set markers in an audio file with the [START] character, it is sufficient to listen to an audio file using appropriate software that has been expanded to include this function and to set a marker at the appropriate point, e.g. via a keystroke (which is automatically incremented, e.g. page numbers are increased). Furthermore, via a menu entry, a linear or individual volume unit is to be assigned, which should correspond to the rating in relation to the entire file for access restriction. Furthermore, a length limit, which can also be set empirically by setting the relevant markers at the relevant points in the audio file, or if necessary also the delay parameter already explained. Since the control characters, parameters and addresses are written directly into the audio signal instead of a value of the audio signal, ready-made editing software can be modified for this purpose with minimal effort in order to configure the audio files with the relevant addresses. Furthermore, only placeholders can be assigned in order to set the parameters and addresses by assigning variables, depending on the program being run.

• an540; [START]; an541; [Option=*Z]; an542; [*0]; an543;[*1]; an544; an545; an546....

For playback, it is sufficient if the start character [START] is decoded as the first character of a control character string to start a multiplexer process according to a forced sequence, in which the next but one and all subsequent values arriving at an odd-numbered position (relative to the decoding of [START]) of the time grid are interpreted as belonging to the control character [*], and all values arriving in between at an even-numbered position of the time grid are interpreted as belonging to the analog signal [an*], as the following scheme illustrates:

• an540; [START]; an541; [Option=*Z]; an542; [*0]; an543;[*1]; an544; an545; an546....

The [START] character decoded as an amplitude value (01111...1111) or (1000.....00000) during processing (A/D conversion) of the analog signal switches to the interpretation as a parameter to be interpreted for the time clock after the next but one (with which the values of the digitized analog signal are transported), i.e. after the amplitude value an541, and the value of [*Z] is read, in which the value Z=1 is located, which means that two more parameters ([*0] and [*1] follow), with values in between being interpreted as amplitude values an542 and an543 (switched with a toggle function corresponding to a clocked flip-flop, whose clock activation or reset or output value is set by the decoded [START] character, and clock deactivation is determined by the Z parameter or the number of coded parameters). It is evident that the number of defined parameters can also be much larger (e.g. Z=10, etc.)

The interpretation for the assignment of the values obtained via the parameter list [*;] to the assigned variables or addresses is done by a list that is independent of the audio signal of the file (to Beginning) after the file name and the device address is passed from the file to the playback device and can also be modified within the file by using further code sequences each introduced with [START], etc.

The control character [START], which can be directly coded in any digital audio signal, can be compared with the control character ESCAPE commonly used in data technology in order to code any code sequence for any purpose.

After the last parameter character P (in this example P=[*1]) has been recognized (and counted accordingly) by definition using [*Z], all subsequent characters are again interpreted as amplitude values an544; an545; an546....; etc.

• - Prozentangabe:
  • Die Prozentangabe ist in der geladenen (wiederzugebenden) Datei als Parameter angegeben (z.B. nach dem Dateinamen) und betrifft die Angabe des zulässigen Anteils (z.B. in Prozent der gesamt vorhandenen Seitenzahl, etc.), der in freier Auswahl des Benutzers dem Benutzer zugänglich gemacht werden soll.
• - Prüfung der Prozentangabe: Bei jeder Wiedergabe eines neuen Abschnittes einer Datei wird als erster Schritt unter der Adresse des Dateinamens im nicht flüchtigen Speicher (falls noch nicht angelegt, wird diese Adresse in die betreffende Liste der Datei nach Ablauf der im Delay Parameter definierten Zeit aufgenommen) geprüft, ob die Abschnittsadresse ADD des aktuell wiederzugebenden Abschnittes (hier Seite) unter der Adresse des betreffenden Dateinamens bereits abgelegt ist ?:

Non-volatile memory: A FLASH semiconductor memory can be used as a non-volatile read-write memory, for example, or an electromechanical memory (hard disk), from which a volatile memory RAM is usually loaded when the device is switched on.

• - Percentage:
  • The percentage is specified as a parameter in the loaded (to be played) file (e.g. after the file name) and concerns the specification of the permissible proportion (e.g. in percent of the total number of pages available, etc.) that is to be made accessible to the user in a freely selectable manner.
• - Checking the percentage: Each time a new section of a file is played, the first step is to check whether the section address ADD of the section currently being played (here page) is already stored at the address of the file name in the non-volatile memory (if not already created, this address will be added to the relevant list of the file after the time defined in the delay parameter has elapsed):

If so, the INCRvol command, which increments the counter to continuously determine the accessed volume, or (in the case of unequal sections) to continuously add the volume when accessing the section of this (already stored section address or page address), is not executed, and the relevant section (e.g., a specific page address) is played back (e.g., as an audio file of a spoken text from a specific book page). In other words, the INCRvol command is not executed until the already played portion of a section has been reached during playback.

If not, the INCRvol command is executed on the section of this (already saved section address or page address), i.e., the counter is incremented, or (if the volume fractions of the sections are unequal), the volume specified at the start address of the section is added while the volume is being added. The result is then compared with the percentage (as a data value) to determine whether the currently summed volume exceeds the specified percentage from the file. If so, the list containing the previously executed sections under the file name (as an identifier or address) in non-volatile memory is locked, and the start address of the section is no longer included in this list. If, however, the currently summed volume has not yet been exceeded, the start address is included in the list of the file name, and the relevant section is played back.

The status no also corresponds to this query if a section that has already been marked as played (by the preferred storage) is exceeded during playback, ie the exceeded part of the section is continuously checked for the specified maximum permissible volume and is permanently saved when the section is finished (see the following detailed explanation of 4 . 14 , 24 ).

This means that specific locations on the storage medium itself do not have to be directly assigned to which the user can or cannot access, as has been the case up to now. Instead, the selection of sections to be divided into arbitrary sections is left to the user. For example, after reading a section, they can listen to the next section or a newly selected section, etc. Only the total number of sections is monitored for access restriction. However, additional individual section restrictions can also be used (e.g., via the length parameter).

Preference List Option: Another option is to define a parameter at the top of the file to be played as a preference list. This parameter contains a series of preferred start addresses (ADD) that the file creator considers particularly interesting. By pressing a special key, these start addresses of preferred sections (e.g., pages) are displayed to the user (with forward/backward function) in sequence (e.g., as page numbers), with a higher-level switching to the user's personal selection. It is useful to to include a text file in the source file, which contains an overview of the individual chapters (corresponding to the start addresses to be jumped to), etc. By using the device in conjunction with a PC connected to the Internet, this selection can be further improved through appropriate menu navigation.

1 , 11 , 21 concerns the example in which the sections of an audio signal, each indicated by start addresses and otherwise arranged one after the other without additional pauses, are divided according to the pages of a (read aloud) book (or radio play, etc.). Thus, the summation of the current volume can be achieved without taking any further volume information into account using a simple counter Z in the program of the relevant processor, which is incremented each time the above-mentioned (and thus named) INCRvol command is executed. The counter counts in a counting unit defined by a parameter (e.g., one unit every 20 seconds of playback time, etc.). In the non-volatile memory, the total counter reading for each file is also stored in the list of sections already played (here page numbers) at a specific position (e.g., position 0), so that it can be loaded into the RAM of the processor (e.g., DSP) when the playback device is switched on.

In a further development of the process, it is optionally possible to dynamically control the extent of the limited data volume (i.e., the predefined percentage) to which the user has access. This is done so that, for example, upon purchase and payment for a book, the customer (or user) has free access to the entire spoken text of the book. This is achieved by appropriately marking the file corresponding to the book (via the percentage indication) when the customer downloads the file in question as an upgrade via the Internet (which can also be done in a bookstore, etc.). In addition to the option of attaching a one-time password to a device address as a scratch-off note or in a sealed envelope, the bookstore can also activate the access (via the Internet) to the device address of the playback device.

This allows the user to have the book "read to" them via audio playback, then continue reading the book themselves, and then have the continuation read to them again, alternating as often as they wish. To better protect copyright, this extended function, which allows the user to access the full contents of the file, should only be available to the person authorized as a user upon purchase of the book, and the use of technical means should make it less attractive to share the playback device. This corresponds to the additional task specified below.

Additional technical tasks.

The additional technical challenge concerns the connection of the device (which is identified by the permanently stored device address) to the user. Two variants are proposed here.

For both variants, for example, using a computer connected to the Internet, an initialization procedure is carried out using the method described in the pre-registration. DE 10 2004 046 413.8 specified procedure.

In the pre-registration DE 10 2004 046 413.8 A procedure was specified with which the location of a computer, e.g. an Internet connection, can be linked to any telephone connection that is independent of the computer's Internet connection in a tamper-proof manner, while excluding the possibility of manipulating the detection procedure for this connection if, for example, another telephone connection were used for this purpose.

In this procedure, the method specified here is used for optional further training. DE 10 2004 046 413.8 used in such a way that when a file is downloaded over the Internet, the playback of the downloaded files is only possible, or these files can only be used in the device, if the device address stored in the device corresponds to an identifier that the server downloading the file checks and also checks whether the device or the device address belongs to the user whose password is used when logging into the relevant web page (to download the file) for the telephone connection to which the web page is linked using the procedure with 10 2004 046 413.8.

Practical example with reference to Fig.1, Fig.11,Fig.21 with extension option according to DE 10 2004 046 413.8 for initialization:

The playback device is an MP3 player which is equipped with a special chip (e.g. DSP) to carry out the process and which, in addition to the audio playback, has a standard file storage, a keypad with additional keys in addition to the standard control keys to To jump to encoded positions in an audio signal. This can also encode every page of a spoken text, for example, and even highlight paragraphs. It is advisable to provide an interface between the device and a computer (PC, notebook) so that the device's starting position can be found even via a computer with its far better menu structuring capabilities. Otherwise, it is advisable to make text input (if desired) compatible with SMS input on a mobile phone.

Furthermore, the device contains a display on which the names of the files contained in the MP3 file (in this case book titles) can be shown directly, as well as the page numbers to identify sections into which an audio file is divided and which relate, for example, to the reading text of a book, a drama, or a radio play, etc.

For the MP3 player configuration, the system is structured so that loading the data storage is only possible with the involvement of the web server from which the tracks are downloaded. The initial loading requires a one-time initialization of the playback device, during which the encrypted device address is permanently written into the device and stored non-volatilely (e.g., in a flash memory, etc.). For the CD or DVD player configuration, the file must also be obtained from a web server, in which case the user must then burn the CD or DVD themselves.

In both cases, the device's address can be assigned, for example, via a web page linked to the telephone number of a telephone or cell phone. During subsequent downloads (via a computer connected to the Internet), it is always checked whether the user of the web page via which files are (to be) loaded onto the device has access to the corresponding telephone number during the download process. This procedure is not available, for example, in bookstores, where the customer can present their playback device so that, upon purchase of a book, the corresponding file is either loaded directly onto the device (e.g., as an MP3) or a CD is burned with a file downloaded from the Internet. Before burning, this CD is further processed using a corresponding computer, into which the device address of the playback device is read directly via the device connection, so that the correct device address is included in the file. Or, if necessary, a new (additionally valid) device address can be assigned, which the user can then later adapt to his device using the Internet and his web page access linked to him via a personal telephone number, using the server, etc.

Is the option of additional use of the procedure after the DE 10 2004 046 413.8 If use is made of this option, then each time the user loads a file over the Internet, the server checks whether the device address stored in the playback device in a non-volatile manner corresponds to the telephone number that was assigned by the server to the user of the device when the device was first initialised or, where appropriate, when a correction was made (in order to link the initialisation to a changed telephone number) via a file loaded into the recording device in connection with this initialisation process by saving it in the non-volatile memory.

• Vorgangsweise, um die Anbindung der Telefonnummer an den Client- Rechner, über den eine Datei zur Verwendung an dem das erfindungsgemäße Verfahren betreffende Wiedergabegerät heruntergeladen werden soll, zu überprüfen:
  1. a) Der Benutzer ruft von seinem Telefon (oder Handy, etc.) eine automatisierte Servicenummer, welche den Server der betreffenden WEB-Seite (oder einen weiteren Verbindungsserver, etc.) betrifft an, wobei gegebenenfalls eine geringe Gebühr zusätzlich noch abgebucht wird, um die Kosten des nachfolgenden Rückrufes (voice over IP) des Servers zu decken. Wobei bei diesem Anruf des Benutzers der Benutzer das Mikrofon seines Telefons an den Lautsprecher seines über das Internet mit dem betreffenden Server verbundenen (Client) Rechners hält, um (z.B. nach Drücken eines Buttons der betreffenden WEB-Seite) das aus dem Lautsprecher seines Rechners wiedergegebene, vom Server ausgesendete Kennsignal über die Telefonverbindung an den Server zurück zu senden. Dieses Kennsignal betrifft einerseits eine verschlüsselte Adresse und bestätigt dem Server, welcher aktuellen Sitzung er die den Telefonanruf entsprechenden Gebühren (als Kostenersatz für den Rückruf) zuordnen soll, andererseits enthält dieses Kennsignal, die aus Sicherheitsgründen dem Server zweifach übermittelte Geräeteadresse, einmal über die Internetverbindung und einmal über die akustische Kopplung (über Lautsprecher des Client- Rechners und Mikrofon des Telefons). Die aktuelle Sitzung kann dabei als Absender des Benutzers auch nur eine einmalig für die Sitzung verwendete, vom Server des Providers vergebene IP- Adresse betreffen.
  2. b) Über die erhaltene Geräteadresse identifiziert der Server die Telefonnummer, die er zurückrufen soll. Die Telefonnummer, die den Server angerufen hatte, kann dabei auch eine andere, beliebige sein (Festnetz, etc.), da die über diesen Telefonanruf gut geschriebenen Gebühren, zunächst jener Sitzung (WEB-Seite) gut geschrieben werden, über welche der Server durch die akustische Kopplung die Geräteadresse erhalten hat. Über diese aktuelle Sitzung (WEB-Seite) prüft der Server, ob das bei seinem initialisierten Rückruf (nach einer Sprachansage und nach Auslösung durch einen Start Button der WEB-Seite) an die WEB-Seite (über den Lautsprecher des Client-Rechners und Mikrofon des Telefons) gesendete und über die Telefonverbindung zurück erhaltene Kennsignal (verschlüsseltes Signal mit jeweils einmaliger Verwendung) auch übereinstimmt (betreffend der zuvor beim erhaltenen Anruf festgestellten aktuellen Sitzung mit der zugehörigen Geräteadresse).

In further development, the procedure is as follows: If the user wants to download a file from the Internet for use (regardless of whether directly, e.g. as an MP3 file, or via a subsequently created data carrier, such as a CD, etc.), then they connect their playback device via a corresponding port on the computer (USB, etc.) via which they have access to their hard disk (this can also be the connection of a network card, etc.), whereby the device address of the playback device is first copied to the hard disk via this connection, or if access to the disk via the Internet is to be blocked, it is saved in the area for cookies, or can also be copied to the copy storage (clipboard), from where the user can copy it into a corresponding window of the relevant WEB page by simply using the copy function. If the device address is visible to everyone, this usually does not play a special role, since firstly the playback device can only be configured via an encrypted file with the device address, and secondly a file can only be played on the device if it contains the correct device address, and furthermore the device address with a currently loaded file can still be encrypted in any way (so that if the device address remains the same, the visibly displayed address changes from file to file, etc.).

• Procedure for checking the connection of the telephone number to the client computer via which a file is to be downloaded for use on the playback device relating to the method according to the invention:
  1. a) The user calls an automated service number from his telephone (or mobile phone, etc.) mer, which concerns the server of the respective web page (or another connecting server, etc.), whereby a small additional fee may be debited to cover the costs of the subsequent callback (voice over IP) from the server. During this call, the user holds their telephone microphone to the loudspeaker of their (client) computer connected to the respective server via the Internet in order to send the identification signal emitted by the server, played through their computer's loudspeaker, back to the server via the telephone connection (e.g. after pressing a button on the respective web page). This identification signal consists of an encrypted address and confirms to the server which current session the server should assign the corresponding charges for the telephone call to (as reimbursement for the callback costs). This identification signal also contains the device address, which is transmitted to the server twice for security reasons, once via the Internet connection and once via the acoustic coupling (via the loudspeaker of the client computer and the telephone's microphone). The current session can also refer to an IP address assigned by the provider's server, which is used once for the session, as the user's sender.
  2. b) Using the received device address, the server identifies the telephone number it should call back. The telephone number that called the server can also be any other telephone number (landline, etc.), since the charges credited for this telephone call are initially credited to the session (website) through which the server received the device address via the acoustic coupling. Using this current session (website), the server checks whether the identification signal (an encrypted signal with a one-time use) sent to the web site (via the client computer's loudspeaker and the telephone's microphone) during its initial callback (after a voice announcement and after being triggered by a start button on the web site) and received back via the telephone connection matches (regarding the current session previously determined during the received call with the corresponding device address).

If the proximity of the telephone line (or mobile device) to the computer in use is detected via the acoustic connection established with the user of the client computer, the telephone number called, or the data transmitted to the client computer (sent and received by the server), then the user is considered authorized. Of course, depending on the application, a password and an additional access number may also be used.

If necessary, the DE 10 2004 046 413.8 The already proposed verification of the telephone connection by monitoring the available bandwidth by servers has been used to prevent the possibility of manipulation using an additional telephone line. DE 10 2004 046 413.8 As already stated, the signal is tuned according to a running time grid using a filter implemented in the software in the server in order to obtain a bandwidth limit that corresponds to the time grid. For the signal transmitted back to the server via the acoustic coupling (loudspeaker of the client computer / telephone microphone of the telephone or cell phone, or microphone of the client computer / loudspeaker of the telephone or cell phone), a further filter is then implemented in the software in the server, which is also tuned according to this time function (or this time grid). This filter reverses the process when the audio signal transmitted as a file is sent out so that, taking into account the permitted bandwidth of the telephone channel used, the original signal is obtained again in terms of frequency dependence. An alternative to this method is to examine the received signal with an FFT (Fast Fourier Transformation) to determine whether it has a frequency influence.

It is also possible to provide the Internet connection directly in the playback device.

Explanation of the figures:

1 , 11 , 21 already explained.

2 , 12 , 22 relates to a pulse scheme for implementing the already explained preferred coding of the control characters (X) nested in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters P, addresses, etc., which are not associated with the analog signal an*, wherein a linear output time pattern (corresponding to output clock AST) is used and the resulting time offset is compensated by a phase jump of the input clock EST at the time positions X at which the control characters are positioned. 6c , 16c , 26c This phase jump (phi) of EST is illustrated: During the phase initiated by the START character of a certain number of control characters, which is determined by the value of the character Z = value following the START character, switches to each time frame X of a control character the output Q=log.1 of a flip-flop FF2 ( 6b , 16b , 26b) , whereby the time for generating the (here) positive clock edge EST is extended to such an extent that EST no longer occurs in the current time frame X, but at the beginning of the subsequent time frame of a value an* of the analog signal, whereby the actual clock edge EST of the analog signal value an*, which is still present in the time frame, is retained and after this first clock edge generated by the phase jump phi of the clock, occurs as the second clock edge EST within the time frame of an*. This means that the number of read-in clock pulses EST generated by the single-stage FIFO register ( 3 , 13 , 23 ) does not change and therefore corresponds to the number of FIFO readout cycles generated according to a linear (i.e., regular) time pattern. Since in this variant each control character (X) is followed by an analog signal value an*, a single-stage FIFO delay is sufficient (although with a different sequence, the FIFO can then be adapted accordingly, configured with multiple stages, etc.).

The clock pulse omitted in the time interval X of a control character is therefore made up for in the following time interval of the following analog value an*. 2 , 12 , 22 As can be seen, the readout clock AST of the FIFO is leading the source clock of the readout clock EST (see also preEST, EST in 3b , 13 , 23 ), i.e. first read from the FIFO (with linear time grid) and then subsequently written, after a time interval X of a control character (in which no value is written into the FIFO), in the following time interval (from an*) the calculated interpolation value an-1(IPL) is first written and also read out by the output clock AST (as belonging to the time grid of the previous value) and then the analog value an(ES) occurring in this time grid is written into the FIFO, which, however, is only read out again in the next time grid (e.g. X) by the output clock AST; where this time grid (instead of X) can also relate to a value an* of a series of values of the audio signal that continues after a control character string inserted into the audio values, etc.

• SPW....die Reihe der Symbole, wie sie dem Datenträger, bzw. der Datenquelle entsprechenden Werte (über die Zeitachse t aufgetragen) entsprechen, wobei an11....an25 der Amplitude entsprechende Amplitudenwerte sind, START das dekodierte Startzeichen (01111...1111 oder 1000.....00000) betrifft, Z, dem Wert für die Zählerangabe zum Abzählen der nachfolgenden Kontrollzeichen, bestehend aus Parametern und Adressen P betrifft. Wobei hier nur drei dieser Kontrollzeichen P eingezeichnet sind, jedoch auch beliebig mehr verwendet sein können.
• IPW....entsprechen den durch Interpolation erhaltenen Amplitudenwerten, wie sie zu den zeitlichen Positionen, an denen die Kontrollzeichen kodiert sind, für die Ausgabe ASL (vgl. 3, 13, 23) verwendet werden.

In the 2 , 12 , 22 The diagram drawn along the time axis means:

• SPW....the series of symbols corresponding to the values of the data carrier or data source (plotted over the time axis t), where an11....an25 are the amplitude values corresponding to the amplitude, START refers to the decoded start character (01111...1111 or 1000.....00000), Z refers to the value for the counter specification for counting the subsequent control characters, consisting of parameters and addresses P. Only three of these control characters P are shown here, but any number of them can be used.
• IPW....correspond to the amplitude values obtained by interpolation, as they are at the time positions at which the control characters are coded, for the ASL output (cf. 3 , 13 , 23 ) be used.

ES......refers to the values corresponding to the data source, where X indicates the decoded control characters. The control characters are not written to the FIFO ( 3 , 13 , 23 ), which is intended exclusively for the temporally correct (with a linear time grid) playback of the audio signal. Instead, it is stored in a separate latch or memory area (DEC) and decoded ditto (see Latch outputs as the current memory address for control characters, and START output for the decoded start signal of the character string).

The 3 / 3b , 13 , 23 , 13b , 23b The clock signal preEST, which is shown in advance of the clock signal EST to be generated, corresponds to a linear time grid (with regular time intervals) and saves the control characters (or the start character START to be decoded) in good time.

With START a flip flop (see to 6c and 6a , 16c and 26a) which is clocked with the clock of the characters on the data carrier and whose output indicates whether the code read from the data carrier is a directly coded analog value or a control character. Since in this example in 2 , 12 , 22 Z=3, after the third control character P, the flip-flop is set again so that its output corresponds to the constant interpretation of the characters as analog values (an24, an25, etc.). A detailed implementation example is given for 6a /16a/26a to 6c /16c/16c is explained in more detail.

ASL....concerns in 2 , 12 , 22 the values output to the D/A converter or to the reconstruction of the digitized analog signal with a linear time raster (AST), where AST is the readout clock (the positive clock edge) of the 3 , 13 , 23 shown FIFO memory register (which is realized, for example, within a DSP by a RAM register).

The read-in clock EST (also positive clock edge) is initially generated from the common preparation clock for the read-out clock AST as A source clock signal (preEST) is generated, whereby a clock signal (EST) that lags preEST sufficiently behind preEST by the setup time (and delay time) corresponds to the FIFO read-in clock signal. However, with the difference to preEST that preEST, like AST, has a regular linear time pattern, while the read-in clock signal (EST) has a corresponding phase shift (phi) depending on whether a control character or check character is currently being coded. Furthermore, preEST (ditto EST) is offset from the read-out clock signal (AST) such that the character (data) previously read into the FIFO with EST is read out with the subsequent read-out clock signal (AST) if the character sequence has a continuous series of analog values.

• Fall 1: Es wurde seit Beendigung einer gelesenen Kontrollzeichenkette (String von X Zeichen mit jeweils dazwischen eingeschobenen Werten an*....) kein START Zeichen und somit keine Kontrollzeichenkette dekodiert, d.h. das genannte toggle Flip-Flop zur Umschaltung zwischen Kontrollzeichen und Analog Datenwert weist einen statisch ruhenden Ausgang auf. Das entspricht QF1=0 und Q=0 der Flip-Flop Schaltung in 6b, 16b, 26b
• Fall 2: Es wurde ein START Zeichen dekodiert, d.h. das genannte toggle Flip-Flop (FF2, 6b, 16b, 26b) zur Umschaltung zwischen Kontrollzeichen und Analog Datenwert ist aktiviert und schaltet mit einem dem Zeichentakt entsprechenden Takt den Ausgang Q jeweils alternierend hin und her.

For the control of the reading clock EST, two cases are distinguished:

• Case 1: Since the completion of a read control string (string of X characters with values inserted between *....), no START character and therefore no control string has been decoded, i.e., the toggle flip-flop used to switch between control characters and analog data values has a statically idle output. This corresponds to QF1=0 and Q=0 of the flip-flop circuit in 6b , 16b , 26b
• Case 2: A START character was decoded, ie the mentioned toggle flip-flop (FF2, 6b , 16b , 26b) for switching between control character and analog data value is activated and switches the output Q alternately back and forth with a clock corresponding to the character clock.

The output Q (FF2) of this flip-flop is used to prepare the read-in clock EST, which, like the read-out clock AST, is derived from a clock with a higher clock frequency (e.g. generated with a synchronously clocked state machine logic, which also contains the toggle flip-flop mentioned, or possibly also generated in the DSP, etc.), for each detected control character for the read-in clock EST, the 2 , 12 , 22 to generate a phase jump to be taken; (where START is recognized directly via the code of the file, or the following characters Z, P, P, P, are each recognized by the output Q=1 of the flip-flop, which switches alternately to a defined state for each character after an amplitude value (an* value).

• Somit ergibt sich für die jeweils unmittelbar aufeinanderfolgenden Amplitudenwerte (an* Werte an11...an13 und an24,an25....), bei denen keine Kontrollzeichen eingefügt sind, und somit keine Phasensprünge des Einlesetaktes initialisiert sind, jeweils eine Taktflanke des Einlesetaktes EST in jedem Zeitraster, mit der der in diesem Zeitraster betreffende aktuelle Amplitudenwert an in das FIFO Register eingeschrieben wird und (hier unmittelbar zuvor) der im vorherigen Zeitraster jeweils eingeschriebene Amplitudenwert an-1 ausgelesen wird, Einlesetaktflanke EST und Auslesetaktflanke AST entsprechend versetzt sind.

This phase jump phi is achieved, for example, by changing the charging values (see LDZ and LDZphi of switch UMS, 6c , 16c , 26c ,), the counter used for processing the read-in clock EST (from a higher clock frequency) is used, in such a way that it is not the frequency, ie the number of clock pulses across the entire time frame, that changes, but only the phase phi, which is corrected again for the following clock edge, which after a control character corresponds to an amplitude value (an* value) of the signal to be reproduced.

• This results in a clock edge of the read-in clock EST in each time frame for the immediately successive amplitude values (an* values an11...an13 and an24,an25....), for which no control characters are inserted and thus no phase jumps of the read-in clock are initialized, with which the current amplitude value an relevant to this time frame is written into the FIFO register and (here immediately before) the amplitude value an-1 written in the previous time frame is read out, read-in clock edge EST and read-out clock edge AST are offset accordingly.

• Sind jedoch zwischen (/) den Amplitudenwerten (hier an15/an17;an17/an19; an21/an23) Kontrollzeichen (START; Z; P; P; P) eingefügt und nach der beschriebenen Methode (Erkennung von START und über toggle Flip Flop) jeweils erkannt, dann wird zu jedem erkannten Kontrollzeichen (Q=1) ein Phasensprungsteuerung der Taktflanke des Einlesetaktes EST für das betreffende Zeitraster initialisiert. Wodurch sich die Taktflanke von EST so verschiebt, daß für den FIFO- Speicher, der ausschließlich die Wiedergabe des Audiosignals, bzw. des Analogsignals betrifft (und nicht das grundsätzliche Einlesen der von einem Datenträger oder einer Datenquelle gelieferten Daten wo die Dekodierung der Kontrollzeichen statt findet), innerhalb des jeweils ein Kontrollzeichen betreffenden Zeitrasters X keine (positive) Taktflanke des Einschreibtaktes EST auftritt und durch zeitliche Verlängerung der log.0 erst innerhalb des dem betreffenden Kontrollzeichen nachfolgenden Zeitrasters für den betreffenden Amplitudenwert (vgl. an17, an19, an21, an23) auftritt.

Example ( 2 , 12 , 22 , 3 , 13 , 23 ): an11 is read in the time interval SPW=an11 (EST) and read out again in the time interval SPW=an12 (with AST), where in SPW=an12 the value of an12 is read in (with EST), etc.

• However, if control characters (START; Z; P; P; P) are inserted between (/) the amplitude values (here an15/an17;an17/an19; an21/an23) and are each recognized according to the described method (detection of START and via toggle flip flop), then for each recognized control character (Q=1) a phase jump control of the clock edge of the read-in clock EST is initialized for the relevant time grid. As a result, the clock edge of EST is shifted in such a way that for the FIFO memory, which exclusively concerns the reproduction of the audio signal or the analog signal (and not the basic reading of the data supplied from a data carrier or a data source where the decoding of the control characters takes place), no (positive) clock edge of the write clock EST occurs within the time grid X relating to a control character, and due to the temporal extension of the log.0 only occurs within the time grid following the relevant control character for the relevant amplitude value (cf. an17, an19, an21, an23).

This is achieved by a phase shift of EST triggered by the status of the flip-flop output, whereby two (positive) clock edges of the write clock EST occur within this time frame. The first clock edge does not take over the value read from the data carrier or data source within the respective time frame, but retroactively the previous The interpolation value corresponding to the control character is not directly adopted, but calculated (see value series IPW). This value is formed from the value preceding the control character (e.g. START) (e.g. an-2(ASL) = an13) and the subsequent value corresponding to the current time frame (e.g. an(ES) = an15) (where the value an14 is obtained as the interpolation value IPL). 2 , 12 , 22 , 3 , 13 , 23 ).

Example ( 2 , 12 , 22 , 3 , 13 , 23 ): an13 is read in the time interval SPW=anl3 (EST) and read out again in the time interval SPW=START (with AST), whereby in SPW=START (due to the clock edge of EST being shifted to SPW=an15) no analog value is read into the FIFO. Instead, at the beginning of SPW=an15, which is still at the output of the FIFO, or in the symbolic representation after 3 , 13 , 23 The value an-2(ASL) = an13 present at the SPA register together with the current value an(ES) = an15 is used to calculate the interpolation value an14, which is written into the FIFO register at the beginning of SPW=an15 with the first write clock pulse EST (as value an-1(IPL), see MUX in 3 , 13 , 23 ) and is read out again with the read-out clock AST, ditto subsequently with the second write-in clock EST the current value an15 (as value an(ES), cf. MUX in 3 , 13 , 23 ) is rewritten into the FIFO (after reading an14).

At the character an* following a control character (or the corresponding time grid), the toggle flip-flop switches back to Q=1, so that no more phase jump occurs for EST.

The 3 , 13 , 23 The multiplexer MUX shown further at the input of the FIFO memory is controlled accordingly via the control character recognition (recognition of START and via toggle flip flop) and within the relevant time frame in order to write the current amplitude value read from the data carrier to (ES) or to write an interpolation value to-1 (IPL) as required.

In case the interpolation value an-1(IPL) is written instead of the current amplitude value an(ES), it will be output again immediately within the same time frame.

Realization: The model of a circuit according to 3 , 13 , 23 and 6b , 16b , 26b is very useful for the explanation, but in implementation it is much more advantageous to use a standard DSP (signal processor) and/or a digital programmable logic circuit (as ASIC) which is configured as a synchronous state machine sequencer and, for example, receives the decoded message signal of the decoded START character from the DSP, and if necessary can also be implemented directly by the DSP using an internal timer for clock processing. Conversely, the state machine sequencer supplies the DSP with the two interrupt signals est and ast, where ast is an interrupt that leads the output clock AST of the output latch. This means that the entire timing can also be generated externally (as an option to internal generation in the DSP via the DSP's internal timer) and the FIFO register in the DSP's RAM is implemented accordingly. Ditto the multiplexer MUX, shown here only for explanation, is implemented using corresponding access variables, the contents of which are assigned accordingly to the RAM write process. The same applies to the 3 , 13 , 23 The explicitly represented register SPA stores an already read value an-1(ASL) with a further time delay (as value an-2(ASL)) so that this value can be used for interpolation after receiving a control character. SPA is thus merely a variable that occupies a corresponding memory location in the DSP's RAM.

Furthermore, in 3 , 13 , 23 : DEC....Decoding of the start character (START) and storage (latch output) of the control characters Z, P, etc. inserted between the values of the audio signal. This storage and decoding is performed with a leading clock preEST to the FIFO write clock EST, so that the measures related to the write clock EST can be activated in a timely manner before the arrival of the clock edge of EST. This concerns the suppression of EST within the respective time frame (of the control character) and the shifting of EST (by phase shift) to the beginning of the subsequent time frame (which again concerns an amplitude value an*). See also 6a /16a/26a to 6d /16d/26d. 6d /16d/26d shows a circuit proposal for this, 6c /16c/26c the corresponding pulse scheme.

To 6b /16b/26b: With a D-Flip Flop (Latch) FF1, the control character that introduces the character string (see above) START (DEK=START) is initially stored as the status “recognize character string” (QF1=1) and remains in this status until either it is regularly read by a character counter Z ( 6b /16b/26b) the end of the character string is detected, or in case of a time-out error, a monostable time (MONO), which is started by decoding START, is reset; in both cases, FF1 is reset. The character counter Z ( 6b /16b/26b) is loaded by the control character Z following the START character, or its value (cf. 2 , 12 , 22 ). The character clock pulses received from the decoding of Start (or QF1=1) are counted and the control characters following the START character are interpreted according to their position.

In the status “Recognize character string” (QF1=1) the toggle flip flop FF2 is enabled (via R input).

This diagram is only to be understood symbolically: the function is expediently implemented as a synchronous state machine clocked at a sufficiently high clock frequency, thus eliminating the need for the clock delays specified here, as they can then simply be implemented by "empty" switching transfer conditions (also known as NOPs, no operation) of the status machine. Likewise, if only D flip-flops are used and toggle flip-flops are avoided, the reset problem in the event of a time-out error is eliminated, as the state machine then always switches itself to a defined state when an undefined status occurs. Instead of implementing the status machine in hardware, this can just as easily be done in the DSP using the DSP's software.

To follow the simple explanation scheme 6b /16b/26b, the leading clock pulse preEST is split into two further clock pulses pre1EST and pre2EST, where pre2EST is delayed compared to pre1EST so much that the switching edge of pre2EST at the toggle FF of FF2 only occurs when FF1 has already been switched on via the decoding of the control character START. REG/DEC here symbolises the acceptance of the characters from the data carrier and their interpretation as control characters when Q=1 (of FF2). UMS symbolises the switching of the time period until the edge EST becomes positive (e.g. generated by a down counter Z2dwn), where the subsequent time for the next positive pulse is likewise corrected so that this occurs after the shift of the first pulse (from the time interval X to an*, cf. 6c /16c/26c) again (as the second impulse within the time frame) into the regular time frame (cf. an* 6c /16c/26c) of EST (see also 2 , 12 , 22 ).

6a , 16a , 26a illustrates the distinction between control character (X) and analog value an* by the toggle flip flop (signal Q) switched with the source clock of EST (here referred to as pre2EST).

As already explained, the symbols indicated in the circuits, such as clocks, EST, AST, multiplexers MUX, latches SPA, REG/DEC, counters, etc., are to be understood as access times (concerning the clocks) or access variables (concerning the components) of a corresponding program (a DSP, etc.).

4 , 14 , 24 This diagram shows a scheme for the preferred volume monitoring of a playing file. When a file is initialized (started) for playback, the device program first branches to a search procedure to locate the file entries for this file in the non-volatile memory (FLASH Sp) (ADD=new?). If none are present, a corresponding entry is stored for this file. ADD here symbolizes a played section of a file, whereby the file name is always queried first in order to manage the file entries in the non-volatile memory (FLASH Sp) under the file name.

During file playback, the length of a playback section (associated with ADD) is constantly determined (constant determination of L), which is recorded in the file entries of the non-volatile memory s(FLASH Sp). Any resolution for determining the length can be provided for a section address ADD, where ADD then quantifies an absolute value and the subsequent codings, for example, only add incremental lengths, which are additionally encoded in the absolute value. Only the most recent (current) value for an address is stored or constantly updated in the non-volatile memory s(FLASH Sp). Furthermore, it is possible for the absolute maximum permissible length for this section to be stored for a section address ADD. This length is also constantly checked (L=Lmax?) and, if exceeded, this section is aborted, or playback of this section is blocked beyond the length Lmax. In this case, it is possible, for example, to skip to the next section, which can also be marked in the maximum length specification (by selecting a corresponding word) (Continue at next section? yes/no).

Each time a section is blocked, this can be shown on the device's display, for example.

As already explained, the volume of the total played file is determined according to a specific key (SUM= max ?), whereby this is done by summing the already played sections according to the file entries in the non-volatile memory (FLASH Sp). For this calculation, the length of the sections can be multiplied with a scaling (e.g. in %) stored as a parameter for the section addresses ADD. (as already explained). If the maximum size of the file being played is exceeded, playback will be blocked.

5 , 15 , 25 shows how, within sections divided by addresses ADD1.......ADD4, limits Lmax are provided for ADD1, ADD2, but not for ADD3 and ADD4 (since the limit coincides with the end of the section).

6 , 16 , 26 see above.

7 , 17 , 27 illustrates an addressing example for a file in a data storage device, not to be confused with the section markings (ADD) made within the file. The control characters and parameters, or addresses, are also used for file addressing. 2 , 12 , 22 can be encoded directly in an audio signal in the manner described.

The first piece of information evaluated from the read data medium is the label of the publisher or music publisher, film distributor, etc. Conveniently, the label is further encrypted with a security code to prevent counterfeiting. This security code can, for example, be encoded in the audio signal, also as a tone sequence, etc. The label address read from the data medium (from the data source) addresses the area in the non-volatile memory where the files associated with this label are stored. Since the label refers to a unique brand name, but the file name addresses (FILE NAME) can be repeated (randomly) for different labels, confusion is avoided. The same applies to the assignment of device addresses G-ADD.

The control character following the LABEL is the parameter Z, which indicates how many control characters are to be read until the end of the string identifying the data carrier (also called header).

The following encrypted INFO information concerns how the control characters read in sequence are to be interpreted. For example, whether a device address is encoded, and whether the file contains FLASH STACK information that is to be loaded into the non-volatile memory as file entries if it hasn't already been loaded. Or whether it is a file that is to be played back in its entirety, etc.

Background: As already explained, the limited access volume of (e.g., free) sample files is intended to encourage the user to purchase the file in question, which is then encoded as a file with unlimited access with a device address so that it can only be played on the user's device. Since the device address (as already explained) for a LABEL is freely configurable by the device's server, the files can be played even if, for example, the device is defective and a new device address needs to be configured. Since the device is bound to a telephone number when downloading a file, the server would later register misuse if another unauthorized user, for example, used a device address that was reassigned (because the device was not defective) (because the device was not defective). The server can then write a blocking flag for all files for this LABEL into the device's non-volatile memory under its LABEL when attempting to download a file from the server, forcing the user to clarify the process, and so on.

If a file is purchased (with unlimited access) and the device address is included in the download, the file entries for this file (with limited access as a sample file) in the non-volatile memory are deleted the first time this file is played, as they are no longer needed (since the user purchased the file). This is also another prerequisite for the user to be able to play the file with unlimited access at all.

This means that if the non-volatile memory is full of existing file entries, this only affects the sample files with limited access and not the regularly purchased ones. If the user is forced to delete the file entries (to make room for new sample files with limited access and to be able to play them), this can be done by purchasing the corresponding files or by taking the following steps:

The user connects their playback device to their computer (client computer), which is networked with the server in question, and has the option to delete the relevant file entries via the browser. In this case, the server generally changes the device address of all files to be played with limited access (sample files) on the playback device (via the connected data connection). However, this does not affect the device address for files to be played in full, whose device address remains stored unchanged on the device.

Furthermore, a list of titles is displayed via the browser, which concerns the files whose file entries have been deleted from the non-volatile memory, asking the user whether he would like to reinstall some tracks. If this is the case, the user can download these tracks again, but with the new device address and all the file entries (FLASH STACK) associated with these files and corresponding to user behavior (regarding previews, etc.), so that the user can continue to use these selected files, taking into account the portion of these files already played, while still having space for the file entries of new sample files in the non-volatile memory. These selected files then contain the new device address and, in the INFO section, the note that the FLASH STACK is to be loaded into the non-volatile memory (only!) the first time the file is used, where these file entries remain until the next deletion cycle, or when the file is loaded as an unlimited file, thus deleting all other entries relating to the volume limitation during playback from the non-volatile memory. 7 , 17 , 27 The file name check shown for unrestricted playback of files that do not have a volume limit can also be omitted if, for example, the status of the file (no volume limit) is noted within the file as a special identifier. It is particularly preferable to do this using the 2 , 12 , 22 and 6 explained method, whereby this note concerning the authorization for unlimited playback of the file is noted in encrypted form across the entire audio file. If the playback device independently determines that an attempt has been made to tamper with this file, e.g. if the identifier in the file header corresponds to unlimited playback of the file, but parameters still included within the audio signal indicate a file with a volume limit during playback, then the blocking note is entered under the LABEL management of the file(s). This means that an attempt to play a manipulated file from a manufacturer (LABEL) is penalized by the fact that no file from that manufacturer (LABEL) can be played at all. The same happens if the LABEL entry for the file is tampered with, which is also encoded in various places in the audio signal.

To make deciphering control characters and parameters encoded in the audio signal as difficult as possible, it is advisable to statistically distribute their association. The individual bits of the words of, say, a total of 200 parameters and addresses are shuffled according to a specific algorithm and then reassembled in the terminal device (by the DSP), making it very difficult for third parties to decipher the codes and manipulate the file.

Further options for encryption: The 2 , 12 , 22 The method explained above also offers the possibility of using the audio signal itself for data encryption, for example, by using certain harmonics from the music file (which are not immediately noticeable) for further encoding. To do this, the harmonics are first filtered and then added to the digital encoding accordingly (e.g., using a modulo 2 code, etc.).

As from 7 , 17 , 27 It is also clear that for a file to be played back, the LABEL name must match the group address of all files assigned to a LABEL, the device address G-ADD assigned to a LABEL, and the file name must match the name stored in the non-volatile memory. Instead of checking a file name stored in the non-volatile memory, however, the file can also contain an encrypted abbreviation that indicates that the file is to be played back in its entirety. This abbreviation can then be freely selected and applied to multiple files, and is updated or checked in the non-volatile memory of the playback device when such a file is downloaded or activated by the server.

8 , 18 , 28 illustrates the updating of the device address on a device in whose non-volatile memory the file entries of files that can only be played back with a limited volume are stored, which (because the memory is full and the user does not want to delete the memory by purchasing files that can be played back without limit) must be deleted in a special procedure. For this purpose, the user uses his (client) computer connected to the Internet and, for example, a landline telephone connection, which proves to the server that the Internet access is from an authorized user (see also the DE 10 2004 046 413.8 ).

The playback device is connected, for example, to a USB port on the (client) computer. Data is exchanged between the files stored in the non-volatile memory (MEMO, 8 , 18 , 28 ) and the server that manages all files that can be obtained from a specific LABEL.

After the server has determined that the device address of the playback device, furthermore the If the user's telephone number associated with the device address and (optionally) the password entry are correct, the server reads the file entries stored in the non-volatile memory (MEMO) which concern the files to be played back only to a limited extent (and which provide protection for them) and then deletes the non-volatile memory (MEMO).

Subsequently, the server writes a new device address to the non-volatile memory (MEMO) of the playback device. This address only applies to files that are only allowed to be played back to a limited extent (and thus provides the protection). The old device address also remains in the playback device and is used exclusively for files that are allowed to be played back to their full extent. These two device addresses are differentiated in the playback device by corresponding identification bits. Different device addresses can be provided for different labels (or possibly for different other file groupings).

Furthermore, the part of the file entries read from the non-volatile memory (MEMO) is stored in the server for the device address and is included in the file when re-downloading files that the user already owns or has partially played (but which are no longer playable in their original version due to the changed device address) if the user downloads such a file again from the server (FLASH STACK, 7 , 17 , 27 ,) and when such a file is played back for the first time, the data corresponding to the last playback state (by the user) is re-written into the non-volatile memory (MEMO). In this way, the user has reduced the number of files that may only be played back to a limited extent and can play the files that have been kept or downloaded again and assigned a new device address without being able to increase the permissible volume (taking into account the part already played). On the other hand, the user can play new files that have not yet been played and that use the newly assigned device address, as usual with a limited volume.

As in 8 , 18 , 28 As is still clearly shown, the new device address G-ADD is used for the playback of (sample) files that can only be played with a limited volume (which can also be changed several times in this way). However, for (purchased) files that are to be played with an unlimited volume, the originally configured device address is used. And only for those files that have already been partially played by the user, the transfer of the deleted information from the non-volatile memory (MEMO) to the file itself (with the new device address) is necessary (FLASH STACK, 7 , 17 , 27 ).

Loss of device or defective device: If a user loses the playback device with the configured device address, or if the device is defective, or if a new device is purchased, then the playback device must be configured again if an external data storage device (CD, DVD) is used so that the user can use the data storage device, ditto if the data on an MP3 player was still stored externally on a computer, etc. In order to detect misuse in this case, it is sensible for the server to save the unalterable electronically encoded serial number in the playback device in the server's database and to check this number each time the device is connected to the server (also via a client computer, etc.) to determine whether the old device is still being used.

If this is the case, the server can block one of the two devices via a corresponding entry (when downloading a new file). It is advisable for the server to register the serial numbers chronologically in order to take the order of access into account when detecting multiple identical device addresses, and to be able to block all devices except the most recent access by means of a marker written into the device's non-volatile memory.

Thus, in this case (if it detects two different phone numbers for the same device address), the server is able to distinguish which of two devices with the same device address was the first (which was allegedly broken or lost, or replaced by a new device), and can thus block illegally operated devices by making an entry in the non-volatile memory (MEMO).

This procedure can be further refined on a person-by-person basis if the connection to a telephone number is still used (since, for example, mobile phones with their telephone card tied to a network operator are generally not lent out that often).

A further additional embodiment is to design the playback device in such a way that it can also be used as copy protection for a computer (PC), whereby the playback device is connected to the computer via a data interface (e.g. USB, etc.). (PC) is connected, which plays the file, whereby the file is stored encrypted on the mass storage of the computer (hard drive, etc.) and the software used to decrypt the file can access the non-volatile memory of the playback device via the data interface in order to read and update the file entries relating to the limitation of playback, whereby the decryption of the file also takes place in a format that can be processed by standard audio software and the read file is offered to a software commonly used to play the file in relation to the computer's operating system as if it were being read from a mass storage of the computer (hard drive, etc.).

Further options:

If a data storage medium does not contain any special coding according to a special format that limits the playback volume, or if the analysis in the file header does not find any such coding after a predefined length, the file will play as usual, without a device address and without access restrictions. State-of-the-art playback of precisely predefined sections of the data storage medium is also possible. The provided coded addresses, which mark the beginning of the respective sections, are accessed via a corresponding sequence program. Playback can be paused at any time by pressing a key, and freely selected sections can be played back by selection (e.g., entering the relevant page numbers of a printed table of contents, etc.), or the playback length of the sections can be extended (if necessary, using an entry to determine the volume limit for the file in question).

During playback according to a defined sequence program, the address to which the program should jump when a section is completed after a length specification (e.g., a time value) contained in the address as a parameter is encoded in the program. If the section has been played up to this length specification, or if this length evaluation is decoded during playback, then a jump is simply executed to the next address specified in the program, and so on. If no length specification (only a placeholder, e.g., zero) is specified for the address, then playback continues to the next address or to another length limitation superior to this section (defined by further parameters, etc.).

Example:

• ADD ; [length]; ADDbranch where
• ADD....is a marker address of a section detected during playback of a file or by jumping to it;

Length...from the detection of ADD onwards, the length of the played file is continuously determined. When the value specified by the parameter [Length] is reached, corresponding to the current length of the played file, the jump to the ADDbranch marker is executed. For less precise jumps (CD, etc.), it is advisable to define ADDbranch slightly before the next ADD, so that the next ADD can still be reliably detected, with playback being paused for the very short period between ADDbranch and ADD. With MP3, for example, the ADDbranch address can also be identical to that of the immediately following section, since ADD or ADDbranch then refers to a memory address of the RAM in which the MP3 file is stored.

Exact length determination of non-predefined jump addresses:
If, for example, an audio file is played back with the preferred playback device which corresponds to a spoken text (from a book, a newspaper, etc.) or even music, etc., and this audio file is saved, for example, in MP3 format or even as a simple wave file (e.g. on a CD), etc., then it is desirable for the user to be able to set a marker at interesting points in the played back audio file by pressing a key, whereby this marker can later be quickly found again in the visually displayed text, or even in a musical score, etc. Or, if necessary, the reverse process should also be possible, in order to click on a specific point in a text file or musical score file with the mouse and hear the corresponding playback of the audio signal (or even a video signal). The special feature of this, in further difference to the prior art, is that the two files which are only meaningfully linked do not have to be generated independently of each other by a computer program, but use a synchronization file created specifically for this purpose using an automation process, and protection is sought for such a process. Likewise, any process that uses such a synchronization file is also subject to the protection claim. The protection claim for this process also applies to devices that play both files: the file that is played back according to a time frame, e.g., an audio file, and the file that is only displayed graphically, e.g., a text file. Thus, the protection right applies to the process even if it is realized exclusively by software for a computer.

State-of-the-art information: The state of the art, for example, in the music field, involves generating sounds from a musical notation, which can also be input via a MIDI function, etc., and from which various instruments generated by software are played. This means that the coupling or synchronization between the musical notation and the reproduced audio signal is already created, i.e., it no longer needs to be created. Likewise, the state of the art involves generating speech from a text file; i.e., here too, the coupling between the text file and the audio signal already exists and does not need to be created separately.

If this connection, which exists through a direct software link between a computer and the synchronization of related files of different media genres (e.g., a text file, a score file of one media genre and an audio signal such as speech, music, etc., or even a video or a so-called Flash movie of the other media genre), is missing, then automated synchronization between such files is not common practice and has not been considered necessary. The present invention provides a remedy.

Furthermore, the state of the art also includes a so-called trigger or pre-trigger function, in which the reproduced signal is stored at the time of a key press or trigger signal (which can also be assigned to a time shortly before, see pre-trigger) or is reproduced again later as a detail.

The state of the art also includes, for example, the usual method for synchronising video images (flash images, etc.) and an audio signal, in which a predefined time grid is used, to which markers can also be set.

The time values set as markers allow the playback to jump to the corresponding points. An automated interrelationship between the video and audio signals is established during processing for the purpose of synchronization using reference signals contained in the reproduced process. These reference signals are recorded in a temporal relationship for the input of synchronization signals, which the user (processor) enters into the computer for this purpose. This relationship ensures a rhythmic adjustment between image and sound, predetermined by an action signal derived from a synchronization signal entered by the user or processed by a user, and which refers to the reference signals contained in the reproduced process. These reference signals can, but do not have to, be pre-programmed in the reproduced file; they can also be generated in real time during playback by various filtering devices for the detection and decoding of sound sequences, pauses, envelope curves, etc. The basis for the first usable system here is, for example, the DE 41 43 257 C2 a patent belonging to the same applicant with claims 1 and 8, which are to be mentioned here as prior art (the DE 41 43 257 C2 ).

In contrast to the present invention, as claimed in claim 39 as a preferred development and also as an independent invention in independent application, the prior art always concerns the synchronization of time sequences and not of information content. In the present invention, however, for the first time, information content from different files is automatically synchronized using the time frame of one file, whereby the other file need not have such a time frame at all, and no synchronization measures need to be specified when preparing the files to be synchronized according to information content. This problem alone is considered particularly inventive according to the prior art.

The task (of this additional function as further training or as a standalone application) thus concerns the synchronization between different media types of files, e.g. between a text file and an audio file, or between a musical score and an audio signal, etc. In contrast to the state of the art, however, the aim here is not to synchronize the playback of a file with regard to the associated rhythmic process in the temporal sequence during playback, but only to synchronize it automatically according to the meaningful context.

The file that does not require a time grid during playback can usually be understood as a corresponding source file from which the file that uses a time grid during playback was (somehow) created (manually or computer-assisted or via a MIDI instrument or via speech software for a text file on a computer, etc.).

Definition for the user: The use of the synchronization carried out according to information content for the user should be such that a synchronization reference desired according to the respective information content can be achieved by using the Playback of the existing time grid in one file and saving of the time values relating to the selected information content.

Such that during the time-proportional reproduction of the signal corresponding to a file (such as an acoustic reproduction, or an image sequence such as video or flash, etc.) at any time in which the user finds the information content of a reproduced file particularly interesting, the user inputs a synchronization signal (key signal, trigger signal, etc.) with which a time stamp corresponding to these times is stored in accordance with the temporal course of the reproduced signal. These time stamps are stored in the playback device as a supplementary file belonging to the played back file, whereby these time stamps can be used to jump to precisely those points in the source file of the other media genre (e.g. text template of a spoken text, song, or musical notation for music) using a table implemented in a connection file, which is to be referred to here as a synchronization file, which at the time of their setting as a time stamp during the time-proportional playback of the file played back according to a time grid (such as an acoustic playback, or an image sequence, video, etc.) have been set by the user as the particularly interesting points.

Both files, the one reproduced proportionally to time and the source file that only exists as a graphic image, can have been created completely separately, even with the involvement of the human mind (user) without any direct reference to the software.

The invention does not concern the actual creation of the reproduced file from the source file.

Rather, it is the automated creation of a synchronization file to generate the explained affiliation of information content encoded by timestamps of the relevant files and/or their use with individual selection of the information content by the user.

The problem of the invention stated in claim 39 of this application alone can already be considered inventive, since the prior art does not yet know of a method for automatically creating or using such a synchronization file, which uses time stamps to establish a reference for addressing information content to a file that is not reproduced according to a predetermined time sequence.

Two examples are given for the application of this new method: one in which the reproduced file is a spoken (or sung) text of an audio signal based on a graphically represented text template (a computer text file displayed on the screen or a text template from a printed publication, etc.) as the source file, and another in which the reproduced file is the music of an audio signal based on a graphically represented musical notation as the source file. In both examples, the audio file can also be coupled to a synchronous video playback, etc.

In further development, a further measure is provided that, in the event that the fully automatic creation of the synchronization file explained below fails, the user has the option of immediate intervention and/or the option of later semi-automatic correction in order to avoid errors in the creation of the synchronization file or to be able to correct them automatically.

This technical problem is solved by using a time clock for each media genre or for the files used for playback, e.g. an audio file played back according to a time grid for playback such as speech, music, etc. and an associated source file without a time grid as a text file or a graphic musical image, etc., which for both media genres or files (i.e. for the playback file and the source file) consistently marks the reproduced information content (elements) of the file during playback, which advances (increments or decrements) a counter reading ZTime according to the file played back after a time lapse (or according to a time grid) and is used to address the information elements contained in the source file without a time grid, which is displayed to the user when viewing the file directly or via further references (page or line information of a printed work, etc.) according to their position within the source file.

The progression of the counter reading Ztime begins at the respective marks (ADD, or START, etc.) of the individual sections, or in a simplified version can also begin at the beginning of the file.

In the case of acoustic reproduction (audio signal such as speech, music), which has the (meaningfully) matching marks to the graphically reproduced file, this time grid is linked to the timing of the output accordingly, e.g. to the D/A converter clock of an output audio signal, or to the generation clock of the line sync pulses of a video signal (also picture change, depending on the application, etc.). Generally, this clock Ztime is therefore tied to the output time frame or is generated by a common processing clock; for example, for a video signal, this clock would correspond in stability to the line or picture change pulses, etc.

If a marker signal (trigger) is set using the marker button on the playback device, the time value of the time grid is saved; the file itself is not affected by this process. Therefore, the time values corresponding to each marker (pressing a button) can also be saved in a separate data packet as a file entry for the file name (of the played file), e.g., in the non-volatile memory of the playback device. From there, they can then be sent later via the client computer to a server that manages the files, or, for example, via the mobile phone connection of a car radio to the server (as a closed packet, e.g., when the radio is turned off).

The server stores a reference address for each word (or bar of the musical notation, etc.) of the text file under which this word (or musical notation, etc.) can be called up. This reference address corresponds to the counter reading Ztime as it occurs when the text is incremented by the time when the text is spoken or the musical notation is played (singing, etc.).

In this case, use is made of the option of using software to synchronise the corresponding correspondence of the elements reproduced from the graphic file (without a time cycle) (e.g. words, etc.) with those reproduced acoustically (after a time cycle) (in the relevant audio file), whereby the start addresses for the sections, e.g. by page, are set in the acoustically reproduced file (e.g. by appropriate editing software), the file is then played back within a computer program and during the acoustic playback the counter reading Ztime is advanced accordingly with the time cycle, e.g. at the beginning of each section starting with zero.

For the application of a spoken text, the spoken text available as an audio signal is converted into a text from a text file using speech recognition. Each word is retrieved from the text file in turn, and when the spoken text is recognized in accordance with the text from the text file, the time value or counter reading Ztime corresponding to the spoken text of the audio signal is stored as a key (or reference or address). The position address associated with the key within the text file (of the recognized text) is also stored as a value in a key/value pair list and can be retrieved again using this key Ztime via this list.

The value then corresponds to the position address of the text within the text file and is addressed with the corresponding counter reading Ztime during a subsequent playback of the text file in order to call up the relevant text passages in the text file, as they were marked as interesting (but only heard) passages as a time value via the respective saving of the counter reading Ztime during the playback of the audio file.

Example:

The text stored in a file is read word by word into an array word$(x%). Here, as a simplified representation, the index (x%) is incremented word by word according to each word recognized (via speech recognition) to check whether it is the correct word. By reading the array word$(x%) step by step, the text in the text file is compared word by word with the words recognized by speech recognition.

After each word is recognized, the array word$(x%) is advanced to the next word by incrementing x%, and a check is made to see whether the current audio signal also provides the (advanced) word as word recognition. The words read from the text file for comparison are thus advanced according to the text sequence, synchronously with the playback of these words as a speech signal.

If the text of the audio signal supplied by the speech recognition matches the text from the text file (word for word), then the time value determined for each word during playback of the audio signal is saved as a supplementary file to the existing text file in a hash list (input value, output value), whereby the time value Ztime and index (x%) are saved in pairs in such a way that the corresponding index (x%) can be read out via the time value (as with a word This mode, in which the speech recognition correctly recognizes the words presented by the text array word$(x%), is referred to below as the speech recognition evaluation mode. An approximation method can, of course, also be used, in which a word from the text file is recognized as correct by the word provided by the speech recognition, even if the word provided by the speech recognition only recognizes a few essential syllables (which make up the word when taking into account the other recognized words), etc. In principle, all that matters with this method is that the forwarding (from (x%)) for reading the comparison words from the text file word$(x%) takes place synchronously with the spoken words contained in the audio signal, so that the time values (or counter readings) Ztime determined for each word (or word beginning) match those read from the text file in order to be able to create the key/value pair list as a synchronous file.

If, however, a word preselected by advancing the array word$(x%) is not recognized by the speech recognition, then the system switches to a semi-automatic mode, referred to as mouse mode below. In mouse mode, word selection is not made by advancing through the recognized words in speech recognition, but manually, as described below for further training. In mouse mode, several words or strings located in a catch range of the manual selection are also included in the comparison, so that this mode corresponds to a semi-automatic mode in which the word selection made is still marked for automatic retrieval for later correction and checking. In mouse mode, the time value Ztime and Index(x%) are also saved in pairs.

Thus, by entering the variable "time value" = Ztime into the hash list (input value, output value), the index (x%) can be immediately read from this list, which in turn immediately returns the correct position of the text, or rather, the text passage. It is obvious that the index (x%) can also be created multidimensionally, e.g., divided into line/word number within the line, etc., as is common in word processing programs, allowing for immediate jumps to a specific text passage.

The table (list) can also be created in such a way that reverse addressing (referencing) is possible, i.e. the “time value” = Ztime is read using the position of the text (e.g. marked by the user with the mouse) as a key.

Since the time value Ztime can be defined (and saved) relative to the RAM address (or flash memory, etc.) of an MP3 file, it is possible, for example, to click on any text location and hear the correct text for a specific section starting at that point. The text playback is not performed by direct translation of the text (i.e., not via a computer voice), but exclusively through the preferred synchronization.

If the time value Ztime is transmitted from the supplementary file associated with the data file to the server, the server sends the line number (absolute or further subdivided by page division, etc.) and the word number (within the line) to the program used to display the text on the client computer. This allows the passages previously marked by a keystroke while listening to the text on the playback device to be called up sequentially in the visually displayed text, either automatically or by entering them using a search function, or by looking them up in a printed publication, etc. The connection file between the playback device and the server is, on the server side, the synchronization file created for a file; for the playback device, these are the time values Ztime saved as supplementary files by the user using the selection key. These values correspond to the passages of interest in the file played back according to a time grid (e.g., the listened audio file or a video file, etc.).

For example, a user can play an MP3 file on their car radio, press a button at interesting passages, and quickly retrieve the passages marked on their car radio as text data via their client computer and an internet connection (or locally independently), either by removing a chip card or via a direct mobile phone connection to the server, etc. Or they can look up the relevant passages using the page/line references in a printed publication (book, newspaper) based on information from a database, etc. Or, with music, for example, the relevant passages can be displayed via sheet music. Or they can have them loaded directly into an electronically downloadable book.

Options: For the creation of the list, in order to save the corresponding index (x%) of a word of the "source file" (e.g. a text file word$(x%)) that is not displayed according to a time grid but only graphically, for a (random) grid time value Ztime of the file that is displayed according to a time grid, can be used as an option or even as an additional extension with a camera, whose video image is thus evaluates which word the user is currently looking at (on the screen).

Or, using a screen or even a printed text (with an input pad function based on the principle of a writing pad with a pointing function), a mouse function can be used, where the user, while reading the text, moves the mouse along a ruler (or with the Y-coordinate direction switched off, etc.) or the finger or a pen according to the words read over the text, etc.

• - daß der Mauszeiger/Cursor schrittweise von Wort zu Wort bewegt wird, was durch entsprechende Erkennung der einem Wortbeginn jeweils entsprechenden Zeichenpositionen der Mauszeigerbewegung gesteuert ist,
• - daß der Mauszeiger/Cursor des Bildschirms nach dem Erreichen des letzten Wortes einer Zeile automatisch auf den Anfang der nächsten Zeile gesetzt wird, wobei gleichzeitig die Maus zurück in Richtung Anfang der Zeile bewegt werden kann und diese ausschließlich zur Rückführung der Maus vorgenommene Bewegungseingabe von der Software ausgetastet wird, wobei diese Austastung nach Ablauf des nächsten Wortes wieder eingeschaltet wird,
• - daß die Mausbewegung in Y- Richtung (welche die Zeilen schneidet) während der X-Bewegung in Zeilenrichtung abgeschaltet ist oder nur an der ersten Wortposition möglich ist.
• - daß diese Mauszeigereingabe (Modus Maus) mit dem erläuterten Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung (Spracherkennungstextumsetzung) kombiniert ist, wobei die durch die Spracherkennungstextumsetzung erkannten Worte jeweils durch den Mauszeiger/Cursor angezeigt sind und weiters bei gegebenenfalls eintretender Nichterkennung eines Wortes (wobei dies z.B. durch Änderung der Textfarbe noch besonders angezeigt wird) durch manuelle Bewegung der Maus die Texterkennung in einem Fangbereich (bezogen auf die Cursorposition) wieder einrastet, wobei von der Steuerung folgender Ablauf erfolgt:
  1. a) wird ein in der Textdatei wort$(x%) jeweils weiter geschaltetes Wort durch die Spracherkennungsbewertung (im Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung) nicht erkannt, dann erfolgt die Umschaltung der Zuordnungssteuerung, welche den gemessenen Zeitwert Ztime (zu dem ein gelesenes Wort jeweils gesprochen wird) jeweils zu einer Wortposition in der Textdatei wort$(x%) zuordnet (um es in die Liste (Eingabewert, Ausgabewert) zu speichern) derart, daß das betreffende Wort nicht mehr über die Spracherkennungsbewertung sondern über die durch die vom Benutzer vorgenommene Mauszeigerbedienung (im Modus Maus) Worte ausgewählt wird, dabei erfolgt die Weiterschaltung des Arrays wort$(x%) über den Index x%, unmittelbar durch die über den Mauszeiger bewegte Cursorpostion,
  2. b) wird ein durch die Cursorposition angezeigtes Wort, bzw. gegebenenfalls auch eine Gruppe von Wörtern (string$) durch die Texterkennung/Worterkennung (wieder) erkannt, dann erfolgt die Umschaltung (bzw. Rückschaltung) der Zuordnungssteuerung welche den gemessenen Zeitwert (zu dem ein gelesenes Wort jeweils gesprochen wird) jeweils zu einem Wort zuordnet um es in die Liste (Eingabewert, Ausgabewert) zu speichern in den Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung, wobei (wieder) zu jedem erkannten Wort der Textdatei wort$(x%) das nächste Wort der Textdatei (oder gegebenenfalls auch eine Wortgruppe) für den Vergleich verwendet wird (Fortschalten von (x%)).

For this mouse pointer variant, hereinafter referred to as mouse mode, the following training measures for operation are specifically provided:

• - that the mouse pointer/cursor is moved step by step from word to word, which is controlled by the corresponding recognition of the character positions of the mouse pointer movement corresponding to the beginning of a word,
• - that the mouse pointer/cursor of the screen is automatically set to the beginning of the next line after reaching the last word of a line, whereby at the same time the mouse can be moved back towards the beginning of the line and this movement input, which is carried out exclusively for the purpose of returning the mouse, is blanked out by the software, whereby this blanking is switched on again after the next word has been read,
• - that the mouse movement in the Y direction (which cuts the lines) is switched off during the X movement in the line direction or is only possible at the first word position.
• - that this mouse pointer input (mouse mode) is combined with the explained speech recognition evaluation mode (speech recognition text conversion), whereby the words recognized by the speech recognition text conversion are each displayed by the mouse pointer/cursor and furthermore, if a word is not recognized (this is particularly indicated, for example, by changing the text color), the text recognition is re-engaged in a capture area (related to the cursor position) by manually moving the mouse, whereby the following process is carried out by the control:
  1. a) If a word advanced in the text file word$(x%) is not recognized by the speech recognition evaluation (in speech recognition evaluation mode), then the assignment control is switched, which assigns the measured time value Ztime (at which a read word is spoken) to a word position in the text file word$(x%) (in order to save it in the list (input value, output value)) in such a way that the word in question is no longer selected via the speech recognition evaluation but via the words selected by the user using the mouse pointer (in mouse mode). The array word$(x%) is advanced via the index x%, directly by the cursor position moved over the mouse pointer.
  2. b) If a word indicated by the cursor position, or possibly also a group of words (string$) is (re)recognized by the text recognition/word recognition, then the assignment control which assigns the measured time value (at which a read word is spoken) to a word in order to save it in the list (input value, output value) is switched over (or back) to the speech recognition evaluation mode, whereby (again) for each recognized word in the text file word$(x%) the next word in the text file (or possibly also a group of words) is used for the comparison (advancing from (x%)).

All text passages where the speech recognition evaluation (in speech recognition evaluation mode) failed (i.e., the words were not recognized) are saved sequentially (in a correction file similar to a logbook file) so that these passages can be played back (acoustically) by repetition. The user can then pause or resume playback by clicking a mouse button. If, during the time intervals in which the speech recognition evaluation failed and the mouse mode was switched on, an incorrect association between the spoken word and the manually selected word (based on the cursor position) in the text file word$(x%) occurs, the user can correct this by editing the correction file.

The positions to which the assignment control automatically switched from speech recognition evaluation mode to mouse mode are then read from the correction file in sequence as jump addresses. In this case, the conventional method for acoustic playback is used in which an audio signal is played back unchanged, retaining the envelope curve and the frequency range contained therein, but at a slower speed. This means that the time course of the envelope is spread by inserting appropriate periods of the audio signal.

This process is called phase voicing and is also known as "elastic audio." The timing of the time base used to measure the timing of each word is also adjusted to this speed change (which is only used for editing). Since the text is spoken more slowly (while listening) for correction purposes, the user can better follow the corresponding mouse movement to highlight the corresponding text in mouse mode.

The synchronization file obtained for a text file thus contains, as table values (input value, output value), e.g. a hash list with the assignment of the time values Ztime of the file played back according to a time grid in the format (input value, output value) = (key, value) = (Ztime, x%) to the relevant words of the text as position value x% (of the graphically displayed file word$(x%), which correspond in sequence to the file played back according to a time grid, or acoustically). Likewise, the file played back according to a time grid can also be a video or Flash file, etc., instead of an audio file. The synchronization file obtained during the creation (production) of the audio file (e.g. from a text file) is then saved under the relevant file name as an auxiliary file on the server, from which the user can download these passages in order to, for example, visually read the text passages marked by keystrokes (in a text file or in a printed publication) via his client computer, which is connected to the server via the Internet.

The precision achievable with this method is particularly desirable when a graphic musical notation is used instead of text, and the acoustic reproduction uses frequency analysis instead of speech recognition, which generates a musical notation from the acoustically reproduced music. This is at least sufficient to allow comparison with a stored musical notation (a graphically displayed file) for synchronization purposes, in order to create a table (time value of the acoustic reproduction = input value / position of the graphic musical notation marked by the cursor = output). This means that, in principle, the synchronization for storing the time values by addressing the notes of the musical notation is carried out in the same way as the synchronization for storing the time values by addressing the words of a text.

The time values Ztime can be measured either only from the beginning or from markers already set to mark the beginning of sections during acoustic playback.

Further applications: For example, a third file of a third media genre, e.g. a video file, can be synchronized, whereby the audio file associated with the video file is still available as a text file, etc. The video file with the associated audio file then also generates the preferred time grid for synchronization (to generate the time values Ztime).

• 9a, 19a, 29a betrifft die Wiedergabe der Datei am Gerät (DATEI BENUTZEN) durch den Benutzer, der über ein Tastensignal die gehörten Stellen der nach einem Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Datei markieren kann und so eine im Wiedergabegerät abgespeicherte Ergänzungsdatei erstellen kann, mit der er unter Verwendung der im Server gespeicherten Synchronisationsdatei die durch Tastendruck markierten Stellen in der graphisch angezeigten, nicht nach einem Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Datei anspringen, bzw. aufsuchen kann.
• 9b, 19b, 29b betrifft die Erstellung der Synchronisationsdatei (SYNCHRONDATEI ERSTELLEN) als Ergänzung zur graphisch angezeigten, nicht nach einem Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Datei, um zu jedem (bei der akustischen Wiedergabe) vorgenommenen Tastendruck in das Array zur Abspeicherung der Marken (Markenarray(x)) die Zeitwerte ZTime, über welche die Stellen in der Datei für die visuelle Wiedergabe adressiert werden sollen, abzuspeichern. Mit dieser im Wiedergabegerät gespeicherten Ergänzungsdatei kann der Benutzer unter späterer Verwendung der im Server gespeicherten Synchronisationsdatei, die bei der akustischen Wiedergabe durch Tastendruck markierten Stellen in der graphisch angezeigten, nicht nach einem Zeitraster wiedergegebenen Datei unmittelbar anspringen bzw. aufsuchen.

9a , 19a , 29a and 9b , 19b , 29b illustrate the procedure:

• 9a , 19a , 29a concerns the playback of the file on the device (USE FILE) by the user, who can mark the heard parts of the file played back according to a time grid using a key signal and can thus create a supplementary file stored in the playback device with which he can jump to or search for the parts marked by pressing a key in the graphically displayed file that is not played back according to a time grid using the synchronization file stored in the server.
• 9b , 19b , 29b Concerns the creation of the synchronization file (CREATE SYNCHRONIZATION FILE) as a supplement to the graphically displayed file, which is not played back according to a time grid. This file is used to store the time values ZTime, which are used to address the points in the file for visual playback, for each keystroke (during acoustic playback) in the array for storing the markers (mark array(x)). With this supplementary file stored in the playback device, the user can later use the synchronization file stored on the server to directly jump to or search for the points marked by a keystroke in the graphically displayed file, which is not played back according to a time grid.

Explanation of 9a , 19a , 29a : (USE FILE). At each section marker of a new section (e.g., a new page of text in a book) encoded by an ADD address, the counter Ztime is reset (ZTime=0) to count down a time interval. For most applications, it is sufficient to set the time interval counted (or incremented, see INCR ZTime) with the received value of ZTime so that a few measures are allocated to each spoken word (instead of synchronizing the start of Ztime exactly with the start of the word, which is an option).

For each key signal (trigger) that the user (possibly also via a remote control tion, etc.) on the playback device, the value of the counter reading ZTime, which is further linked to the address ADD of the section marker (e.g., via the memory organization, where ADD forms a kind of directory), is written into an array that is continuously incremented (INCRx) with each write operation (from Ztime1 ....... Ztime2 ...... Ztime_n) and, upon triggering or when the device is switched off, is stored in the aforementioned non-volatile memory of the playback device as a supplementary file to a played back file, or remains stored there, or is transferred via an interface to the server or an alternative computer, via which the text file can then be examined. It is evident that this function can, in principle, also be housed independently in the playback device, just as the playback device can also have a direct Internet connection to the server, etc.

Explanation of 9b , 19b , 29b : (CREATE SYNCHRONOUS FILE). To create the file (here, for example, the additional file to the text file visually displayed on the screen), the starting point is first set using the mouse function explained (by selecting the relevant text passage with the mouse). Mouse mode is active during this START phase. Speech recognition always remains active in this mode, with speech recognition evaluation being performed by comparing the text obtained by speech recognition with the text selected by the user using the mouse. An extension function is provided in mouse mode, which is performed within a capture area in the area of the text selected by the user. So that even if the user has not yet placed the cursor exactly on the correct word recognized by the speech recognition by moving the mouse, the correct word (or a string or a sequence of words) is still recognized at the relevant text position within the capture area selected by the mouse cursor, whereupon the assignment control automatically switches back to the speech recognition evaluation mode, in which the cursor in the graphically and not time-synchronously displayed file (e.g. text file) is no longer set by the user's mouse movement, but by the speech recognition and for each recognized word (or recognized sequence of words) the data supplied by the graphically displayed file (e.g. text file) is advanced in its sequence within the file (or text) (e.g. by incrementing or decrementing (x%) within word$(x%)).

Of course, in principle it does not matter whether the synchronization input for assigning the time values to the visually displayed text is made in real time during recording or during playback of an already recorded text.

• - Stimmt das über die Spracherkennung erkannte Wort (oder auch ein String) mit dem jeweils über das Textarray durch die Mausfunktion ausgewählten, bzw. adressierten, bzw. innerhalb des Fangbereiches fortgeschalteten aus der dargestellten Textdatei überein (Wadd oder Wadd+1, etc.), dann wird vom Modus Maus in den Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung geschaltet und der zugehörige aktuelle Zeitwert ZTIME des akustisch wiedergegebenen Audiosignals als Schlüssel (=ZTIME) für die Abspeicherung in einen Hash verwendet, dessen Wert die Textposition (Zeilennummer, Wortnummer) des als übereinstimmend erkannten Textes ist (Übereinstimmung von durch Spracherkennung aufgefundenen Text und durch Suchen im Bereich der Mausposition aufgefundenen Text). Anschließend (nach der Abspeicherung) wird das Textarray, welches die Folge der Wörter des Textes (1 Wort je Index Nr.) enthält um 1 auf das nachfolgende Wort inkrementiert und mit dem durch die Spracherkennung nachfolgenden Wort verglichen, usw. Diese in diesem Absatz erläuterte Prozedur wird solange wiederholt, solange das jeweils nach einer Erkennung fortgeschaltete (nächste Wort) im Textarray mit dem von der Spracherkennung gelieferten aktuellen Wort jeweils erkannt wird. Wobei zu jeder Erkennung der Hasheintrag in die Liste Schlüssel/Wert = ZTIME/Textposition vorgenommen wird.
• - Stimmt das über die Spracherkennung erkannte Wort (oder auch ein String) mit dem jeweils im Textarray fortgeschalteten nicht überein, dann wird wieder in den Modus Maus wie im vorherigen Absatz erläutert zurückgeschaltet und das Einphasen auf die automatische Erkennung des gesprochenen Textes neu begonnen.
• - Die Textpositionen, deren Zuordnung als Wert zu den zugehörigen Zeitwerten ZTIME (als jeweils entsprechende Schlüssel) im Modus Maus gespeichert werden, solange sie durch die Spracherkennungsbewertung nicht ausreichend erkannt sind, werden der Reihe nach gespeichert, damit sie in einer nachfolgenden Korrektur automatisch angesprungen und manuell überprüft werden können.
• - Um den Benutzer sofort darauf hinzuweisen, ab wann jeweils der Modus Maus (selbsttätig) sich eingeschaltet hat, ist vorgesehen, die Farbe der Textdarstellung entsprechend zu wechseln, z.B. von schwarz (im Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung) auf rot im Modus Maus, wobei dann nur jener Text (Wort oder Wortgruppe) in rot, z.B. auch noch zusätzlich fett dargestellt, hervorgehoben wird, wo der Mauscursor sich gerade befindet. Schaltet die Software wieder in den Modus Spracherkennungsbewertung um, weil der durch die Spracherkennungsbewertung übersetzte Text im Fangbereich des Mauscursors liegt und durch das automatisierte suchen aufgefunden wird, dann wird der Text wieder ausschließlich schwarz dargestellt, wobei die ausschließlich durch das Programm (über die Worterkennung fortgeschaltete) Cursormarke jedoch noch zusätzlich bunt (z.B. blau) angezeigt werden kann, usw.

In mouse mode, every word (or word sequence) recognized by the speech recognition system that is in the immediate vicinity of the cursor mark in the graphically displayed file (e.g. text file) that is evaluated and displayed as the capture area is taken into account for recognition. This is done by constantly searching the position area of the word marked using the mouse (e.g. in the area three words before and three words after the word, etc.) in the displayed text file (using a corresponding loop). In addition to individual words, a string of, for example, a number of several words (e.g. three) can also be taken into account in this comparison, etc., ditto the number of words in the capture area can also be defined by user input, etc.

• - If the word (or string) recognized by speech recognition matches the word selected, addressed, or advanced within the capture range from the displayed text file using the mouse function via the text array (Wadd or Wadd+1, etc.), then the mode switches from mouse mode to speech recognition evaluation mode and the associated current time value ZTIME of the acoustically reproduced audio signal is used as a key (=ZTIME) for storage in a hash whose value is the text position (line number, word number) of the text recognized as matching (match between text found by speech recognition and text found by searching in the area of the mouse position). Subsequently (after saving), the text array containing the sequence of words in the text (1 word per index number) is incremented by 1 to the next word and compared with the next word generated by speech recognition, and so on. This procedure, explained in this paragraph, is repeated until the next word in the text array following a recognition is recognized with the current word provided by speech recognition. For each recognition, a hash entry is made in the list key/value = ZTIME/text position.
• - If the word (or string) recognized by the speech recognition does not match the one currently advanced in the text array, then the system switches back to mouse mode as explained in the previous paragraph and starts phasing in to the automatic recognition of the spoken text again.
• - The text positions whose assignment as a value to the corresponding time values ZTIME (as corresponding keys) are saved in mouse mode, as long as they are not sufficiently recognized by the speech recognition evaluation, are saved in sequence so that they can be automatically jumped to and manually checked in a subsequent correction.
• - In order to immediately inform the user when mouse mode has been activated (automatically), the color of the text display changes accordingly, e.g. from black (in speech recognition evaluation mode) to red in mouse mode, whereby only the text (word or group of words) where the mouse cursor is currently located is highlighted in red, e.g. also in bold. If the software switches back to speech recognition evaluation mode because the text translated by speech recognition evaluation is within the mouse cursor's capture range and is found by the automated search, the text is again displayed exclusively in black, although the cursor mark, which is advanced exclusively by the program (via word recognition), can also be displayed in color (e.g. blue), etc.

Automated searching in the mouse cursor capture area in Mouse mode is performed by a continuous search loop, during which the text array circulates the words in the capture area and constantly compares them with the text words recognized by speech recognition. The position index between which the text array circulates is determined by the position of the mouse cursor. If two identical words are found in a row, or if it is unclear whether there is a space between two words, etc., then a string check is also carried out. Instead of checking several individual words in the text one after the other, the word group is gradually changed by gradually adding the next word while omitting the first. If a match is found, this is taken into account when moving on to the next word (in relation to the word position in the text). The single word comparison and the string comparison can also be carried out simultaneously (quasi "simultaneously", of course alternating according to a program), whereby both comparisons can also influence each other with regard to the addressing of the string or word used for the comparison.

In this way, the synchronization file is obtained for the graphically displayed file (e.g. a text file) that is not played back according to a time grid. This allows the user to immediately display or locate the points marked as interesting by a key function during playback of a file played back according to a time grid (e.g. while listening to an acoustically played file (of another media genre)) via the graphically displayed file (e.g. a text file or even a printed work). Since such synchronization with the audio file also allows a video file to be synchronously integrated, to which text can be recorded, for example using a teleprompter as explained above, a reference to image sections can also be established in this way. As already mentioned, the reference between a music file (e.g. a wave file) and a score file can also be established in this way.

Further options are: The device designed according to the method according to claim 1, after saving the supplementary file (created by the user's keystroke), enables the playback of the file played back according to a time grid (e.g., an acoustic playback) using the synchronization file additionally stored on the server with a graphic source file (of another media type, e.g., a text file), also to display only partial excerpts concerning the text passages of a text file requested via the supplementary file. This can, for example, also be logged independently in non-volatile memory if the playback device also enables the reading of a text or the viewing of a graphic (music score, etc.), e.g., using an electrically rechargeable newspaper (with digital ink, etc.).

Alternatives and additional information: Depending on the application, it may be useful to make the aforementioned synchronization file (table) reverse-addressable, or to create such a table in which the positions of the graphic reference elements (image elements such as text, music notation, etc.) selected within the graphically displayed file not played back according to a time grid (text, music notation, etc.) are used as addresses (keys) to read out the time values Ztime corresponding to the file (audio, video, Flash, etc.) played back according to a time grid, and to use the read values to address the respective positions in the file (or signal) played back according to a time grid. The positions of the graphic reference elements (image elements such as text, music notation, etc.) are then selected, for example, using a mouse function.

Final note: The playback device for playing a file after a time The progressive code ZTime generated as a time value for the file played back in a raster according to the time raster does not necessarily refer to an absolute time, but rather to the amplitude response of the signal corresponding to the file. As usual, the counting pulses are derived from the highest possible output frequency and synchronized with the signal playback. How this happens depends on the playback method used. For example, in a video signal, these are the line sync pulses; in an audio method, this corresponds to a clock pulse whose stability corresponds to the output clock of the D/A converter, etc.

Further options:

Another very sensible option is to implement the preferred volume limit, allowing free selection of the relevant sections (of the text or audio signal), by using additional addressing and control characters. This ensures that the user of an audio book, after listening to a certain volume, is forced to return to the printed text to promote sales of the printed work (newspapers, books). This can also be achieved by including as many images as possible in the printed work (the numbers of which can also be entered to listen to the audio text).

If the preferred volume monitoring detects while listening to an audio book in this mode that the user should soon read the printed version again (as a continuation), they will be notified in good time, e.g., with a display showing how many minutes of the book they have left to listen to. When the listening volume is ended (just as when the device is turned off), the user is shown the continuation point in the printed version (or, if reading via a web page, a corresponding marker is set to jump to). If a passage is entered half a page (or a few pages) further on, the audio book can be continued from that point. The purpose here is to allow the audio book, which can be obtained free of charge over the internet, to be sold primarily as a printed version.

The communication between the audio book playback device and a server, which may be intended to support the user, then takes place, for example, via a mobile phone (via a corresponding interface if the MP3 player is not already integrated into the mobile phone), e.g. via an SMS to display text passages (page references, keywords, etc.) and to load the MP3 player's jump addresses.

Using the quoted DE 10 2004 046 413.8 For example, accessing a web page on a mobile phone can be made dependent on the phone number of the mobile phone. In a printed publication (newspaper, book, etc.), for example, an exemplary number is given which the user can use to log into a web page using their mobile phone to make the call, and who can then only log in using this mobile phone number. For example, to download an MP3 file (an audio book or a piece of music) to their MP3 player. For this purpose, it is therefore also sensible to provide an interface in the mobile phone with which the user can then only download their MP3 player using this phone number. The MP3 player can also be located directly in the mobile phone if necessary.

When the file is downloaded, the encrypted address section contains data corresponding to the phone number of the mobile phone used to log in to the website. This file can then only be played if the mobile phone is authorized. If the MP3 player is not integrated into the mobile phone, the mobile phone functions (e.g., via an infrared interface or acoustic coupling) like a chip card to authorize playback of the relevant files. This means that without the correct phone number of the mobile phone (or chip card), the MP3 file cannot be played. The key data, which contains the encrypted phone number, is then transferred from the mobile phone to the MP3 player via the mobile phone's interface (e.g., infrared interface).

It is evident that the method can be used for any data reproduction or processing device (visual files, audio files, text files, programs, etc.).

Claims (133)

Method with an arrangement for reproducing media data with a control function controlled by the reproduced file for accessing the reproduction via a reproduction device with A) codings of reference addresses contained in the reproduced file, which designate sections of the file and their length information from which locations in the file can be selected for access for reproduction, B) an access control for the reproduction device corresponding to the codings of the file, C) a blocking function which enables the reproduction of the file by the said codings only in excerpts or parts of the file influenced by the codings; characterized in that that i. a non-volatile data memory is provided in the playback device which, for each part of the file which is played back from a section which is played back for the first time, stores a file entry belonging to the played back section which refers to the coding of reference addresses to the sections of the file and their length information referred to in paragraph A) in the played back file, which is no longer immediately available to the user in an autonomous manner without further aids and can be deleted permanently (i.e. even when the device is switched off), ii. and that by summing up the lengths of the file as they correspond to the file entries stored in the non-volatile data memory for the reference addresses and their length information, the playback of the file beyond a total length limited by a predetermined limit and corresponding to the sum formed by this summation. Procedure according to Claim 1 , characterized in that the writing process of the codings into this memory as well as the control of the playback of the media data is controlled in the following way by the following method steps: a) when activating the playback of a section (of the file) marked by the codings contained in the file, a check is carried out as to whether an identifier corresponding to the relevant reproduced section (from the reproduced file) has already been written into the non-volatile data memory (YES? or NO?), b) if an identifier corresponding to the currently reproduced (or to be reproduced) section is not found in the non-volatile data memory (NO), then it is written into the non-volatile data memory as an identifier assigned to the reproduced section, provided that the non-volatile data memory is not already locked due to the determination that the permissible volume has already been reached, c) if an identifier corresponding to the currently reproduced (or to be reproduced) section is found in the non-volatile data memory (YES), then the section is reproduced accordingly, or if this identifier is not found in the non-volatile data memory is saved and is not saved according to the information in step b) (due to a determined volume limitation or further optional length limitation of a section), the section will not be played back, d) the check to limit the volume of the played back media data is carried out by summing the volumes of the sections as they correspond to the identifiers of these sections stored in the non-volatile data memory, whereby if it is determined that the volume limited by a specification (a parameter) has been reached or exceeded, the feasibility according to step b) is blocked and no new sections will be played back unless they correspond to the identifiers stored in the non-volatile data memory. Procedure according to Claim 1 , characterized in that , with the inclusion of a data transfer secured via an identifier (user addresses, device addresses) to a central server which manages the files to be played back, the file entries stored in the non-volatile memory for limiting playback are deleted on a file-related basis and included in a new file (as a data carrier, data source) which, apart from these file entries, otherwise corresponds to the content of the file in question, whereby when the file is later loaded into the playback device, these file entries are used instead of those deleted in the non-volatile memory (for this file) for limiting the volume of the file in the specified manner and that the playback of the old file, the file entries of which (in the non-volatile memory of the device) have been deleted on a file-related basis, is prevented by distinguishing a file-related address (= code to distinguish the old file from the new file, which can, for example, continue to refer to the device as a device address, etc.). Procedure according to Claim 2 and Claim 3 , characterized in that before carrying out the Claim 2 mentioned process steps, in the parameters of the reproduced file it is checked whether the file contains file entries which are created from the old file entries of the non-volatile memory according to the procedure according to Claim 3 included in the reproduced file (via the data carrier or via the data source), and if so, those parameters of the file in question are written into the non-volatile memory in order to carry out the procedure. Method according to one of the Claims 1 until 4 , characterized in that for the codings contained in the reproduced file, via which the encoded locations can be selected for playback during access, in addition to their start address, which in each case designates the beginning of a section to be reproduced, a length indication is provided which corresponds to the permissible length over which the section in question may be reproduced. Procedure according to Claim 5 , characterized in that the length information associated with a start address of a section is stored in the non-volatile memory (associated with the start address of the section) according to the information in step b), Claim 2 is written in and that the playback of a section in question is terminated when its length (relative to the start address) reaches the length in the non-volatile memory associated with the corresponding start address. Procedure according to Claim 5 or 6 , characterized in that when reproducing a section in question, the current length of the section, which is related to the start address and is continuously determined during reproduction and checked for the permissible maximum value, is written into the non-volatile memory (associated with the start address of the section) upon termination (or also upon correspondingly premature termination) of the section, this length being used to evaluate the volume according to step d), Claim 2 (when this section is next called or played again later). Method according to one of the Claims 1 until 7 , characterized in that the playback device has a device address for the purpose of a coincidence check with the file to be played back, wherein a coding (address) contained in the file or data source must be encoded to match this device address in order to enable the device to play back the file or data source or to carry out operations which further influence this playback, and in that the device has a mode which is secured by a digital key (e.g. a password) and which removes the said volume limitation of the file being played back if the coding carried out in the file or data source (as device address coding) matches the device address. Procedure according to Claim 8 , characterized in that , using this key and further using the device address, the file entries relating to the volume limitation in the non-volatile memory of the playback device for this file (which is to be played back with unlimited volume) are deleted and, upon detection of a designation of the file as a file to be played back with unlimited volume, the method according to Claims 1 until 7 is not carried out, whereby several (different) device addresses may be stored in the non-volatile memory of the device if a corresponding file is downloaded from a server using the key. Procedure according to one of the Claims 8 or 9 , or one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the said device address is used to delete the file entries in the non-volatile memory of the playback device belonging to a respective file, which each refer to the sections of the file already played back, wherein the following method steps are carried out: a) the playback device is connected via an appropriate network (directly or via a client computer) to a server for the purpose of data exchange (e.g. via the Internet), b) the server reads the device address and, if necessary, requests a password (option), c) the server carries out the following manipulations and changes on the playback device (in principle in any order): c1) the stored file entries and markings in the non-volatile memory of the playback device are read out to determine the sections of files played back (regarding their volume limitation for playback) and then the content of the non-volatile memory, which contains all files that may not be played back completely (i.e. only with volume limitation), is deleted, wherein addresses, file entries and markings, which concern those files which are not affected by the volume limitation (e.g. device address), are excluded from this deletion, and if necessary also for the files whose file entries affect the volume limitation for their playback, the user can make a selection (option via list), c2) the device address of the playback device is changed for all files which may not be played back completely (ie only with volume limitation), whereby for the files which (due to the use of the Claim 8 mentioned key) are not affected by the volume limitation, access via the old (original) device address is retained, or a separate device address stored in the file is used for verification purposes to identify that the file belongs to the device and may be played back without volume limitation, c3) and (upon request and selection by the user) all files are re-transferred via a corresponding data transfer (e.g., the user's client computer) to a storage device (e.g., the user's client computer) of the user, provided they concern the file entries deleted in the non-volatile memory of the playback device (under c1), whereby in these files - the new file modified by the server (or newly configured) device address of the playback device is taken into account, - all stored file entries and markers for determining the sections of files played back and a volume limitation of the playback, insofar as they relate to the respective file, are also contained in the file (in order to take into account the current playback status of the user related to the device address), - whereby, in the event that a new file is loaded into the playback device, a check is carried out to determine whether the file contains (the parameters created under c1) which relate to the volume limitation during its playback and, in this case, as a permanent content of the non-volatile memory, which contains the aforementioned file entries for checking the volume limitation, is stored once but permanently, loaded, or further supplemented during playback of the file and, upon repeated playback of this file, is no longer reloaded but only more than existing file entries in the non-volatile memory are extended accordingly for the repeated playback, if necessary, in accordance with the procedure according to Claim 1 or 2 (until the process step c1 of this claim is carried out again). Procedure according to one of the Claims 8 until 10 , characterized in that the file used by the playback device with the device address contained in it is loaded from a server using a network (e.g. Internet), wherein the playback device is connected to the relevant client computer which is used to download the file from the network, and the device address is transmitted to the server which inserts it into the file transferred to the client computer via the network (possibly encrypted, or at an encrypted location). Procedure according to one of the Claims 8 until 11 , characterized in that when configuring the device address of the playback device and/or downloading a file allowing unrestricted access using a key relating to a device address, the corresponding process (configuration of the device address and/or downloading of the file in question) is linked to this telephone connection (or mobile phone connection) by means of a code signal transmission or code signal transmission between a telephone connection (or mobile phone, etc.) called by the server and a client computer connected to the server, to which the playback device is also connected for the purpose of configuring or checking the device address, wherein instead of using a client computer the playback device itself can optionally have a corresponding network interface, such as an Internet connection. Procedure according to Claim 12 , characterized in that during the said downloading of a corresponding file a set of code words is loaded from the server into the playback device (e.g. also via the file only later loaded from the client computer into the device, ditto via data carriers created from it such as CD, DVD) and that in a later test step (which is to be carried out at appropriate intervals, e.g. weekly for a time extension in order to release the playback device for unrestricted playback) the code set stored in the playback device and addressed in accordance with the server is used for a comparison to release the device, the data transmission in question being carried out via a corresponding telephone line of the user which is called for this purpose by the server in order to transmit the addresses for addressing the comparison code from the set of code words stored in the playback device and the respective comparison code word via a connection from the telephone to the device. Procedure according to Claim 13 , characterized in that the code words stored in the playback device are shown on a display of the playback device and are transmitted to the server by the user via a telephone line called by the server, the server assessing by voice analysis whether the voice belongs to the user and further assessing by speech signal text recognition whether the code words received are correct in each case in order to receive or effect the activation of the playback rate by the server via a subsequent (e.g. acoustic) coupling of the telephone connection (with encrypted data transmission). Procedure according to one of the Claims 1 until 14 in order to encode and decode a control character in a digitally coded audio signal or digitally coded analogue signal, characterized in that the amplitude range which lies in the range of the maximum value and/or directly the maximum value (or if applicable the maximum values if positive and negative are used) is used for the encoding/decoding of the control character in question, wherein the value of the analogue signal used at this point for encoding/decoding a control character is not used by transmitting the digital signal but by interpolating the amplitude values adjacent to the value replaced by a control character. Procedure according to Claim 15 , characterized in that a control character decoded in the manner mentioned from the digitally represented analogue signal is used as a start character (identifier) of a series of free control signal values, such as parameters, addresses which do not belong to the analogue signal, and that in each case between these values used as control signal values of the digital signal, time values corresponding to the analogue signal are placed, which are additionally used for an interpolation in order to obtain the analogue values which are replaced by a control signal. Procedure according to Claim 16 , characterized in that a character assigned to the start character (e.g. subsequently coded parameter) has a number which indicates the number of characters to be coded subsequently and nested in the said manner in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters, addresses which do not belong to the analog signal, whereby the switching of the mode in which the decoding of these characters is carried out or not carried out is controlled by the displayed length of the decoding process. Method according to one of the Claims 16 or 17 , with a (conventional) linear time grid for the transfer of the digitally coded analog signals to the playback device, characterized in that a FIFO memory (First in First out) or a similarly organized RAM memory is used to bridge the gaps related to the linear time grid caused by the coding of control characters and characters nested in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters, addresses which are not associated with the analog signal ( 2 and 3 ) through which the digitally coded analogue signal passes, whereby the time shift or delay between reading in (or reading clock or time EST) and reading out (or reading clock or time ASL) of the digitally coded values (an*) is dimensioned such that over the duration of the clock cycle (or possibly also the clock cycles) within which no direct values from the digitally coded analogue signals are used to reconstruct the signal (during playback), but are replaced by interpolation values, are bridged by the output of the values from the FIFO memory in order to correspond to the linear time grid. Procedure according to Claim 18 , characterized in that the time shift or delay between reading (or reading clock or time EST) and reading (or reading clock or time ASL) of the digitally coded values (an*) at the FIFO memory corresponds to a value corresponding to the unit (=1) of the linear output time grid, wherein the time period at the relevant position of the time grid where no direct analog value but a control character or a parameter, or an address is placed and over which the interpolation of an analog value from an analog value leading this position (taken directly from the signal) and an analog value lagging this position (taken directly from the signal) is carried out, is bridged by the fact that the reading clock (or time EST), which otherwise leads the readout clock (AST) by one time grid position, performs a phase jump so that the value belonging to a relevant time grid position and read in with the reading clock EST is read out again with the readout clock AST belonging to the same time grid position, wherein the readout clock AST of the FIFO is linear over the entire time frame (ie does not perform a phase jump), thus the Claim 16 The (temporal) gaps in the series of values corresponding to the analog signal, which are related to the linear time grid of the readout clock AST, are compensated for by the aforementioned phase jump of the readout clock EST. Procedure according to Claim 19 , starting with the decoding of the start character (START) over a certain number of interleaved analog values (cf. an11 ... an25 in 2 ) the characters nested in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters, addresses (which do not belong to the analog signal), are coded alternately with the analog values, characterized in that the said phase jump of the read-in clock (EST) is initialized in each case by a toggle flip-flop (alternatingly switching flip-flop), the clock sequence of which is switched on with the decoded start character (START) and is switched off again after the last character of the coded sequence of characters nested in the analog values of the signal (such as parameters, addresses which do not belong to the analog signal) has been counted (so that no phase jump is initialized for the subsequent values at the read-in clock EST). Procedure according to one of the Claims 12 until 14 , which is carried out by a device with a car radio as an MP3 player or an alternative compression method for an audio signal, characterized in that the car radio has a radio telephone function (mobile phone) for an Internet data connection or an alternative data connection, which is connected to a server which stores the file (in particular a file for a method according to one of the Claims 1 until 20 ) into the car radio's memory, whereby the server has an Internet connection (via a Client computer) communicates with the user to control the activation. Procedure according to Claim 21 , characterized in that the car radio has, directly or via a peripheral additional device (e.g. in a module for the radio telephone function), a non-volatile memory for a compressed audio file (or files, if applicable) (e.g. MP3) with the associated playback converter, wherein the audio signal file contains jump marks which can be selected by entering (or selecting) a jump address in order to start playback of the audio signal at the relevant point, and that the transmission of this input (to select a relevant jump address) is carried out by the radio telephone function (e.g. by an SMS) which is sent from a server which manages the files, of which a relevant file is loaded into the non-volatile memory as a compressed audio file (e.g. MP3) for playback via the car radio. Car radio, which comprises a method with device according to Claim 21 or 22 characterized in that the button of the car radio which is used as a step button for stepping through the wavebands can access a further function which concerns the reproduction of the compressed audio signal, wherein, if necessary, several further steps (A, B, C) with corresponding (electronic) locking positions (MP3A, MP3B, MP3C) are provided, which each relate to the Claim 22 mentioned jump addresses. Car radio after Claim 23 , characterized in that the configuration option of the jump addresses also includes the configuration option of the device address according to the previous claims, whereby via this configuration the activation of a file which was initially only to be played back in a limited volume as a file which was to be played back in an unlimited volume takes place. Car radio after one of the Claims 23 until 24 , characterized in that (e.g. for less broadband radio networks) the file is first loaded from the client computer (of the user) into the module via a small portable module (e.g. with a USB interface) and is then loaded from this module into the car radio. Car radio after one of the Claims 23 until 25 , characterized in that the radio telephone is installed separately from the radio in a self-contained housing and is connected to a GPS system which, if necessary, transmits the position to a central server if a theft is detected. Method according to one of the preceding method claims for downloading a file from a server to a client computer or directly to a relevant playback device using a network access (such as the Internet), characterized in that in the playback device in which the file is to be played back, or which must be networked when the file is played back (e.g. by the computer) in order to enable playback, one or more device addresses are provided which must be coded in the played back data carrier file (or in the data source) as a corresponding check address in order to enable its playback, and that this device address(es) is/are read by the server and/or configured accordingly, the downloaded file being coded with the corresponding check address by the server. Procedure according to Claim 27 , characterized in that , regardless of the device address used in each case, in addition to the test address present in the file for the recognition of the device address encoded (or configured) in the device, a specific file address identifying the file (which exclusively encodes or corresponds to the usual name of the file) is provided, and is stored non-volatilely in the device (or part of the device) required to play back the file and remains permanently stored (i.e. even when the device is switched off) from the first play-back and cannot be deleted by the user, and that when the file is loaded, the coding of the file name is used to select the corresponding device address from several. Procedure according to Claim 27 or 28 , characterized in that the following procedure is carried out: When downloading the file from the server: a) the file name used to identify a specific file (independent of the device or user) or its identifier is written into a non-volatile memory of the device; b) the device address assigned when downloading the file is saved under the addressing (linking) of the file name. c) When playing a file, a coincidence check of the file name and device address is carried out, for example as follows: c1) Is the file name in question stored at all? If yes, then proceed to the next check; if no, then refuse playback and abort; c2) Does the file name stored under the address (reference) of this Does the device address stored in the file name match the verification address stored in the file (immediately or after decryption)? If yes, playback will begin. If no, playback will be denied and the file will be aborted. Procedure according to Claim 1 or 2 or according to another of the preceding method claims, characterized in that when the playback device is loaded with a file which can be played back without restrictions (or a file marked as such), the device address contained in the file of which must match that stored in the playback device in order for playback to take place, any file entries relating to this file (or to this file name) in the said non-volatile data memory are deleted upon playback. Procedure according to Claim 1 or 2 or according to another of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the addresses (ADD) for designating the sections and, if appropriate, length information for the sections (such as limitations, volume fractions) further contain an indication (as a code) as to whether, when a maximum length is reached (up to which a section in question may be reproduced), the reproduction of the file is to be stopped or continued with the subsequent section coding. Method according to one of the preceding method claims, in particular according to one of the Claims 12 or 13 , characterized in that the file name encoded in the reproduced file as a (e.g. also abbreviated) code contains a code belonging to several file names, hereinafter called LABEL, as a group address (e.g. to designate a company that produces or distributes the file), or is associated with this, and is noted in the said non-volatile memory in which the file entries are written, whereby this LABEL is also included in the comparison for determining a reproduction authorization of a file, and that in the event of detection of misuse in the newly assigned device addresses of a device are used by different users (e.g. by connecting to different telephone numbers to a device address concerning the manipulation according to Claim 12 or 13 when downloading new files and/or from the action after Claim 33 is used), a lock mark is written to the LABEL in the non-volatile memory of the device, which prevents the playback of files that belong to this LABEL as a common higher-level group address. Procedure according to Claim 32 , whereby instead of different LABELS only one (non-coded) LABEL to which all files to be played back belong can be defined (option) and the playback device has an exemplary coded serial number which is checked or saved together with the device address when a file is downloaded from the server, characterized in that the server manages the read serial number chronologically and, if it is determined that two or more identical device addresses exist for different serial numbers, blocks the device in question or the devices in question (if necessary taking into account the chronological order of their access to the server) by writing a blocking note into the non-volatile memory of the device. Method according to one of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the playback device is used only as copy protection for a computer, in such a way that it is connected via a data interface (e.g. USB) to a computer (PC) which plays back the file, the file being stored in encrypted form on the mass storage device of the computer (hard disk) and that software is running on the PC which, on the one hand, decrypts the file and, on the other hand, can access the non-volatile memory of the playback device in order to limit the playback of the file as if it were running in the playback device. Procedure according to Claim 34 , characterized in that the decryption of the file takes place in a format that can be processed by standard audio software, this file being offered to such software with respect to the computer's operating system as if it were being read from a mass storage device of the computer (hard disk). Method according to one of the preceding method claims with an arrangement for reproducing media data (e.g. acoustic, visual or text, or graphics) with a control function controlled by the reproduced file for accessing the reproduction via a reproduction device with A) codings of reference addresses to sections of the file and their length information contained in the reproduced file, via which the locations coded as reference addresses can be selected as start addresses when accessing the reproduction, B) a code corresponding to the file Access control for the playback device (e.g. CD player, MP3 player, computer, or for electronically rechargeable newspaper or book, music score display), C) a blocking function which allows the playback of the file by the said encodings only in extracts or parts of the file influenced by the encodings; characterized in that a non-volatile data memory is provided in the playback device which, for each section of the file played back, stores a file entry belonging to the section played back, which relates to the coding of reference addresses to sections of the file and their length information mentioned in paragraph A) in the file played back, from the first playback onwards and can no longer be deleted by the user permanently (i.e. even when the device is switched off), and that by summing up the lengths of the sections of the file as they correspond to the file entries stored in the non-volatile data memory as reference addresses and their length information, the playback of the file beyond a total length limited by a predetermined limit value corresponding to the sum of the lengths of the sections is prevented. Procedure according to Claim 36 , characterized in that the writing process of the codings into this memory as well as the control of the playback of the media data is controlled in the following way by the following method steps: e) when activating the playback of a section (of the file) marked by the codings contained in the file or data source, a check is carried out as to whether an identifier corresponding to the relevant reproduced section (from the reproduced file) has already been written into the non-volatile data memory (YES? or NO?), f) if an identifier corresponding to the currently reproduced (or to be reproduced) section is not found in the non-volatile data memory (NO), then it is written into the non-volatile data memory as an identifier assigned to the reproduced section, provided that the non-volatile data memory is not already locked due to the detection that the permissible volume has already been reached, g) if an identifier corresponding to the currently reproduced (or to be reproduced) section is found in the non-volatile data memory (YES), then the section is reproduced accordingly, or if this identifier is not saved and is also not saved according to the information in step b) (due to a determined volume limitation or further optional length limitation of a section), the section will not be played back, h) the check to limit the volume of the played back media data is carried out by summing the volumes of the sections as they correspond to the identifiers of these sections stored in the non-volatile data memory, whereby if it is determined that the volume limited by a specification (a parameter) has been reached or exceeded, the feasibility according to step b) is blocked and no new sections will be played back unless they correspond to the identifiers stored in the non-volatile data memory. Procedure according to Claim 36 , characterized in that , with the inclusion of a data transfer secured by means of an identifier (user address, device address) to a central server which manages the files to be played back, the file entries stored in the non-volatile memory for limiting playback are deleted on a file-related basis and included in a new file (as a data carrier, data source) which, apart from these file entries, otherwise corresponds to the content of the file in question, whereby when the file is later loaded into the playback device, these file entries are used in place of those deleted in the non-volatile memory (for this file) for limiting the volume of the file in the specified manner and that the playback of the old file, the file entries of which (in the non-volatile memory of the device) have been deleted on a file-related basis, is prevented by distinguishing a file-related address (= code for distinguishing the old file from the new file, which can, for example, continue to refer to the device as a device address). Procedure according to Claim 37 and Claim 38 , characterized in that before carrying out the Claim 2 mentioned process steps, in the parameters of the reproduced file it is checked whether the file contains file entries which are created from the old file entries of the non-volatile memory according to the procedure according to Claim 3 included in the reproduced file (via the data carrier or via the data source), and if so, these parameters of the file in question are written into the non-volatile memory in order to carry out the procedure. Procedure according to one of the Claims 36 until 39 , characterized in that for the codings contained in the reproduced file, via which the encoded locations can be selected for playback during access, in each case in addition to their start address, which in each case indicates the beginning of a section to be played back nor does it specify a length corresponding to the permissible length over which the section in question may be reproduced. Procedure according to Claim 40 , characterized in that the length information associated with a start address of a section is stored in the non-volatile memory (associated with the start address of the section) according to the information in step b), Claim 2 is written in and that the playback of a section in question is terminated when its length (relative to the start address) reaches the length in the non-volatile memory associated with the corresponding start address. Procedure according to Claim 40 or 41 , characterized in that when reproducing a section in question, the current length of the section, which is related to the start address and is continuously determined during reproduction and checked for the permissible maximum value, is written into the non-volatile memory (associated with the start address of the section) upon termination (or also upon correspondingly premature termination) of the section, this length being used to evaluate the volume according to step d), Claim 2 (when it is next called or when this section is repeated later). Method according to one of the Claims 36 until 42 , characterized in that the playback device has a device address for the purpose of a coincidence check with the file to be played back, wherein a coding (address) contained in the file must be encoded in accordance with this device address in order to enable the device to play back the file or to carry out operations which further influence this playback, and in that the device has a mode which is secured by a digital key (e.g. a password) and which removes the said volume limitation of the file being played back if the coding carried out in the file (as device address coding) matches the device address. Procedure according to Claim 43 , characterized in that , using this key and further using the device address, the file entries relating to the volume limitation in the non-volatile memory of the playback device for this file (which is to be played back with unlimited volume) are deleted and, upon detection of a designation of the file as a file to be played back with unlimited volume, the method according to Claims 1 until 7 is not carried out, whereby several (different) device addresses may be stored in the non-volatile memory of the device if a corresponding file is downloaded from a server using the key. Method according to one of the Claims 43 or 44 , or one of the preceding claims, characterized in that the said device address is used to delete the file entries in the non-volatile memory of the playback device belonging to a respective file, which each relate to the sections of the file already played back, wherein the following method steps are carried out: d) the playback device is connected via an appropriate network (directly or via a client computer) to a server for the purpose of data exchange (e.g. via the Internet), e) the server reads the device address and, if necessary, requests a password (option), f) the server carries out the following manipulations and changes on the playback device (in principle in any order): c1) the stored file entries and markings in the non-volatile memory of the playback device are read out to determine the sections of files to be played back (regarding their volume limitation for playback) and then the content of the non-volatile memory, which contains all files that cannot be played back in full (i.e. only with a volume limitation), is deleted, wherein addresses, File entries and markings, which concern those files which are not affected by the volume limitation (e.g. device address), are excluded from this deletion, and if necessary also for the files whose file entries affect the volume limitation for their playback, the user can make a selection (option via list), c2) the device address of the playback device is changed for all files which may not be played back completely (ie only with volume limitation), whereby for the files which (due to the use of the Claim 8 mentioned key) are not affected by the volume limitation, access via the old (original) device address is retained, or use a separate device address stored in the file for checking, to recognize that the file belongs to the device and may be played back without volume limitation, c3) and (at the request and selection of the user) all files are transferred via a corresponding data transfer (e.g. the user's client computer) to a storage device (e.g. client The user's computer) will be re-transmitted, provided they concern the file entries deleted from the non-volatile memory of the playback device (under c1), whereby in these files - the new device address of the playback device, modified (or reconfigured) by the server, is taken into account, - all saved file entries and markers for determining the reproduced sections of files and a volume limitation of the playback, provided they relate to the respective file, are also contained in the file (in order to take into account the current playback status of the user related to the device address), - whereby in the event that a new file is loaded into the playback device, a check is carried out to determine whether the file contains (the parameters created under c1) which relate to the volume limitation during its playback and, in this case, is stored once but permanently as the permanent content of the non-volatile memory, which contains the aforementioned file entries for checking the volume limitation, loaded, or further supplemented during playback of the file, and is not re-loaded upon repeated playback of this file, but only as existing file entries for the re-play in the non-volatile memory extended accordingly, if necessary, in accordance with the procedure Claim 1 or 2 (until the process step c1 of this claim is carried out again). Method according to one of the Claims 43 until 45 , characterized in that the file used by the playback device with the device address contained in it is loaded from a server using a network (e.g. Internet), wherein the playback device is connected to the relevant client computer which is used to download the file from the network, and the device address is transmitted to the server which inserts it into the file transferred to the client computer via the network (possibly encrypted, or at an encrypted location). Procedure according to one of the Claims 43 until 46 , characterized in that when configuring the device address of the playback device and/or downloading a file allowing unrestricted access using a key relating to a device address, the corresponding process (configuration of the device address and/or downloading of the file in question) is linked to this telephone connection (or mobile phone connection) by means of a code signal transmission or code signal transmission between a telephone connection (or mobile phone) called by the server and a client computer connected to the server, to which the playback device is also connected for the purpose of configuring or checking the device address, wherein instead of using a client computer the playback device itself can optionally have a corresponding network interface, such as an Internet connection. Procedure according to Claim 47 , characterized in that during the said downloading of a corresponding file a set of code words is loaded from the server into the playback device (e.g. also via the file only later loaded from the client computer into the device, ditto via data carriers created from it such as CD, DVD) and that in a later test step (which is to be carried out at appropriate intervals, e.g. weekly for a time extension in order to release the playback device for unrestricted playback) the code set stored in the playback device and addressed in accordance with the server is used for a comparison to release the device, the data transmission in question being carried out via a corresponding telephone line of the user which is called for this purpose by the server in order to transmit the addresses for addressing the comparison code from the set of code words stored in the playback device and the respective comparison code word via a connection from the telephone to the device. Procedure according to Claim 48 , characterized in that the code words stored in the playback device are shown on a display of the playback device and are transmitted to the server by the user via a telephone line called by the server, the server assessing by voice analysis whether the voice belongs to the user and further assessing by speech signal text recognition whether the code words received are correct in each case in order to receive or effect the activation of the playback device by the server via a subsequent (e.g. acoustic) coupling of the telephone connection (with encrypted data transmission). Procedure according to one of the Claims 36 until 49 in order to encode and decode a control character in a digitally coded audio signal or digitally coded analogue signal, characterized in that for the encoding/decoding of the control character in question the amplitude range which lies in the range of the maximum value and/or directly the maximum value (or if applicable the maximum values, if used positively and negatively) is used, wherein the value of the analogue signal used at this point for encoding/decoding a control character not by transmitting the digital signal but by interpolating the amplitude values adjacent to the value replaced by a control character. Procedure according to Claim 40 , characterized in that a control character decoded in the manner mentioned from the digitally represented analogue signal is used as a start character (identifier) of a series of free control signal values, such as parameters, addresses which do not belong to the analogue signal, and that in each case between these values used as control signal values of the digital signal, time values corresponding to the analogue signal are placed, which are additionally used for an interpolation in order to obtain the analogue values which are replaced by a control signal. Procedure according to Claim 51 , characterized in that a character assigned to the start character (e.g. subsequently coded parameter) has a number which indicates the number of characters to be coded subsequently and nested in the said manner in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters, addresses which do not belong to the analog signal, whereby the switching of the mode in which the decoding of these characters is carried out or not carried out is controlled by the displayed length of the decoding process. Procedure according to one of the Claims 51 or 52 , with a (conventional) linear time grid for the transfer of the digitally coded analog signals to the playback device, characterized in that a FIFO memory (First in First out) or a similarly organized RAM memory is used to bridge the gaps related to the linear time grid caused by the coding of control characters and characters nested in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters, addresses which are not associated with the analog signal ( 2 and 3 ) through which the digitally coded analogue signal passes, whereby the time shift or delay between reading in (or reading clock or time EST) and reading out (or reading clock or time ASL) of the digitally coded values (an*) is dimensioned such that over the duration of the clock cycle (or possibly also the clock cycles) within which no direct values from the digitally coded analogue signals are used to reconstruct the signal (during playback), but are replaced by interpolation values, are bridged by the output of the values from the FIFO memory in order to correspond to the linear time grid. Procedure according to Claim 53 , characterized in that the time shift or delay between reading (or reading clock or time EST) and reading (or reading clock or time ASL) of the digitally coded values (an*) at the FIFO memory corresponds to a value corresponding to the unit (=1) of the linear output time grid, wherein the time period at the relevant position of the time grid where no direct analog value but a control character or a parameter, or an address is placed and over which the interpolation of an analog value from an analog value leading this position (taken directly from the signal) and an analog value lagging this position (taken directly from the signal) is carried out, is bridged by the fact that the reading clock (or time EST), which otherwise leads the readout clock (AST) by one time grid position, performs a phase jump so that the value belonging to a relevant time grid position and read in with the reading clock EST is read out again with the readout clock AST belonging to the same time grid position, wherein the readout clock AST of the FIFO is linear over the entire time frame (ie does not perform a phase jump), thus the Claim 16 The (temporal) gaps in the series of values corresponding to the analog signal, which are related to the linear time grid of the readout clock AST, are compensated for by the aforementioned phase jump of the readout clock EST. Procedure according to Claim 54 , starting with the decoding of the start character (START) over a certain number of interleaved analog values (cf. an11 ... an25 in 2 ) the characters nested in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters, addresses (which do not belong to the analog signal), are coded alternately with the analog values, characterized in that the said phase jump of the read-in clock (EST) is initialized in each case by a toggle flip-flop (alternatingly switching flip-flop), the clock sequence of which is switched on with the decoded start character (START) and is switched off again after the last character of the coded sequence of characters nested in the analog values of the signal (such as parameters, addresses which do not belong to the analog signal) has been counted (so that no phase jump is initialized for the subsequent values at the read-in clock EST). Procedure according to one of the Claims 47 until 49 , which is carried out by a device with a car radio as an MP3 player or an alternative compression method for an audio signal, characterized in that the car radio has a radio telephone function (mobile phone) for an Internet data connection or an alternative data connection which is connected to a server that stores the file (in particular a file for a method according to one of the Claims 1 until 20 ) into the car radio's memory, whereby the server communicates with the user via an Internet connection (via a client computer) to control the activation. Method with device according to Claim 56 , characterized in that the car radio has, directly or via a peripheral additional device (e.g. in a module for the radio telephone function), a non-volatile memory for a compressed audio file (or files, if applicable) (e.g. MP3) with the associated playback converter, wherein the audio signal file contains jump marks which can be selected by entering (or selecting) a jump address in order to start playback of the audio signal at the relevant point, and that the transmission of this input (to select a relevant jump address) is carried out by the radio telephone function (e.g. by an SMS) which is sent from a server which manages the files, of which a relevant file is loaded into the non-volatile memory as a compressed audio file (e.g. MP3) for playback via the car radio. Car radio, which comprises a method with device according to Claim 56 or 57 characterized in that the button of the car radio which is used as a step button for stepping through the wavebands can access a further function which concerns the reproduction of the compressed audio signal, wherein, if necessary, several further steps (A, B, C) with corresponding (electronic) locking positions (MP3A, MP3B, MP3C) are provided, which each relate to the Claim 22 mentioned jump addresses. Car radio after Claim 58 , characterized in that the configuration option of the jump addresses also includes the configuration option of the device address according to the previous claims, whereby via this configuration the activation of a file which was initially only to be played back in a limited volume as a file which was to be played back in an unlimited volume takes place. Car radio after one of the Claims 58 until 59 , characterized in that (e.g. for less broadband radio networks) the file is first loaded from the client computer (of the user) into the module via a small portable module (e.g. with a USB interface) and is then loaded from this module into the car radio. Car radio after one of the Claims 58 until 60 , characterized in that the radio telephone is installed separately from the radio in a self-contained housing and is connected to a GPS system which, if necessary, transmits the position to a central server if a theft is detected. Method according to one of the preceding method claims, for downloading a file from a server to a client computer or directly to a relevant playback device using a network access (such as the Internet), characterized in that in the playback device in which the file is to be played back, or which must be networked when the file is played back (e.g. by the computer) in order to enable playback, one or more device addresses are provided which must be coded in the played back data carrier file (or in the data source) as a corresponding check address in order to enable its playback, and that this device address(es) is/are read by the server and/or configured accordingly, the downloaded file being coded with the corresponding check address by the server. Procedure according to Claim 62 , characterized in that , regardless of the device address used in each case, in addition to the test address present in the file for the recognition of the device address encoded (or configured) in the device, a specific file address identifying the file (which exclusively encodes or corresponds to the usual name of the file) is provided, and is stored in a non-volatile manner in the device (or part of the device) required to play back the file and remains permanently stored (i.e. even when the device is switched off) from the first play-back and cannot be deleted by the user, and that when the file is loaded, the coding of the file name is used to select the corresponding device address from several. Procedure according to Claim 62 or 63 , characterized in that the following procedure is carried out: When downloading the file from the server: c) the file name used to identify a specific file (independent of the device or user) or its identifier is written into a non-volatile memory of the device; d) the device address assigned when downloading the file is stored under the addressing (linking) of the file name. c) When playing a file, a coincidence check of the file name and the device address is carried out, for example as follows: c1) Is the file name in question stored at all? If yes, then proceed to the next check; if no, then refuse playback and abort; c2) Does the device address stored under the address (reference) of this file name match the check address stored in the file (immediately or after decryption)? If yes, then playback occurs; if no, then refuse playback and abort. Procedure according to Claim 36 or 37 or according to another of the preceding method claims, characterized in that when the playback device is loaded with a file which can be played back without restrictions (or a file marked as such), the device address contained in the file of which must match that stored in the playback device in order for playback to take place, any file entries relating to this file (or to this file name) in the said non-volatile data memory are deleted upon playback. Procedure according to Claim 36 or 37 or according to another of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the addresses (ADD) for designating the sections and, if appropriate, length information for the sections (such as limitations, volume fractions) further contain an indication (as a code) as to whether, when a maximum length is reached (up to which a section in question may be reproduced), the reproduction of the file is to be stopped or continued with the subsequent section coding. Method according to another of the preceding method claims, in particular according to one of the Claims 47 or 48 , characterized in that the file name encoded in the reproduced file as a (e.g. also abbreviated) code contains a code belonging to several file names, hereinafter called LABEL, as a group address (e.g. to designate a company that produces or distributes the file), or is associated with this, and is noted in the said non-volatile memory in which the file entries are written, whereby this LABEL is also included in the comparison for determining a reproduction authorization of a file, and that in the event of detection of misuse in the newly assigned device addresses of a device are used by different users (e.g. by connecting to different telephone numbers to a device address concerning the manipulation according to Claim 12 or 13 when downloading new files and/or from the action after Claim 33 is used), a lock mark is written to the LABEL in the non-volatile memory of the device, which prevents the playback of files that belong to this LABEL as a common higher-level group address. Procedure according to Claim 67 , whereby instead of different LABELS only one (non-coded) LABEL to which all files to be played back belong can be defined (option) and the playback device has an exemplary coded serial number which is checked or saved together with the device address when a file is downloaded from the server, characterized in that the server manages the read serial number chronologically and, if it is determined that two or more identical device addresses exist for different serial numbers, blocks the device in question or the devices in question (if necessary taking into account the chronological order of their access to the server) by writing a blocking note into the non-volatile memory of the device. Method according to one of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the playback device is used only as copy protection for a computer, in such a way that it is connected via a data interface (e.g. USB) to a computer (PC) which plays back the file, the file being stored in encrypted form on the mass storage device of the computer (hard disk) and that software is running on the PC which, on the one hand, decrypts the file and, on the other hand, can access the non-volatile memory of the playback device in order to limit the playback of the file as if it were running in the playback device. Procedure according to Claim 69 , characterized in that the decryption of the file takes place in a format that can be processed by standard audio software, this file being offered to such software with respect to the computer's operating system as if it were being read from a mass storage device of the computer (hard disk). Method according to one of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the playback device has a mode with a fixed sequence program, which generates a jump address or branch ADDbranch to a corresponding further section for each detected end of a reproduced section and that for a jumped address in the sequence program in each case the length as the respective end of a section is coded by a parameter [length] contained in the code of the sequence program, corresponding to the length with which the section is to be reproduced. Procedure according to Claim 71 , characterized in that a function (controllable via corresponding keys) is provided on the playback device with which the playback of the sections can be extended outside the fixed sequence program (and according to the method according to Claim 1 with subsequent claims, is registered in a non-volatile memory as claimed playback volume). Method according to one of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the playback device carries out a query as to whether, within a certain length from the beginning of the loaded file, a format relating to a device address coding is present or whether the file is only encoded according to a usual standard, and if this is determined, the playback takes place according to a usual standard. Method according to one of the preceding method claims with two or more files, one of which is reproduced according to a time grid (or according to a time axis) (e.g. acoustically or as a video signal, or as a flash file) and another is not reproduced according to a time grid, but contains graphic reference elements (text, musical notation) which have a meaningful relationship to the file reproduced according to a time grid, these graphic reference elements being positioned in a corresponding format in serial sequence (as a computer file displayed on a screen or also in a printed work, such as a book), characterized in that in addition to the said files, a reference file, hereinafter referred to as synchronization file, is provided which contains a reference table which has as input value (key) a progressively generated code ZTime, according to the time grid of the file reproduced according to a time axis for addressing, wherein under this code Ztime a table value is stored which belongs to a respective instantaneous value or to a sequence of instantaneous values and which corresponds in each case to the position of the respective The playback time Ztime corresponds to the graphic reference element (text, musical notation) corresponding to the playback time Ztime within the further graphically reproduced file (corresponding to a different media genre), that the playback device generates the said progressive code ZTime (as a time value) over the duration of the playback of the code reproduced according to a time grid (or according to a time axis), that the playback device for the playback of the file reproduced according to a time grid (e.g. audio playback, video) has a signal function (e.g. a key signal or external trigger signal), in which the current time value Ztimelabel = Ztime at the respective time of occurrence of the signal is stored in a memory or a file, hereinafter referred to as supplementary file, and that this supplementary file is subsequently used to address or search for the graphic reference elements corresponding to the stored time values Ztimelabel, or their data, characters (such as text, musical notation) using the said synchronization file (table) according to their position in the said further file (which is not reproduced according to a time grid), whereby this additional file is a computer file or may also concern a printed work containing the printed graphic characters. Procedure according to Claim 74 , characterized in that the said supplementary file is stored in the playback device, or remains, and that when using the playback device connected to a server (directly or via another client computer, e.g. via the Internet), on which the further file not played back according to a time grid (with graphic reference elements such as text, musical notation) is stored together with the said synchronization file (table), the user addresses or searches for the points marked during the (previous) playback of the file played back according to a time grid (e.g. audio playback, video) by a signal function (e.g. a key signal or external trigger signal) and receives the corresponding (automated) support for this via the server (e.g.) via the Internet. Procedure according to Claim 74 or 75 , wherein the file not reproduced according to a time grid displays a text file as graphic reference elements, or is a text file and the file reproduced according to a time grid is (or contains) an audio file (wave file, MP3) whose audio signal (speech and/or singing) has a meaningful reference to the text of the text file, characterized by the following process steps for the automatic and/or semi-automatic creation of the Claim 38 or 39 synchronisation file (table): a) Speech recognition software is provided which converts the wording of the spoken text reproduced during recording and/or playback of the audio signal (according to the audio file) into corresponding text characters, b) Starting from the (correct) start position of the text file, the text file is read out word by word or, if applicable, word group (string) by word group or, if applicable, syllable by syllable in the sequence of text according to step by step, whereby the read out word (or word group or string) is compared with the text currently generated by the speech recognition software (as a word or word group) and, if applicable, syllable by syllable: b1) If a positive comparison result (i.e. matching or true) is obtained in this comparison (results in the status: Speech recognition evaluation mode), then the position address of the text part or word (if applicable, syllable) corresponding to the comparison is stored from the text file as a value of the synchronization file (table) under the address (or key) of the time value Ztime of the audio signal underlying this comparison in the speech recognition software, and the next word or word group (if applicable, syllable) corresponding to the text sequence is read out from the text file and used for the (respective) subsequent comparison with the text currently generated by the speech recognition software. b2) If this comparison produces a negative comparison result (i.e., non-matching or incorrect) (results in the status: mouse mode), then the position address of that text section or word from the text file is saved as a value in the synchronization file (table) under the address (or key) of the time value Ztime of the audio signal on which this comparison is based in the speech recognition software, which corresponds to the current position of the cursor controllable by the user (e.g., with the mouse or keys). This status is retained until case b1 (of the above paragraph) occurs again. Procedure according to Claim 76 , characterized in that in the status mode mouse the respective current cursor position marks a capture area which uses a length (of the current string) extended by this capture area in the area of the word group located at the current cursor position as a comparison basis for the text currently reproduced as an audio signal from the audio file and converted by the speech recognition, within which the word recognized by the speech recognition is searched for, wherein when a word is recognized the system switches back to the status mode speech recognition evaluation. Procedure according to Claim 76 or 77 , characterized in that for each automatic switch to the mouse status mode in which the text selection is made by the user, the relevant text area to be selected by the user with the cursor function is highlighted in a different color. Procedure according to one of the Claims 76 until 78 , characterized in that all value pairs of the synchronization file for which the speech recognition software switches to the mouse mode due to a lack of recognition of the text reproduced by the audio signal are stored for subsequent correction (during which the recorded audio signal is reproduced) and can be retrieved step by step during the correction. Procedure according to Claim 79 , characterized in that during the correction the audio signal is reproduced at a slower speed than that corresponding to the recording and that this deviation from the recording speed is corrected during the creation of the synchronization file (table) in relation to the key values or time values Ztime used for addressing (which correspond to the individual words of the text) in accordance with the ratio of the speed deviation. Procedure according to Claim 74 or 75 , whereby the file not reproduced according to a time grid displays a music file as graphic reference elements, or corresponds to a music file (also MIDI file) and the file reproduced according to a time grid corresponds to an audio file (Wave file, MP3), the audio signal (music) of which has a corresponding reference to the musical notation of the music file according to the reproduced tones, characterized by the following process steps for the automatic and/or semi-automatic creation of the Claim 38 or 39 mentioned synchronization file (table): a) A frequency analysis is provided which converts the tones of the music played back during recording and/or playback of the mentioned audio file into a corresponding notation or even just a partial notation (only concerning the pitch) which is sufficient to assign it to an already existing notation, b) Starting from the (correct) start position of the note file, the note file is read out note by note or, if applicable, note group (string) by note group in the sequence of notes, step by step, whereby the read out note (or the note group or the string, etc.) is compared (step by step) with the notation currently generated by the note recognition software (as a note or note group) in order to assign the progressive code ZTime (as a time value) in the playback device generated time value to the corresponding positions in the musical notation as a synchronization file (table). Procedure according to one of the Claims 74 until 81 , characterized in that the said synchronization file (table) is also addressable in reverse, or such a table is created in which the positions of the graphic reference elements (image elements such as text, musical notation) selected in the graphically displayed file (text, musical notation) which is not reproduced according to a time grid are used as an address (key) in order to read out the time values Ztime corresponding to the file (audio, video, flash) reproduced according to a time grid and to address the respective positions of the file (or signal) reproduced according to a time grid using the values read out. Procedure according to one of the Claims 74 until 82 , characterized in that the playback device generates the said progressive code ZTime (as a time value) using markers (or synchronizing signals) contained in the reproduced amplitude curve of the file reproduced according to a time grid, which markers synchronize the proportionality of the amplitude curve to the time (as is usual in audio playback, MP3 playback, video playback, the time clock, for example, refers to the amplitude curve of the signal, cf. output clock of a D/A converter or line synchronizing pulses of a video signal). Method according to one of the preceding method claims with an arrangement for reproducing media data (e.g. acoustic, visual or text, or graphics) with a control function for accessing the reproduction via a reproduction device which is controlled by the reproduced file or by the data source (or a data carrier, etc.). With B) codes of reference addresses to sections of the file and their length information contained in the reproduced file, via which the locations in the file coded as reference addresses can be selected as start addresses when accessing the reproduction, D) an access control for the reproduction device (e.g. for a CD player, MP3 player, computer, or for an electronically loadable newspaper, music score display) which corresponds to the codes of the file, E) a blocking function which enables the reproduction of the file by means of the said codes only in excerpts or parts of the file influenced by the codes; characterized in that a non-volatile data memory is provided in the playback device which, for each section of the file played back, stores a file entry belonging to the section played back, which relates to the coding of reference addresses, sections of the file and their length information mentioned in paragraph A) in the file played back, from the first playback onwards and in a way that is no longer independently erasable for the user, permanently (i.e. even when the device is switched off), and that by summing up the lengths of the sections of the file as they correspond to the file entries stored in the non-volatile data memory as reference addresses and their length information, the playback of the file beyond a total length limited by a predetermined limit value corresponding to the sum of the lengths of the sections is prevented. Procedure according to Claim 84 , characterized in that the writing process of the codings into this memory as well as the control of the playback of the media data is controlled in the following way by the following method steps: i) when activating the playback of a section (of the file) marked by the codings contained in the file, a check is carried out as to whether an identifier corresponding to the relevant reproduced section (from the reproduced file) has already been written into the non-volatile data memory (YES? or NO?), j) if an identifier corresponding to the currently reproduced (or to be reproduced) section is not found in the non-volatile data memory (NO), then it is written into the non-volatile data memory as an identifier assigned to the reproduced section, provided that the non-volatile data memory is not already locked due to the detection that the permissible volume has already been reached, k) if an identifier corresponding to the currently reproduced (or to be reproduced) section is found in the non-volatile data memory (YES), then the section is reproduced accordingly, or if this identifier is not found in the non-volatile data memory is not saved and is not saved according to the information in step b) (due to a determined volume limitation or further optional length limitation of a section), the section is not played back, I) the check for limiting the volume of the played back media data is carried out by summing the volumes of the sections as they correspond to the identifiers of these sections stored in the non-volatile data memory, whereby if it is determined that the volume limited by a specification (a parameter) has been reached or exceeded, the feasibility according to step b) is blocked, thus no new sections may be reproduced if they do not correspond to the identifiers stored in the non-volatile data memory. Procedure according to Claim 84 , characterized in that , with the inclusion of a data transfer secured via an identifier (user address, device address) to a central server which manages the files to be played back, the file entries stored in the non-volatile memory for limiting playback are deleted on a file-related basis and included in a new file (as a data carrier, data source) which, apart from these file entries, otherwise corresponds to the content of the file in question, whereby when the file is later loaded into the playback device, these file entries are used in place of those deleted in the non-volatile memory (for this file) for limiting the volume of the file in the specified manner and that the playback of the old file, the file entries of which (in the non-volatile memory of the device) have been deleted on a file-related basis, is prevented by distinguishing a file-related address (= code for distinguishing the old file from the new file, which can, for example, continue to refer to the device as a device address). Procedure according to Claim 85 and Claim 86 , characterized in that before carrying out the Claim 2 mentioned process steps, in the parameters of the reproduced file it is checked whether the file contains file entries which are created from the old file entries of the non-volatile memory according to the procedure according to Claim 3 included in the reproduced file (via the data carrier or via the data source), and if so, these parameters of the file in question are written into the non-volatile memory in order to carry out the procedure. Procedure according to one of the Claims 84 until 87 , characterized in that for the codings contained in the reproduced file, via which the encoded locations can be selected for playback during access, in addition to their start address, which in each case designates the beginning of a section to be reproduced, a length indication is provided which corresponds to the permissible length over which the section in question may be reproduced. Procedure according to Claim 88 , characterized in that the length information associated with a start address of a section is stored in the non-volatile memory (associated with the start address of the section) according to the information in step b), Claim 2 is written in and that the playback of a section in question is terminated when its length (relative to the start address) reaches the length in the non-volatile memory associated with the corresponding start address. Procedure according to Claim 88 or 89 , characterized in that when reproducing a section in question, the current length of the section, which is related to the start address and is continuously determined during reproduction and checked for the permissible maximum value, is written into the non-volatile memory (associated with the start address of the section) upon termination (or also upon correspondingly premature termination) of the section, this length being used to evaluate the volume according to step d), Claim 2 (when it is next called or when this section is repeated later). Procedure according to one of the Claims 84 until 90 , characterized in that the playback device has a device address for the purpose of a coincidence check with the file to be played back, wherein a coding (address) contained in the file must be encoded in accordance with this device address in order to enable the device to play back the file or to carry out operations which further influence this playback, and in that the device has a mode which is secured by a digital key (e.g. a password) and which removes the said volume limitation of the file being played back if the coding carried out in the file (as device address coding) matches the device address. Procedure according to Claim 91 , characterized in that , using this key and further using the device address, the file entries relating to the volume limitation in the non-volatile memory of the playback device for this file (which is to be played back with unlimited volume) are deleted and, upon detection of a designation of the file as a file to be played back with unlimited volume, the method according to Claims 1 until 7 is not carried out, whereby several (different) device addresses may be stored in the non-volatile memory of the device if a corresponding file is downloaded from a server using the key. Procedure according to one of the Claims 91 or 92 , characterized in that said device address is used to store the data stored in the non-volatile memory of the playback device to delete all file entries belonging to a given file, each of which refers to the sections of the file that have already been played back, whereby the following procedural steps are carried out: g) the playback device is connected to a server for the purpose of data exchange via an appropriate network (directly or via a client computer) (e.g. via the Internet), h) the server reads the device address and, if necessary, requests a password (option), i) the server carries out the following manipulations and changes to the playback device (in principle in any order): c1) the stored file entries and markers in the non-volatile memory of the playback device are read out to determine the reproduced sections of files (regarding their volume limitation for playback) and then the content of the non-volatile memory, which contains all files that may not be played back in their entirety (i.e., only with a volume limitation), is deleted, whereby addresses, file entries, and markers relating to those files that are not affected by the volume limitation (e.g., device address) are excluded from this deletion, and if necessary, also for the files whose file entries affect the volume limitation for their playback, the user can make a selection (option via list), c2) the device address of the playback device is changed for all files that may not be played back in full (ie only with volume limitation), whereby for the files that (due to the use of the Claim 8 mentioned key) are not affected by the volume limitation, access via the old (original) device address is retained, or use a separate device address stored in the file for verification purposes to detect that the file belongs to the device and may be played back without a volume limitation, c3) and (upon request and selection by the user) all files are re-transferred via a corresponding data transfer (e.g., the user's client computer) to a storage device (e.g., the user's client computer) of the user, provided they concern the file entries deleted in the non-volatile memory of the playback device (under c1), whereby in these files - the new device address of the playback device, modified (or reconfigured) by the server is taken into account, - all stored file entries and markers for determining the sections of files played back and a volume limitation of the playback, provided they concern the respective file, are also contained in the respective file (in order to take into account the current playback status of the user related to the device address), - whereby for the In the event that a new file is loaded into the playback device, it is checked whether the file (created under c1) contains parameters which affect the volume limitation during its playback and in this case is stored once but permanently as the permanent content of the non-volatile memory, which contains the aforementioned file entries for checking the volume limitation, loaded, or further supplemented during playback of the file and, in the case of repeated playback of this file, is not reloaded but only more than the existing file entries in the non-volatile memory are extended accordingly for the renewed playback, if necessary, in accordance with the procedure according to Claim 1 or 2 (until the process step c1 of this claim is carried out again). Procedure according to one of the Claims 91 until 93 , characterized in that the file used by the playback device with the device address contained in it is loaded from a server using a network (e.g. Internet), wherein the playback device is connected to the relevant client computer which is used to download the file from the network, and the device address is transmitted to the server which inserts it into the file transferred to the client computer via the network (possibly encrypted, or at an encrypted location). Procedure according to one of the Claims 91 until 94 , characterized in that when configuring the device address of the playback device and/or downloading a file allowing unrestricted access using a key relating to a device address, the corresponding process (configuration of the device address and/or downloading of the file in question) is linked to this telephone connection (or mobile phone connection) by means of a code signal transmission or code signal transmission between a telephone connection (or mobile phone) called by the server and a client computer connected to the server, to which the playback device is also connected for the purpose of configuring or checking the device address, wherein instead of using a client computer the playback device itself can optionally have a corresponding network interface, such as an Internet connection. Procedure according to Claim 95 , characterized in that during said downloading of a corresponding file, a set of code words is transferred from the server to the playback device is loaded (e.g. also via the file loaded later from the client computer into the device, ditto via data storage devices created from it such as CDs, DVDs) and that in a later test step (which is to be carried out at appropriate intervals, e.g. weekly for a time extension in order to activate the playback device for unrestricted playback) the code set stored in the playback device and addressed in accordance with the server is used for a comparison to activate the device, with the data transmission in question being carried out via a corresponding telephone line of the user, which is called by the server for this purpose in order to transmit the addresses for addressing the comparison code from the set of code words stored in the playback device and the respective comparison code word via a connection from the telephone to the device. Procedure according to Claim 96 , characterized in that the code words stored in the playback device are shown on a display of the playback device and are transmitted to the server by the user via a telephone line called by the server, the server assessing by voice analysis whether the voice belongs to the user and further assessing by speech signal text recognition whether the code words received are correct in each case in order to receive or effect the activation of the playback device by the server via a subsequent (e.g. acoustic) coupling of the telephone connection (with encrypted data transmission). Procedure according to one of the Claims 84 until 97 in order to encode and decode a control character in a digitally coded audio signal or digitally coded analogue signal, characterized in that the amplitude range which lies in the range of the maximum value and/or directly the maximum value (or if applicable the maximum values if positive and negative are used) is used for the encoding/decoding of the control character in question, wherein the value of the analogue signal used at this point for encoding/decoding a control character is not used by transmitting the digital signal but by interpolating the amplitude values adjacent to the value replaced by a control character. Procedure according to Claim 98 , characterized in that a control character decoded in the manner mentioned from the digitally represented analogue signal is used as a start character (identifier) of a series of free control signal values, such as parameters, addresses which do not belong to the analogue signal, and that in each case between these values used as control signal values of the digital signal, time values corresponding to the analogue signal are placed, which are additionally used for an interpolation in order to obtain the analogue values which are replaced by a control signal. Procedure according to Claim 99 , characterized in that a character assigned to the start character (e.g. subsequently coded parameter) has a number which indicates the number of characters to be coded subsequently and nested in the said manner in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters, addresses which do not belong to the analog signal, whereby the switching of the mode in which the decoding of these characters is carried out or not carried out is controlled by the displayed length of the decoding process. Procedure according to one of the Claims 99 or 100 , with a (conventional) linear time grid for the transfer of the digitally coded analog signals to the playback device, characterized in that a FIFO memory (First in First out) or a similarly organized RAM memory is used to bridge the gaps related to the linear time grid caused by the coding of control characters and characters nested in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters, addresses which are not associated with the analog signal ( 2 and 3 ) through which the digitally coded analogue signal passes, whereby the time shift or delay between reading in (or reading clock or time EST) and reading out (or reading clock or time ASL) of the digitally coded values (an*) is dimensioned such that over the duration of the clock cycle (or possibly also the clock cycles) within which no direct values from the digitally coded analogue signals are used to reconstruct the signal (during playback), but are replaced by interpolation values, are bridged by the output of the values from the FIFO memory in order to correspond to the linear time grid. Procedure according to Claim 101 , characterized in that the time shift or delay between reading (or reading clock or time EST) and reading (or reading clock or time ASL) of the digitally coded values (an*) at the FIFO memory corresponds to a value corresponding to the unit (=1) of the linear output time grid, wherein the time period at the relevant point of the time grid where no direct analog value but a control character or a parameter, or an address is placed and over which the interpolation of an analog value from an analog value leading this point (taken directly from the signal) and an analog value following this point analog value (taken directly from the signal), is bridged by the fact that the read-in clock (or time EST), which otherwise leads the read-out clock (AST) by one time grid position, carries out a phase jump, so that the value belonging to a respective time grid position and read in with the read-in clock EST is read out again with the read-out clock AST belonging to the same time grid position, whereby the read-out clock AST of the FIFO is linear over the entire time grid (ie does not carry out a phase jump), thus the Claim 16 The (temporal) gaps in the series of values corresponding to the analog signal, which are related to the linear time grid of the readout clock AST, are compensated for by the aforementioned phase jump of the readout clock EST. Procedure according to Claim 102 , starting with the decoding of the start character (START) over a certain number of interleaved analog values (cf. an11 ... an25 in 2 ) the characters nested in the analog values of the signal, such as parameters, addresses (which do not belong to the analog signal), are coded alternately with the analog values, characterized in that the said phase jump of the read-in clock (EST) is initialized in each case by a toggle flip-flop (alternatingly switching flip-flop), the clock sequence of which is switched on with the decoded start character (START) and is switched off again after the last character of the coded sequence of characters nested in the analog values of the signal (such as parameters, addresses which do not belong to the analog signal) has been counted (so that no phase jump is initialized for the subsequent values at the read-in clock EST). Procedure according to one of the Claims 95 until 97 , which is carried out by a device with a car radio as an MP3 player or an alternative compression method for an audio signal, characterized in that the car radio has a radio telephone function (mobile phone) for an Internet data connection or an alternative data connection, which is connected to a server which stores the file (in particular a file for a method according to one of the Claims 1 until 20 ) into the car radio's memory, whereby the server communicates with the user via an Internet connection (via a client computer) to control the activation. Procedure according to Claim 104 , characterized in that the car radio has, directly or via a peripheral additional device (e.g. in a module for the radio telephone function), a non-volatile memory for a compressed audio file (or files, if applicable) (e.g. MP3) with the associated playback converter, wherein the audio signal file contains jump marks which can be selected by entering (or selecting) a jump address in order to start playback of the audio signal at the relevant point, and that the transmission of this input (to select a relevant jump address) is carried out by the radio telephone function (e.g. by an SMS) which is sent from a server which manages the files, of which a relevant file is loaded into the non-volatile memory as a compressed audio file (e.g. MP3) for playback via the car radio. Car radio, which uses a process according to Claim 104 or 105 characterized in that the button of the car radio which is used as a step button for stepping through the wavebands can access a further function which concerns the reproduction of the compressed audio signal, wherein, if necessary, several further steps (A, B, C) with corresponding (electronic) locking positions (MP3A, MP3B, MP3C) are provided, which each relate to the Claim 22 mentioned jump addresses. Car radio after Claim 106 , characterized in that the configuration option of the jump addresses also includes the configuration option of the device address according to the previous claims, whereby via this configuration the activation of a file which was initially only to be played back in a limited volume as a file which was to be played back in an unlimited volume takes place. Car radio after one of the Claims 106 until 107 , characterized in that (e.g. for less broadband radio networks) the file is first loaded from the client computer (of the user) into the module via a small portable module (e.g. with a USB interface) and is then loaded from this module into the car radio. Car radio after one of the Claims 106 until 108 , characterized in that the radio telephone is installed separately from the radio in a self-contained housing and is connected to a GPS system which, if necessary, transmits the position to a central server if a theft is detected. Method according to one of the preceding method claims for downloading a file from a server to a client ent computer or directly into a relevant playback device using a network access (such as the Internet), characterized in that in the playback device in which the file is to be played back, or which must be networked when the file is played back (e.g. by the computer) in order to enable playback, one or more device addresses are provided which must be coded in the played data carrier file (or in the data source) as a corresponding check address in order to enable its playback, and that this device address (s) is (are) read by the server and/or configured accordingly, the downloaded file being coded with the corresponding check address by the server. Procedure according to Claim 110 , characterized in that , regardless of the device address used in each case, in addition to the test address present in the file for the recognition of the device address encoded (or configured) in the device, a specific file address identifying the file (which exclusively encodes or corresponds to the usual name of the file) is provided, and is stored in a non-volatile manner in the device (or part of the device) required to play back the file and remains permanently stored (i.e. even when the device is switched off) from the first play-back and cannot be deleted by the user, and that when the file is loaded, the coding of the file name is used to select the corresponding device address from several. Procedure according to Claim 110 or 111 , characterized in that the following method is carried out: When the file is downloaded from the server: e) the file name or identifier used to identify a specific file (independent of the device or user) is written to a non-volatile memory on the device; f) the device address assigned when the file was downloaded is saved under the addressing (linking) of the file name. c) When a file is played back, a coincidence check is carried out between the file name and the device address, for example as follows: c1) Is the file name in question stored at all? If yes, then for the next check; if no, then playback is refused and the file is aborted; c2) Does the device address stored under the address (reference) of this file name match the test address stored in the file (immediately or after decryption)? If yes, then playback takes place; if no, then playback is refused and the file is aborted. Procedure according to Claim 84 or 85 or according to another of the preceding method claims, characterized in that when the playback device is loaded with a file which can be played back without restrictions (or a file marked as such), the device address contained in the file of which must match that stored in the playback device in order for playback to take place, any file entries relating to this file (or to this file name) in the said non-volatile data memory are deleted upon playback. Procedure according to Claim 84 or 85 or according to another of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the addresses (ADD) for designating the sections and, if appropriate, length information for the sections (such as limitations, volume fractions) further contain an indication (as a code) as to whether, when a maximum length is reached (up to which a section in question may be reproduced), the reproduction of the file is to be stopped or continued with the subsequent section coding. Method according to one of the preceding method claims, in particular according to one of the Claims 95 or 96 , characterized in that the file name encoded in the reproduced file as a (e.g. also abbreviated) code contains a code belonging to several file names, hereinafter called LABEL, as a group address (e.g. to designate a company that produces or distributes the file), or is associated with this, and is noted in the said non-volatile memory in which the file entries are written, whereby this LABEL is also included in the comparison for determining a reproduction authorization of a file, and that in the event of detection of misuse in the newly assigned device addresses of a device are used by different users (e.g. in which the connection to different telephone numbers to a device address concerning the manipulation according to Claim 12 or 13 when downloading new files and/or from the action after Claim 33 is used), a lock mark is written to the LABEL in the non-volatile memory of the device, which prevents the playback of files that belong to this LABEL as a common higher-level group address. Procedure according to Claim 115 , where instead of different LABELs, only one (non-encoded) LABEL can be defined, to which all files to be played belong (Option) and the playback device has an exemplary coded serial number which is checked or stored together with the device address when a file is downloaded from the server, characterized in that the server manages the read serial number chronologically and, if it determines that two or more identical device addresses exist for different serial numbers, blocks the device in question or the devices in question (if necessary taking into account the chronological order of their access to the server) by writing a blocking note into the non-volatile memory of the device. Method according to one of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the playback device is used only as copy protection for a computer, in such a way that it is connected via a data interface (e.g. USB) to a computer (PC) which plays back the file, the file being stored in encrypted form on the mass storage device of the computer (hard disk) and that software is running on the PC which, on the one hand, decrypts the file and, on the other hand, can access the non-volatile memory of the playback device in order to limit the playback of the file as if it were running in the playback device. Procedure according to Claim 117 , characterized in that the decryption of the file takes place in a format that can be processed by standard audio software, this file being offered to such software with respect to the computer's operating system as if it were being read from a mass storage device of the computer (hard disk). Method according to one of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the playback device has a mode with a fixed sequence program which generates a jump address or branch ADDbranch to a corresponding further section for each detected end of a reproduced section and that for a jumped address in the sequence program the length is coded as the respective end of a section by a parameter [length] contained in the code of the sequence program, corresponding to the length with which the section is to be reproduced. Procedure according to Claim 119 , characterized in that a function (controllable via corresponding keys) is provided on the playback device with which the playback of the sections can be extended outside the fixed sequence program (and according to the method according to Claim 1 with subsequent claims, is registered in a non-volatile memory as claimed playback volume). Method according to one of the preceding method claims, characterized in that the playback device carries out a query as to whether, within a certain length from the beginning of the loaded file, a format relating to a device address coding is present or whether the file is only encoded according to a usual standard, and if this is determined, the playback takes place according to a usual standard. Method according to one of the preceding method claims with two or more files, one of which is reproduced according to a time grid (or according to a time axis) (e.g. acoustically or as a video signal, or as a flash file) and another is not reproduced according to a time grid, but contains graphic reference elements (text, musical notation) which have a meaningful relationship to the file reproduced according to a time grid, these graphic reference elements being positioned in a corresponding format in serial sequence (as a computer file displayed on a screen or in a printed work, such as a book), characterized in that in addition to the said files, a reference file, hereinafter referred to as synchronization file, is provided which contains a reference table which has as input value (key) a progressively generated code ZTime, according to the time grid of the file reproduced according to a time axis for addressing, wherein under this code Ztime a table value is stored which belongs to a momentary value or to a sequence of momentary values and which corresponds in each case to the position of the respective playback time Ztime corresponding graphic reference element (text, musical notation) within the further graphically reproduced file (corresponding to another media genre), that the playback device generates the said progressive code ZTime (as a time value) over the duration of the playback of the code reproduced according to a time grid (or according to a time axis), that the playback device for the playback of the file reproduced according to a time grid (e.g. audio playback, video) has a signal function (e.g. a key signal or external trigger signal), in which the current time value Ztimelabel = Ztime at the respective time of the occurrence of the signal is stored in a memory or a file, hereinafter referred to as supplementary file, and that this supplementary file is subsequently used to generate the graphic reference elements corresponding to the stored time values Ztimelabel elements, or their data, characters (such as text, musical notation) using the said synchronisation file (table) according to their position in the said further file (which is not reproduced according to a time grid), whereby this further file is a computer file or can also concern a printed work with the printed graphic characters. Procedure according to Claim 122 , characterized in that the said supplementary file is stored in the playback device, or remains, and that when using the playback device connected to a server (directly or via another client computer, e.g. via the Internet), on which the further file not played back according to a time grid (with graphic reference elements such as text, musical notation) is stored together with the said synchronization file (table), the user addresses or searches for the points marked during the (previous) playback of the file played back according to a time grid (e.g. audio playback, video) by a signal function (e.g. a key signal or external trigger signal) and receives the corresponding (automated) support for this via the server (e.g.) via the Internet. Procedure according to Claim 122 or 123 , wherein the file not reproduced according to a time grid displays a text file as graphic reference elements, or is a text file and the file reproduced according to a time grid is (or contains) an audio file (wave file, MP3) whose audio signal (speech and/or singing) has a meaningful reference to the text of the text file, characterized by the following process steps for the automatic and/or semi-automatic creation of the Claim 38 or 39 mentioned synchronization file (table): c) Speech recognition software is provided which converts the wording of the spoken text reproduced during recording and/or playback of the audio signal (according to the mentioned audio file) into corresponding text characters, d) Starting from the (correct) start position of the text file, the text file is read out word by word or, if applicable, word group (string) by word group or, if applicable, syllable by syllable in sequence according to the text sequence, whereby the read out word (or word group or string) is compared with the text currently generated by the speech recognition software (as a word or word group), if applicable, syllable by syllable: b1) If a positive comparison result (i.e. matching or true) is obtained in this comparison (results in the status: Speech recognition evaluation mode), then the position address of the text part or word corresponding to the comparison (if applicable, also syllable) from the text file is saved as a value in the synchronization file (table), and the next word or group of words (possibly also syllable) corresponding to the text sequence is read from the text file and used for the (respective) subsequent comparison with the text currently generated by the speech recognition software. b2) If this comparison produces a negative comparison result (i.e. not matching or incorrect) (results in the status: mouse mode), then the position address of that text part or word from the text file is saved as a value in the synchronization file (table) under the address (or key) of the time value Ztime of the audio signal on which this comparison is based in the speech recognition software, which corresponds to the current position of the cursor controllable by the user (e.g. with the mouse or keys), whereby this status is retained until case b1 (of the above paragraph) occurs again. Procedure according to Claim 124 , characterized in that in the status mode mouse the respective current cursor position marks a capture area which uses a length (of the current string) extended by this capture area in the area of the word group located at the current cursor position as a comparison basis for the text currently reproduced as an audio signal from the audio file and converted by the speech recognition, within which the word recognized by the speech recognition is searched for, wherein when a word is recognized the system switches back to the status mode speech recognition evaluation. Procedure according to Claim 124 or 125 , characterized in that for each automatic switch to the mouse status mode in which the text selection is made by the user, the relevant text area to be selected by the user with the cursor function is highlighted in a different color. Procedure according to one of the Claims 124 until 126 , characterized in that all value pairs of the synchronization file, for which the speech recognition software switches to the status mode mouse due to a lack of recognition of the text reproduced by the audio signal, are stored for subsequent correction (in which the recorded audio signal is reproduced) saved and can be retrieved step by step during the correction. Procedure according to Claim 127 , characterized in that during the correction the audio signal is reproduced at a slower speed than that corresponding to the recording and that this deviation from the recording speed is corrected during the creation of the synchronization file (table) in relation to the key values or time values Ztime used for addressing (which correspond to the individual words of the text) in accordance with the ratio of the speed deviation. Procedure according to Claim 122 or 123 , whereby the file not reproduced according to a time grid displays a music file as graphic reference elements, or corresponds to a music file (also MIDI file) and the file reproduced according to a time grid corresponds to an audio file (Wave file, MP3), the audio signal (music) of which has a corresponding reference to the musical notation of the music file according to the reproduced tones, characterized by the following process steps for the automatic and/or semi-automatic creation of the Claim 38 or 39 mentioned synchronisation file (table): c) A frequency analysis is provided which converts the tones of the music of the mentioned audio file played back during recording and/or playback into a corresponding musical notation or even just a partial musical notation (only concerning the pitch) which is sufficient to assign it to an already existing musical notation, d) Starting from the (correct) start position of the musical notation file, the musical notation file is read out note by note or, if applicable, note group (string) by note group in sequence, step by step, according to the note sequence, whereby the read out note (or the note group or the string) is compared (step by step) with the musical notation currently generated by the note recognition software in each case (as a note or note group) in order to generate the assignment of the time value generated as a progressive code ZTime (as a time value) in the playback device to the corresponding positions in the musical notation as a synchronisation file (table). Procedure according to one of the Claims 122 until 129 , characterized in that the said synchronization file (table) is also addressable in reverse, or such a table is created in which the positions of the graphic reference elements (image elements such as text, musical notation) selected in the graphically displayed file (text, musical notation) which is not reproduced according to a time grid are used as an address (key) in order to read out the time values Ztime corresponding to the file (audio, video, flash) reproduced according to a time grid and to address the respective positions of the file (or signal) reproduced according to a time grid using the values read out. Procedure according to one of the Claims 122 until 130 , characterized in that the playback device generates the said progressive code ZTime (as a time value) using markers (or synchronizing signals) contained in the reproduced amplitude curve of the file reproduced according to a time grid, which markers synchronize the proportionality of the amplitude curve to time (as in audio playback, MP3 playback, video playback, the time clock usually refers, for example, to the amplitude curve of the signal, cf. output clock of a D/A converter or line synchronizing pulses of a video signal). Method according to one of the preceding method claims, characterized in that a mode is provided for the playback device which is switched on by markings or addresses coded in the file or in the data carrier (optionally switched off again if markings are missing), in which mode the said volume limitation of a played back audio book (or the played back audio file) can be prevented again by changing in good time to another medium (printed unit, text file) using the said synchronization file (table) by entering a text passage relating to the continuation of the text to continue playback (optionally coupled with a minimum waiting time). Procedure according to one of the Claims 122 until 132 , characterized in that the data transmission for the synchronization between audio playback and text, ditto vice versa, takes place via a mobile phone, which either contains a corresponding (MP3) player or has an interface to the playback device in order to load the updated data between the playback device and the server (ditto vice versa), wherein the mobile phone functions are then used accordingly for operation (SMS, voice recognition for switching on the playback cf. Claim 51 ).